ARM7 Prirucnik (LPC2138)

UM10120
Volume 1: LPC213x User Manual

Rev. 01 24 June 2005 User manual
Document information Info Keywords Abstract Content LPC2131, LPC2132, LPC2134, LPC2136, LPC2138, LPC2000, LPC213x, ARM, ARM7, embedded, 32-bit, microcontroller An initial LPC213x User Manual revision
Philips Semiconductors
Volume 1
UM10120
LPC2131/2/4/6/8 UM
Revision history Rev 01 Date 20050624 Description Initial version
Contact information
For additional information, please visit: http://www.semiconductors.philips.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: sales.addresses@www.semiconductors.philips.com
Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2005. All rights reserved.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
UM10120
Chapter 1: General information
1.1 Introduction
The LPC2131/32/34/36/38 microcontrollers are based on a 16/32 bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU with real-time emulation and embedded trace support, that combines the microcontroller with 32 kB, 64 kB, 128 kB, 256 kB and 512 kB of embedded high speed Flash memory. A 128-bit wide memory interface and a unique accelerator architecture enable 32-bit code execution at maximum clock rate. For critical code size applications, the alternative 16-bit Thumb Mode reduces code by more than 30 % with minimal performance penalty. Due to their tiny size and low power consumption, these microcontrollers are ideal for applications where miniaturization is a key requirement, such as access control and point-of-sale. With a wide range of serial communications interfaces and on-chip SRAM options of 8/16/32 kB, they are very well suited for communication gateways and protocol converters, soft modems, voice recognition and low end imaging, providing both large buffer size and high processing power. Various 32-bit timers, single or dual 10-bit 8 channel ADC(s), 10-bit DAC, PWM channels and 47 GPIO lines with up to nine edge or level sensitive external interrupt pins make these microcontrollers particularly suitable for industrial control and medical systems.
1.2 Features
16/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S microcontroller in a tiny LQFP64 package 8/16/32 kB of on-chip static RAM and 32/64/128/256/512 kB of on-chip Flash program
memory. 128 bit wide interface/accelerator enables high speed 60 MHz operation.
In-System/In-Application Programming (ISP/IAP) via on-chip boot-loader software.

Single Flash sector or full chip erase in 400 ms and 256 bytes programming in 1 ms.
EmbeddedICE and Embedded Trace interfaces offer real-time debugging with the
on-chip RealMonitor software and high speed tracing of instruction execution.
One (LPC2131/2) or two (LPC2134/6/8) 8 channel 10-bit A/D converters provide(s) a

total of up to 16 analog inputs, with conversion times as low as 2.44 s per channel.
Single 10-bit D/A converter provides variable analog output. (LPC2132/4/6/8 only). Two 32-bit timers/external event counters (with four capture and four compare
channels each), PWM unit (six outputs) and watchdog.
Low power Real-time clock with independent power and dedicated 32 kHz clock input. Multiple serial interfaces including two UARTs (16C550), two Fast I2C (400 kbit/s),
SPI and SSP with buffering and variable data length capabilities.
Vectored interrupt controller with configurable priorities and vector addresses.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 1: Introductory information
Up to 47 of 5 V tolerant general purpose I/O pins in tiny LQFP64 package. Up to nine edge or level sensitive external interrupt pins available. 60 MHz maximum CPU clock available from programmable on-chip Phase-Locked
Loop (PLL) with settling time of 100 s.
On-chip integrated oscillator operates with external crystal in range of 1 MHz to

30 MHz or with external oscillator from 1 MHz to 50 MHz.
Power saving modes include Idle and Power-down. Individual enable/disable of peripheral functions as well as peripheral clock scaling
down for additional power optimization.
Processor wake-up from Power-down mode via external interrupt or Real-time Clock. Single power supply chip with Power-On Reset (POR) and Brown-Out Detection
(BOD) circuits: CPU operating voltage range of 3.0 V to 3.6 V (3.3 V 10 %) with 5 V tolerant I/O pads
1.3 Applications

Industrial control Medical systems Access control Point-of-sale Communication gateway Embedded soft modem General purpose applications
1.4 Device information

Table 1: Device LPC2131/2132/2134/2136/2138 device information Number of pins 64 64 64 64 64 On-chip SRAM 8 kB 16 kB 16 kB 32 kB 32 kB On-chip FLASH 32 kB 64 kB 128 kB 256 kB 512 kB Number of 10-bit ADC channels 8 8 16 16 16 Number of 10-bit DAC channels 1 1 1 1 Note
LPC2131 LPC2132 LPC2134 LPC2136 LPC2138
UART1 with full modem interface UART1 with full modem interface UART1 with full modem interface
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
Volume 1
UM10120
1.5 Architectural overview

The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 consists of an ARM7TDMI-S CPU with emulation support, the ARM7 Local Bus for interface to on-chip memory controllers, the AMBA Advanced High-performance Bus (AHB) for interface to the interrupt controller, and the VLSI Peripheral Bus (VPB, a compatible superset of ARMs AMBA Advanced Peripheral Bus) for connection to on-chip peripheral functions. The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 configures the ARM7TDMI-S processor in little-endian byte order. AHB peripherals are allocated a 2 megabyte range of addresses at the very top of the 4 gigabyte ARM memory space. Each AHB peripheral is allocated a 16 kB address space within the AHB address space. LPC2131/2/4/6/8 peripheral functions (other than the interrupt controller) are connected to the VPB bus. The AHB to VPB bridge interfaces the VPB bus to the AHB bus. VPB peripherals are also allocated a 2 megabyte range of addresses, beginning at the 3.5 gigabyte address point. Each VPB peripheral is allocated a 16 kB address space within the VPB address space. The connection of on-chip peripherals to device pins is controlled by a Pin Connect Block (see chapter "Pin Connect Block" on page 73). This must be configured by software to fit specific application requirements for the use of peripheral functions and pins.
1.6 ARM7TDMI-S processor

The ARM7TDMI-S is a general purpose 32-bit microprocessor, which offers high performance and very low power consumption. The ARM architecture is based on Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC) principles, and the instruction set and related decode mechanism are much simpler than those of microprogrammed Complex Instruction Set Computers. This simplicity results in a high instruction throughput and impressive real-time interrupt response from a small and cost-effective processor core. Pipeline techniques are employed so that all parts of the processing and memory systems can operate continuously. Typically, while one instruction is being executed, its successor is being decoded, and a third instruction is being fetched from memory. The ARM7TDMI-S processor also employs a unique architectural strategy known as THUMB, which makes it ideally suited to high-volume applications with memory restrictions, or applications where code density is an issue. The key idea behind THUMB is that of a super-reduced instruction set. Essentially, the ARM7TDMI-S processor has two instruction sets:
The standard 32-bit ARM instruction set. A 16-bit THUMB instruction set.
The THUMB sets 16-bit instruction length allows it to approach twice the density of standard ARM code while retaining most of the ARMs performance advantage over a traditional 16-bit processor using 16-bit registers. This is possible because THUMB code operates on the same 32-bit register set as ARM code. THUMB code is able to provide up to 65% of the code size of ARM, and 160% of the performance of an equivalent ARM processor connected to a 16-bit memory system.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
Volume 1
UM10120
The ARM7TDMI-S processor is described in detail in the ARM7TDMI-S Datasheet that can be found on official ARM website.
1.7 On-chip Flash memory system

The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 incorporates a 32, 64, 128, 256 and 512 kB Flash memory system respectively. This memory may be used for both code and data storage. Programming of the Flash memory may be accomplished in several ways: over the serial builtin JTAG interface, using In System Programming (ISP) and UART0, or by means of In Application Programming (IAP) capabilities. The application program, using the IAP functions, may also erase and/or program the Flash while the application is running, allowing a great degree of flexibility for data storage field firmware upgrades, etc. When the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 on-chip bootloader is used, 32/64/128/256/500 kB of Flash memory is available for user code. The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 Flash memory provides minimum of 10,000 erase/write cycles and 10 years of data-retention.
1.8 On-chip Static RAM (SRAM)

On-chip Static RAM (SRAM) may be used for code and/or data storage. The on-chip SRAM may be accessed as 8-bits, 16-bits, and 32-bits. The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 provide 8/16/32 kB of static RAM respectively. The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 SRAM is designed to be accessed as a byte-addressed memory. Word and halfword accesses to the memory ignore the alignment of the address and access the naturally-aligned value that is addressed (so a memory access ignores address bits 0 and 1 for word accesses, and ignores bit 0 for halfword accesses). Therefore valid reads and writes require data accessed as halfwords to originate from addresses with address line 0 being 0 (addresses ending with 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, A, C, and E in hexadecimal nottaion) and data accessed as words to originate from adresses with address lines 0 and 1 being 0 (addresses ending with 0, 4, 8, and C in hexadecimal notation). This rule applies to both off and on-chip memory usage. The SRAM controller incorporates a write-back buffer in order to prevent CPU stalls during back-to-back writes. The write-back buffer always holds the last data sent by software to the SRAM. This data is only written to the SRAM when another write is requested by software (the data is only written to the SRAM when software does another write). If a chip reset occurs, actual SRAM contents will not reflect the most recent write request (i.e. after a "warm" chip reset, the SRAM does not reflect the last write operation). Any software that checks SRAM contents after reset must take this into account. Two identical writes to a location guarantee that the data will be present after a Reset. Alternatively, a dummy write operation before entering idle or power-down mode will similarly guarantee that the last data written will be present in SRAM after a subsequent Reset.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
Volume 1
UM10120
1.9 Block diagram

TMS(3) TDI(3) TRST(3) TCK(3) TDO(3) XTAL2 RST XTAL1
LPC2131/2132/2134/2136/2138
TEST/DEBUG INTERFACE
EMULATION TRACE MODULE
PLL system clock
SYSTEM FUNCTIONS VECTORED INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
ARM7TDMI-S
AHB BRIDGE ARM7 local bus
AMBA AHB (Advanced High-performance Bus)
INTERNAL SRAM CONTROLLER
INTERNAL FLASH CONTROLLER
AHB DECODER AHB TO VPB BRIDGE VPB DIVIDER
8/16/32 kB SRAM
32/64/128/ 256/512 kB FLASH
VPB (VLSI peripheral bus) EINT3:0 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS I2C SERIAL INTERFACES 0 AND 1 SCL0,1 SDA0,1 SCK0,1 SPI AND SSP SERIAL INTERFACES MOSI0,1 MISO0,1 SSEL0,1 AD0.7:0 AD1.7:0(1) A/D CONVERTERS 0 AND 1(1) UART0/UART1 TXD0,1 RXD0,1
8 CAP0 8 MAT
CAPTURE/ COMPARE TIMER 0/TIMER 1
AOUT(2)
D/A CONVERTER(2)
REAL TIME CLOCK GENERAL PURPOSE I/O WATCHDOG TIMER
DSR1(1),CTS1(1), RTS1(1), DTR1(1) DCD1(1),RI1(1)

RTXC1 RTXC2 VBAT
P0.31:0 P1.31:16
PWM6:1
PWM0 SYSTEM CONTROL
002aab067
(1) LPC2134/2136/2138 only. (2) LPC2132/2134/2136/2138 only. (3) Pins shared with GPIO.
Fig 1. LPC2131/2/4/6/8 block diagram

User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
UM10120
Chapter 2: LPC2131/2/4/6/8 Memory Addressing
2.1 Memory maps

The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 incorporates several distinct memory regions, shown in the following figures. Figure 2 shows the overall map of the entire address space from the user program viewpoint following reset. The interrupt vector area supports address remapping, which is described later in this section.
4.0 GB AHB PERIPHERALS 3.75 GB VPB PERIPHERALS 3.5 GB
0xFFFF FFFF 0xF000 0000 0xE000 0000
3.0 GB
RESERVED ADDRESS SPACE
0xC000 0000
2.0 GB
BOOT BLOCK (REMAPPED FROM ON-CHIP FLASH MEMORY) RESERVED ADDRESS SPACE
0x8000 0000
32 kB ON-CHIP STATIC RAM (LPC2136/2138) 16 kB ON-CHIP STATIC RAM (LPC2132/2134) 8 kB ON-CHIP STATIC RAM (LPC2131) 1.0 GB RESERVED ADDRESS SPACE
0x4000 8000 0x4000 7FFF 0x4000 4000 0x4000 3FFF 0x4000 2000 0x4000 1FFF 0x4000 0000
0.0 GB
TOTAL OF 512 kB ON-CHIP NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (LPC2138) TOTAL OF 256 kB ON-CHIP NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (LPC2136) TOTAL OF 128 kB ON-CHIP NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (LPC2134) TOTAL OF 64 kB ON-CHIP NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (LPC2132) TOTAL OF 32 kB ON-CHIP NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (LPC2131)
0x0008 0000 0x0007 FFFF 0x0004 0000 0x0003 FFFF 0x0002 0000 0x0001 FFFF 0x0001 0000 0x0000 FFFF 0x0000 8000 0x0000 7FFF 0x0000 0000
Fig 2. System memory map
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 2: Memory map
4.0 GB AHB PERIPHERALS 4.0 GB - 2 MB
0xFFFF FFFF 0xFFE0 0000 0xFFDF FFFF
Notes: - AHB section is 128 x 16 kB blocks (totaling 2 MB). - VPB section is 128 x 16 kB blocks (totaling 2 MB).
RESERVED
3.75 GB
0xF000 0000 0xEFFF FFFF
RESERVED
3.5 GB + 2 MB VPB PERIPHERALS 3.5 GB

Fig 3. Peripheral memory map
0xE020 0000 0xE01F FFFF 0xE000 0000
Figures 3 through 5 show different views of the peripheral address space. Both the AHB and VPB peripheral areas are 2 megabyte spaces which are divided up into 128 peripherals. Each peripheral space is 16 kilobytes in size. This allows simplifying the
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
Volume 1
UM10120
address decoding for each peripheral. All peripheral register addresses are word aligned (to 32-bit boundaries) regardless of their size. This eliminates the need for byte lane mapping hardware that would be required to allow byte (8-bit) or half-word (16-bit) accesses to occur at smaller boundaries. An implication of this is that word and half-word registers must be accessed all at once. For example, it is not possible to read or write the upper byte of a word register separately.
VECTORED INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
0xFFFF F000 (4G - 4K)
0xFFFF C000 (AHB PERIPHERAL #126) 0xFFFF 8000 (AHB PERIPHERAL #125) 0xFFFF 4000 (AHB PERIPHERAL #124) 0xFFFF 0000
0xFFE1 0000 (AHB PERIPHERAL #3) 0xFFE0 C000 (AHB PERIPHERAL #2) 0xFFE0 8000 (AHB PERIPHERAL #1) 0xFFE0 4000 (AHB PERIPHERAL #0) 0xFFE0 0000
Fig 4. AHB peripheral map
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
10
Volume 1
UM10120
SYSTEM CONTROL BLOCK (VPB PERIPHERAL #127) (VPB PERIPHERALS #28-126) NOT USED
0xE01F FFFF 0xE01F C000
0xE007 0000 DAC (VPB PERIPHERAL #27) SSP (VPB PERIPHERAL #26) NOT USED (VPB PERIPHERAL #25) 10 BIT AD1 (LPC2138) (VPB PERIPHERAL #24) I2 C1 (VPB PERIPHERAL #23) NOT USED (VPB PERIPHERAL #14-22) 10 BIT ADO (VPB PERIPHERAL #13) NOT USED (VPB PERIPHERAL #12) PIN CONNECT BLOCK (VPB PERIPHERAL #11) GPIO (VPB PERIPHERAL #10) RTC (VPB PERIPHERAL #9) SPI0 (VPB PERIPHERAL #8) I2 C0 (VPB PERIPHERAL #7) NOT USED (VPB PERIPHERAL #6) PWM (VPB PERIPHERAL #5) UART1 (VPB PERIPHERAL #4) URT0 (VPB PERIPHERAL #3) TIMER1 (VPB PERIPHERAL #2) TIMER0 (VPB PERIPHERAL #1) WATCHDOG TIMER (VPB PERIPHERAL #0)
Fig 5. VPB peripheral map
0xE006 C000 0xE006 8000 0xE006 4000 0xE006 0000 0xE005 C000 0xE003 8000 0xE003 4000 0xE003 0000 0xE002 C000 0xE002 8000 0xE002 4000 0xE002 0000 0xE001 C000 0xE001 8000 0xE001 4000 0xE001 0000 0xE000 C000 0xE000 8000 0xE000 4000 0xE000 0000
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
11
Volume 1
UM10120
2.2 LPC2131/2132/2134/2136/2138 memory re-mapping and boot block

2.2.1 Memory map concepts and operating modes
The basic concept on the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 is that each memory area has a "natural" location in the memory map. This is the address range for which code residing in that area is written. The bulk of each memory space remains permanently fixed in the same location, eliminating the need to have portions of the code designed to run in different address ranges. Because of the location of the interrupt vectors on the ARM7 processor (at addresses 0x0000 0000 through 0x0000 001C, as shown in Table 2 below), a small portion of the Boot Block and SRAM spaces need to be re-mapped in order to allow alternative uses of interrupts in the different operating modes described in Table 3. Re-mapping of the interrupts is accomplished via the Memory Mapping Control feature (Section 3.6 Memory mapping control on page 25).
Table 2: Address 0x0000 0000 0x0000 0004 0x0000 0008 0x0000 000C 0x0000 0010 0x0000 0014 ARM exception vector locations Exception Reset Undefined Instruction Software Interrupt Prefetch Abort (instruction fetch memory fault) Data Abort (data access memory fault) Reserved Note: Identified as reserved in ARM documentation, this location is used by the Boot Loader as the Valid User Program key. This is descibed in detail in "Flash Memory System and Programming" chapter on page 216. 0x0000 0018 0x0000 001C Table 3: Mode Boot Loader mode User Flash mode IRQ FIQ
LPC2131/2/4/6/8 memory mapping modes Activation Hardware activation by any Reset Software activation by Boot code Usage The Boot Loader always executes after any reset. The Boot Block interrupt vectors are mapped to the bottom of memory to allow handling exceptions and using interrupts during the Boot Loading process. Activated by Boot Loader when a valid User Program Signature is recognized in memory and Boot Loader operation is not forced. Interrupt vectors are not re-mapped and are found in the bottom of the Flash memory.
User RAM Software Activated by a User Program as desired. Interrupt vectors are mode activation by re-mapped to the bottom of the Static RAM. User program
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
12
Volume 1
UM10120
2.2.2 Memory re-mapping

In order to allow for compatibility with future derivatives, the entire Boot Block is mapped to the top of the on-chip memory space. In this manner, the use of larger or smaller flash modules will not require changing the location of the Boot Block (which would require changing the Boot Loader code itself) or changing the mapping of the Boot Block interrupt vectors. Memory spaces other than the interrupt vectors remain in fixed locations. Figure 6 shows the on-chip memory mapping in the modes defined above. The portion of memory that is re-mapped to allow interrupt processing in different modes includes the interrupt vector area (32 bytes) and an additional 32 bytes, for a total of 64 bytes. The re-mapped code locations overlay addresses 0x0000 0000 through 0x0000 003F. A typical user program in the Flash memory can place the entire FIQ handler at address 0x0000 001C without any need to consider memory boundaries. The vector contained in the SRAM, external memory, and Boot Block must contain branches to the actual interrupt handlers, or to other instructions that accomplish the branch to the interrupt handlers. There are three reasons this configuration was chosen: 1. To give the FIQ handler in the Flash memory the advantage of not having to take a memory boundary caused by the remapping into account. 2. Minimize the need to for the SRAM and Boot Block vectors to deal with arbitrary boundaries in the middle of code space. 3. To provide space to store constants for jumping beyond the range of single word branch instructions. Re-mapped memory areas, including the Boot Block and interrupt vectors, continue to appear in their original location in addition to the re-mapped address. Details on re-mapping and examples can be found in Section 3.6 Memory mapping control on page 25.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
13
Volume 1
UM10120
2.0 GB 2.0 GB - 12 kB
12 kB BOOT BLOCK
(RE-MAPPED FROM TOP OF FLASH MEMORY) (BOOT BLOCK INTERRUPT VECTORS)
0x8000 0000 0x7FFF FFFF
RESERVED ADDRESSING SPACE
0x4000 8000 0x4000 7FFF 32 kB ON-CHIP SRAM 1.0 GB

(SRAM INTERRUPT VECTORS)
0x4000 0000 0x3FFF FFFF
RESERVED ADDRESSING SPACE
(12 kB BOOT BLOCK RE-MAPPED TO HIGHER ADDRESS RANGE)
0x0008 0000 0x0007 FFFF
512 kB FLASH MEMORY
0.0 GB
ACTIVE INTERRUPT VECTORS (FROM FLASH, SRAM, OR BOOT BLOCK)
0x0000 0000
Note: Memory regions are not drawn to scale.

Fig 6. Map of lower memory is showing re-mapped and re-mappable areas (LPC2138 with 512 kB Flash)
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
14
Volume 1
UM10120
2.3 Prefetch abort and data abort exceptions

The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 generates the appropriate bus cycle abort exception if an access is attempted for an address that is in a reserved or unassigned address region. The regions are:
Areas of the memory map that are not implemented for a specific ARM derivative. For
the LPC2131/2/4/6/8, this is: Address space between On-Chip Non-Volatile Memory and On-Chip SRAM, labelled "Reserved Address Space" in Figure 2 and Figure 6. For 32 kB Flash device this is memory address range from 0x0000 8000 to 0x3FFF FFFF, for 64 kB Flash device this is memory address range from 0x0001 0000 to 0x3FFF FFFF, for 128 kB Flash device this is memory address range from 0x0002 0000 to 0x3FFF FFFF, for 256 kB Flash device this is memory address range from 0x0004 0000 to 0x3FFF FFFF while for 512 kB Flash device this range is from 0x0008 0000 to 0x3FFF FFFF. Address space between On-Chip Static RAM and the Boot Block. Labelled "Reserved Address Space" in Figure 2. For 8 kB SRAM device this is memory address range from 0x4000 2000 to 0x7FFF CFFF, for 16 kB SRAM device this is memory address range from 0x4000 4000 to 0x7FFF CFFF, while for 32 kB SRAM device this range is from 0x4000 8000 to 0x7FFF CFFF. Address space between 0x8000 0000 and 0xDFFF FFFF, labelled "Reserved Adress Space". Reserved regions of the AHB and VPB spaces. See Figure 3.
Unassigned AHB peripheral spaces. See Figure 4. Unassigned VPB peripheral spaces. See Figure 5.
For these areas, both attempted data access and instruction fetch generate an exception. In addition, a Prefetch Abort exception is generated for any instruction fetch that maps to an AHB or VPB peripheral address. Within the address space of an existing VPB peripheral, a data abort exception is not generated in response to an access to an undefined address. Address decoding within each peripheral is limited to that needed to distinguish defined registers within the peripheral itself. For example, an access to address 0xE000 D000 (an undefined address within the UART0 space) may result in an access to the register defined at address 0xE000 C000. Details of such address aliasing within a peripheral space are not defined in the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 documentation and are not a supported feature. Note that the ARM core stores the Prefetch Abort flag along with the associated instruction (which will be meaningless) in the pipeline and processes the abort only if an attempt is made to execute the instruction fetched from the illegal address. This prevents accidental aborts that could be caused by prefetches that occur when code is executed very near a memory boundary.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
15
UM10120
Chapter 3: System Control Block
3.1 Summary of system control block functions

The System Control Block includes several system features and control registers for a number of functions that are not related to specific peripheral devices. These include:
Crystal Oscillator External Interrupt Inputs Memory Mapping Control PLL Power Control Reset VPB Divider Wakeup Timer
Each type of function has its own register(s) if any are required and unneeded bits are defined as reserved in order to allow future expansion. Unrelated functions never share the same register addresses
3.2 Pin description

Table 4 shows pins that are associated with System Control block functions.
Table 4: Pin name X1 X2 EINT0 Pin summary Pin direction Input Output Input Pin description Crystal Oscillator Input - Input to the oscillator and internal clock generator circuits Crystal Oscillator Output - Output from the oscillator amplifier External Interrupt Input 0 - An active low/high level or falling/rising edge general purpose interrupt input. This pin may be used to wake up the processor from Idle or Power-down modes. Pins P0.1 and P0.16 can be selected to perform EINT0 function. EINT1 Input External Interrupt Input 1 - See the EINT0 description above. Pins P0.3 and P0.14 can be selected to perform EINT1 function. Important: LOW level on pin P0.14 immediately after reset is considered as an external hardware request to start the ISP command handler. More details on ISP and Serial Boot Loader can be found in "Flash Memory System and Programming" chapter on page 216.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
16
Volume 1
UM10120
Pin summary Pin direction Input Input Pin description External Interrupt Input 2 - See the EINT0 description above. Pins P0.7 and P0.15 can be selected to perform EINT2 function. External Interrupt Input 3 - See the EINT0 description above. Pins P0.9, P0.20 and P0.30 can be selected to perform EINT3 function.
Table 4: Pin name EINT2 EINT3
RESET
Input
External Reset input - A LOW on this pin resets the chip, causing I/O ports and peripherals to take on their default states, and the processor to begin execution at address 0x0000 0000.
3.3 Register description

All registers, regardless of size, are on word address boundaries. Details of the registers appear in the description of each function.
Table 5: Name Summary of system control registers Description Access Reset value[1] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0x03BE 0 0 o Address
External Interrupts EXTINT EXTWAKE EXTMODE EXTPOLAR MEMMAP PLLCON PLLCFG PLLSTAT PLLFEED Power Control PCON PCONP VPB Divider VPBDIV Reset RSID CSPR
[1]
External Interrupt Flag Register External Interrupt Wakeup Register External Interrupt Flag register External Interrupt Wakeup Register Memory Mapping Control PLL Control Register PLL Configuration Register PLL Status Register PLL Feed Register Power Control Register Power Control for Peripherals VPB Divider Control Reset Source Identification Register Code Security Protection Register
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO WO R/W R/W R/W R/W RO
0xE01F C140 0xE01F C144 0xE01F C148 0xE01F C14C 0xE01F C040 0xE01F C080 0xE01F C084 0xE01F C088 0xE01F C08C 0xE01F C0C0 0xE01F C0C4 0xE01F C100 0xE01F C180 0xE01F C184
Memory Mapping Control Phase Locked Loop
Code Security/Debugging
Reset value relects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
17
Volume 1
UM10120
3.4 Crystal oscillator

While an input signal of 50-50 duty cycle within a frequency range from 1 MHz to 50 MHz can be used by the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 if supplied to its input XTAL1 pin, this microcontrollers onboard oscillator circuit supports external crystals in the range of 1 MHz to 30 MHz only. If the on-chip PLL system or the boot-loader is used, the input clock frequency is limited to an exclusive range of 10 MHz to 25 MHz. The oscillator output frequency is called FOSC and the ARM processor clock frequency is referred to as CCLK for purposes of rate equations, etc. elsewhere in this document. FOSC and CCLK are the same value unless the PLL is running and connected. Refer to the Section 3.7 Phase Locked Loop (PLL) on page 26 for details and frequency limitations. The onboard oscillator in the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 can operate in one of two modes: slave mode and oscillation mode. In slave mode the input clock signal should be coupled by means of a capacitor of 100 pF (CC in Figure 7, drawing a), with an amplitude of at least 200 mVrms. The X2 pin in this configuration can be left not connected. If slave mode is selected, the FOSC signal of 50-50 duty cycle can range from 1 MHz to 50 MHz. External components and models used in oscillation mode are shown in Figure 7, drawings b and c, and in Table 6. Since the feedback resistance is integrated on chip, only a crystal and the capacitances CX1 and CX2 need to be connected externally in case of fundamental mode oscillation (the fundamental frequency is represented by L, CL and RS). Capacitance CP in Figure 7, drawing c, represents the parallel package capacitance and should not be larger than 7 pF. Parameters FC, CL, RS and CP are supplied by the crystal manufacturer. Choosing an oscillation mode as an on-board oscillator mode of operation limits FOSC clock selection to 1 MHz to 30 MHz.
LPC2131/2/4/6/8 X1 X2
LPC2131/2/4/6/8 X1 X2
L <=> CX1 Xtal CX2
CC Clock
CL RS
CP
a)
b)
c)
Fig 7. Oscillator modes and models: a) slave mode of operation, b) oscillation mode of operation, c) external crystal model used for CX1/X2 evaluation
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
18
Volume 1
UM10120
Recommended values for CX1/X2 in oscillation mode (crystal and external components parameters) Maximum crystal series resistance RS NA NA < 300 < 300 < 300 < 300 < 300 < 220 < 140 < 220 < 140 < 80 < 160 < 90 < 50 < 130 < 50 NA External load capacitors CX1, CX2 NA NA 58 pF, 58 pF 18 pF, 18 pF 38 pF, 38 pF 58 pF, 58 pF 18 pF, 18 pF 38 pF, 38 pF 58 pF, 58 pF 18 pF, 18 pF 38 pF, 38 pF 58 pF, 58 pF 18 pF, 18 pF 38 pF, 38 pF 58 pF, 58 pF 18 pF, 18 pF 38 pF, 38 pF NA
Table 6:
Fundamental Crystal load oscillation frequency capacitance CL FC 1 MHz - 5 MHz 10 pF 20 pF 30 pF 5 MHz - 10 MHz 10 pF 20 pF 30 pF 10 MHz - 15 MHz 10 pF 20 pF 30 pF 15 MHz - 20 MHz 10 pF 20 pF 30 pF 20 MHz - 25 MHz 10 pF 20 pF 30 pF 25 MHz - 30 MHz 10 pF 20 pF 30 pF
f OSC selection
True
On-chip PLL used in application? False
True
ISP used for initial code download? False External crystal oscillator used? False True
MIN f = 10 MHz OSC MAX f OSC = 25 MHz (Figure 7, mode a and/or b)
MIN fOSC = 1 MHz MAX f OSC = 50 MHz (Figure 7, mode a)
MIN fOSC = 1 MHz MAX f OSC = 30 MHz (Figure 7, mode b)
Fig 8. FOSC selection algorithm

User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
19
Volume 1
UM10120
3.5 External interrupt inputs

The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 includes four External Interrupt Inputs as selectable pin functions. The External Interrupt Inputs can optionally be used to wake up the processor from Power-down mode.
3.5.1 Register description

The external interrupt function has four registers associated with it. The EXTINT register contains the interrupt flags, and the EXTWAKEUP register contains bits that enable individual external interrupts to wake up the microcontroller from Power-down mode. The EXTMODE and EXTPOLAR registers specify the level and edge sensitivity parameters.
Table 7: Name EXTINT External interrupt registers Description The External Interrupt Flag Register contains interrupt flags for EINT0, EINT1, EINT2 and EINT3. See Table 8. The Interrupt Wakeup Register contains four enable bits that control whether each external interrupt will cause the processor to wake up from Power-down mode. See Table 9. The External Interrupt Mode Register controls whether each pin is edge- or levelsensitive. Access Reset Address value[1] R/W 0 0xE01F C140
INTWAKE
R/W
0xE01F C144
EXTMODE EXTPOLAR
R/W
0 0
0xE01F C148 0xE01F C14C
The External Interrupt Polarity Register controls R/W which level or edge on each pin will cause an interrupt.
[1]
3.5.2 External Interrupt Flag register (EXTINT - 0xE01F C140)

When a pin is selected for its external interrupt function, the level or edge on that pin (selected by its bits in the EXTPOLAR and EXTMODE registers) will set its interrupt flag in this register. This asserts the corresponding interrupt request to the VIC, which will cause an interrupt if interrupts from the pin are enabled. Writing ones to bits EINT0 through EINT3 in EXTINT register clears the corresponding bits. In level-sensitive mode this action is efficacious only when the pin is in its inactive state. Once a bit from EINT0 to EINT3 is set and an appropriate code starts to execute (handling wakeup and/or external interrupt), this bit in EXTINT register must be cleared. Otherwise the event that was just triggered by activity on the EINT pin will not be recognized in the future. Important: whenever a change of external interrupt operating mode (i.e. active level/edge) is performed (including the initialization of an external interrupt), the corresponding bit in the EXTINT register must be cleared! For details see Section 3.5.4 External Interrupt Mode register (EXTMODE - 0xE01F C148) and Section 3.5.5 External Interrupt Polarity register (EXTPOLAR - 0xE01F C14C).
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
20
Volume 1
UM10120
For example, if a system wakes up from power-down using a low level on external interrupt 0 pin, its post-wakeup code must reset the EINT0 bit in order to allow future entry into the power-down mode. If the EINT0 bit is left set to 1, subsequent attempt(s) to invoke power-down mode will fail. The same goes for external interrupt handling. More details on power-down mode will be discussed in the following chapters.
Table 8: Bit 0 External Interrupt Flag register (EXTINT - address 0xE01F C140) bit description Description Reset value
Symbol EINT0
In level-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT0 function is selected for its pin, and the pin is in 0 its active state. In edge-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT0 function is selected for its pin, and the selected edge occurs on the pin. Up to two pins can be selected to perform the EINT0 function (see P0.1 and P0.16 description in "Pin Configuration" chapter page 64.) This bit is cleared by writing a one to it, except in level sensitive mode when the pin is in its active state (e.g. if EINT0 is selected to be low level sensitive and a low level is present on the corresponding pin, this bit can not be cleared; this bit can be cleared only when the signal on the pin becomes high).
EINT1
In level-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT1 function is selected for its pin, and the pin is in 0 its active state. In edge-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT1 function is selected for its pin, and the selected edge occurs on the pin. Up to two pins can be selected to perform the EINT1 function (see P0.3 and P0.14 description in "Pin Configuration" chapter on page 64.) This bit is cleared by writing a one to it, except in level sensitive mode when the pin is in its active state (e.g. if EINT1 is selected to be low level sensitive and a low level is present on the corresponding pin, this bit can not be cleared; this bit can be cleared only when the signal on the pin becomes high).
EINT2
In level-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT2 function is selected for its pin, and the pin is in 0 its active state. In edge-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT2 function is selected for its pin, and the selected edge occurs on the pin. Up to two pins can be selected to perform the EINT2 function (see P0.7 and P0.15 description in "Pin Configuration" chapter on page 64.) This bit is cleared by writing a one to it, except in level sensitive mode when the pin is in its active state (e.g. if EINT2 is selected to be low level sensitive and a low level is present on the corresponding pin, this bit can not be cleared; this bit can be cleared only when the signal on the pin becomes high).
EINT3
In level-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT3 function is selected for its pin, and the pin is in 0 its active state. In edge-sensitive mode, this bit is set if the EINT3 function is selected for its pin, and the selected edge occurs on the pin. Up to three pins can be selected to perform the EINT3 function (see P0.9, P0.20 and P0.30 description in "Pin Configuration" chapter on page 64.) This bit is cleared by writing a one to it, except in level sensitive mode when the pin is in its active state (e.g. if EINT3 is selected to be low level sensitive and a low level is present on the corresponding pin, this bit can not be cleared; this bit can be cleared only when the signal on the pin becomes high).
7:4
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved NA bit is not defined.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
21
Volume 1
UM10120
3.5.3 Interrupt Wakeup register (INTWAKE - 0xE01F C144)

Enable bits in the INTWAKE register allow the external interrupts to wake up the processor if it is in Power-down mode. The related EINTn function must be mapped to the pin in order for the wakeup process to take place. It is not necessary for the interrupt to be enabled in the Vectored Interrupt Controller for a wakeup to take place. This arrangement allows additional capabilities, such as having an external interrupt input wake up the processor from Power-down mode without causing an interrupt (simply resuming operation), or allowing an interrupt to be enabled during Power-down without waking the processor up if it is asserted (eliminating the need to disable the interrupt if the wakeup feature is not desirable in the application). For an external interrupt pin to be a source that would wake up the microcontroller from Power-down mode, it is also necessary to clear the corresponding bit in the External Interrupt Flag register (Section 3.5.2 on page 20).
Table 9: Bit 0 1 2 3 13:4 14 15 Interrupt Wakeup register (INTWAKE - address 0xE01F C144) bit description Description Reset value
Symbol EXTWAKE0 EXTWAKE1 EXTWAKE2 EXTWAKE3 BODWAKE RTCWAKE
When one, assertion of EINT0 will wake up the processor from 0 Power-down mode. When one, assertion of EINT1 will wake up the processor from 0 Power-down mode. When one, assertion of EINT2 will wake up the processor from 0 Power-down mode. When one, assertion of EINT3 will wake up the processor from 0 Power-down mode. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. NA The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. When one, a BOD interrupt will wake up the processor from Power-down mode. When one, assertion of an RTC interrupt will wake up the processor from Power-down mode. 0 0
3.5.4 External Interrupt Mode register (EXTMODE - 0xE01F C148)

The bits in this register select whether each EINT pin is level- or edge-sensitive. Only pins that are selected for the EINT function (see chapter Pin Connect Block on page 73) and enabled via the VICIntEnable register (Section 5.4.4 Interrupt Enable register (VICIntEnable - 0xFFFF F010) on page 52) can cause interrupts from the External Interrupt function (though of course pins selected for other functions may cause interrupts from those functions). Note: Software should only change a bit in this register when its interrupt is disabled in the VICIntEnable register, and should write the corresponding 1 to the EXTINT register before enabling (initializing) or re-enabling the interrupt, to clear the EXTINT bit that could be set by changing the mode.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
22
Volume 1
UM10120
External Interrupt Mode register (EXTMODE - address 0xE01F C148) bit description Value Description Level-sensitivity is selected for EINT0. EINT0 is edge sensitive. Level-sensitivity is selected for EINT1. EINT1 is edge sensitive. Level-sensitivity is selected for EINT2. EINT2 is edge sensitive. Level-sensitivity is selected for EINT3. EINT3 is edge sensitive. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA 0 0 0 Reset value 0
Table 10: Bit 0 1 2 3 7:4
Symbol
EXTMODE0 0 1 EXTMODE1 0 1 EXTMODE2 0 1 EXTMODE3 0 1 -
3.5.5 External Interrupt Polarity register (EXTPOLAR - 0xE01F C14C)

In level-sensitive mode, the bits in this register select whether the corresponding pin is high- or low-active. In edge-sensitive mode, they select whether the pin is rising- or falling-edge sensitive. Only pins that are selected for the EINT function (see "Pin Connect Block" chapter on page 73) and enabled in the VICIntEnable register (Section 5.4.4 Interrupt Enable register (VICIntEnable - 0xFFFF F010) on page 52) can cause interrupts from the External Interrupt function (though of course pins selected for other functions may cause interrupts from those functions). Note: Software should only change a bit in this register when its interrupt is disabled in the VICIntEnable register, and should write the corresponding 1 to the EXTINT register before enabling (initializing) or re-enabling the interrupt, to clear the EXTINT bit that could be set by changing the polarity.
Table 11: Bit 0 External Interrupt Polarity register (EXTPOLAR - address 0xE01F C14C) bit description Value Description EINT0 is low-active or falling-edge sensitive (depending on EXTMODE0). EINT0 is high-active or rising-edge sensitive (depending on EXTMODE0). EINT1 is low-active or falling-edge sensitive (depending on EXTMODE1). EINT1 is high-active or rising-edge sensitive (depending on EXTMODE1). EINT2 is low-active or falling-edge sensitive (depending on EXTMODE2). EINT2 is high-active or rising-edge sensitive (depending on EXTMODE2). 0 0 Reset value 0
Symbol
EXTPOLAR0 0 1
EXTPOLAR1 0 1
EXTPOLAR2 0 1
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
23
Volume 1
UM10120
External Interrupt Polarity register (EXTPOLAR - address 0xE01F C14C) bit description Value Description EINT3 is low-active or falling-edge sensitive (depending on EXTMODE3). EINT3 is high-active or rising-edge sensitive (depending on EXTMODE3). Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA Reset value 0
Table 11: Bit 3
Symbol
EXTPOLAR3 0 1
7:4 -
3.5.6 Multiple external interrupt pins

Software can select multiple pins for each of EINT3:0 in the Pin Select registers, which are described in chapter Pin Connect Block on page 73. The external interrupt logic for each of EINT3:0 receives the state of all of its associated pins from the pins receivers, along with signals that indicate whether each pin is selected for the EINT function. The external interrupt logic handles the case when more than one pin is so selected, differently according to the state of its Mode and Polarity bits:
In Low-Active Level Sensitive mode, the states of all pins selected for the same EINTx
functionality are digitally combined using a positive logic AND gate.
In High-Active Level Sensitive mode, the states of all pins selected for the same
EINTx functionality are digitally combined using a positive logic OR gate.
In Edge Sensitive mode, regardless of polarity, the pin with the lowest GPIO port
number is used. (Selecting multiple pins for an EINTx in edge-sensitive mode could be considered a programming error.) The signal derived by this logic is the EINTi signal in the following logic schematic Figure 9. For example, if the EINT3 function is selected in the PINSEL0 and PINSEL1 registers for pins P0.9, P0.20 and P0.30, and EINT3 is configured to be low level sensitive, the inputs from all three pins will be logically ANDed. When more than one EINT pin is logically ORed, the interrupt service routine can read the states of the pins from the GPIO port using the IO0PIN and IO1PIN registers, to determine which pin(s) caused the interrupt.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
24
Volume 1
UM10120
Wakeup enable (one bit of EXTWAKE)
VPB Read of EXTWAKE EINTi to Wakeup Timer (Figure 11)
VPB Bus Data
EINTi
GLITCH FILTER
PCLK
EXTPOLARi D S Q EXTMODEi R R PCLK Reset Write 1 to EXTINTi

Fig 9. External interrupt logic
Interrupt Flag (one bit of EXTINT) 1 S Q R PCLK S Q
3.6 Memory mapping control

The Memory Mapping Control alters the mapping of the interrupt vectors that appear beginning at address 0x0000 0000. This allows code running in different memory spaces to have control of the interrupts.
3.6.1 Memory Mapping control register (MEMMAP - 0xE01F C040)

Whenever an exception handling is necessary, the microcontroller will fetch an instruction residing on the exception corresponding address as described in Table 2 ARM exception vector locations on page 12. The MEMMAP register determines the source of data that will fill this table.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
25
Volume 1
UM10120
Memory Mapping control register (MEMMAP - address 0xE01F C040) bit description Description Boot Loader Mode. Interrupt vectors are re-mapped to Boot Block. User Flash Mode. Interrupt vectors are not re-mapped and reside in Flash. User RAM Mode. Interrupt vectors are re-mapped to Static RAM. Reserved. Do not use this option. Reset value 00
Table 12: Bit 1:0
Symbol Value MAP 00 01 10 11
Warning: Improper setting of this value may result in incorrect operation of the device. 7:2 Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA
3.6.2 Memory mapping control usage notes

The Memory Mapping Control simply selects one out of three available sources of data (sets of 64 bytes each) necessary for handling ARM exceptions (interrupts). For example, whenever a Software Interrupt request is generated, the ARM core will always fetch 32-bit data "residing" on 0x0000 0008 see Table 2 ARM exception vector locations on page 12. This means that when MEMMAP[1:0]=10 (User RAM Mode), a read/fetch from 0x0000 0008 will provide data stored in 0x4000 0008. In case of MEMMAP[1:0]=00 (Boot Loader Mode), a read/fetch from 0x0000 0008 will provide data available also at 0x7FFF E008 (Boot Block remapped from on-chip Bootloader).
3.7 Phase Locked Loop (PLL)

The PLL accepts an input clock frequency in the range of 10 MHz to 25 MHz only. The input frequency is multiplied up into the CCLK with the range of 10 MHz to 60 MHz using a Current Controlled Oscillator (CCO). The multiplier can be an integer value from 1 to 32 (in practice, the multiplier value cannot be higher than 6 on the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 due to the upper frequency limit of the CPU). The CCO operates in the range of 156 MHz to 320 MHz, so there is an additional divider in the loop to keep the CCO within its frequency range while the PLL is providing the desired output frequency. The output divider may be set to divide by 2, 4, 8, or 16 to produce the output clock. Since the minimum output divider value is 2, it is insured that the PLL output has a 50% duty cycle. A block diagram of the PLL is shown in Figure 10. PLL activation is controlled via the PLLCON register. The PLL multiplier and divider values are controlled by the PLLCFG register. These two registers are protected in order to prevent accidental alteration of PLL parameters or deactivation of the PLL. Since all chip operations, including the Watchdog Timer, are dependent on the PLL when it is providing the chip clock, accidental changes to the PLL setup could result in unexpected behavior of the microcontroller. The protection is accomplished by a feed sequence similar to that of the Watchdog Timer. Details are provided in the description of the PLLFEED register.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
26
Volume 1
UM10120
The PLL is turned off and bypassed following a chip Reset and when by entering Power-down mode. The PLL is enabled by software only. The program must configure and activate the PLL, wait for the PLL to Lock, then connect to the PLL as a clock source.

The PLL is controlled by the registers shown in Table 13. More detailed descriptions follow. Warning: Improper setting of the PLL values may result in incorrect operation of the device!
Table 13: Name PLLCON PLL registers Description Access Reset Address value[1] 0 0xE01F C080
PLL Control Register. Holding register for R/W updating PLL control bits. Values written to this register do not take effect until a valid PLL feed sequence has taken place. PLL Configuration Register. Holding register for R/W updating PLL configuration values. Values written to this register do not take effect until a valid PLL feed sequence has taken place. PLL Status Register. Read-back register for RO PLL control and configuration information. If PLLCON or PLLCFG have been written to, but a PLL feed sequence has not yet occurred, they will not reflect the current PLL state. Reading this register provides the actual values controlling the PLL, as well as the status of the PLL. PLL Feed Register. This register enables WO loading of the PLL control and configuration information from the PLLCON and PLLCFG registers into the shadow registers that actually affect PLL operation.
PLLCFG
0xE01F C084
PLLSTAT
0xE01F C088
PLLFEED
NA
0xE01F C08C
[1]
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
27
Volume 1
UM10120
PLLC
CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION 0 Direct
PSEL[1:0] PD PLLE 0 Bypass PD
F OSC PHASEFREQUENCY DETECTOR PD F OUT CD DIV-BY-M MSEL<4:0> MSEL[4:0] CCO F CCO
1 0
CD /2P
0 0 1 1
PLOCK
CCLK
Fig 10. PLL block diagram
3.7.2 PLL Control register (PLLCON - 0xE01F C080)

The PLLCON register contains the bits that enable and connect the PLL. Enabling the PLL allows it to attempt to lock to the current settings of the multiplier and divider values. Connecting the PLL causes the processor and all chip functions to run from the PLL output clock. Changes to the PLLCON register do not take effect until a correct PLL feed sequence has been given (see Section 3.7.7 PLL Feed register (PLLFEED 0xE01F C08C) and Section 3.7.3 PLL Configuration register (PLLCFG - 0xE01F C084) on page 29).
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
28
Volume 1
UM10120
PLL Control register (PLLCON - address 0xE01F C080) bit description Description PLL Enable. When one, and after a valid PLL feed, this bit will activate the PLL and allow it to lock to the requested frequency. See PLLSTAT register, Table 16. Reset value 0
Table 14: Bit 0
Symbol PLLE
PLLC
PLL Connect. When PLLC and PLLE are both set to one, and after a 0 valid PLL feed, connects the PLL as the clock source for the microcontroller. Otherwise, the oscillator clock is used directly by the microcontroller. See PLLSTAT register, Table 16. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA
7:2
The PLL must be set up, enabled, and Lock established before it may be used as a clock source. When switching from the oscillator clock to the PLL output or vice versa, internal circuitry synchronizes the operation in order to ensure that glitches are not generated. Hardware does not insure that the PLL is locked before it is connected or automatically disconnect the PLL if lock is lost during operation. In the event of loss of PLL lock, it is likely that the oscillator clock has become unstable and disconnecting the PLL will not remedy the situation.
3.7.3 PLL Configuration register (PLLCFG - 0xE01F C084)

The PLLCFG register contains the PLL multiplier and divider values. Changes to the PLLCFG register do not take effect until a correct PLL feed sequence has been given (see Section 3.7.7 PLL Feed register (PLLFEED - 0xE01F C08C) on page 30). Calculations for the PLL frequency, and multiplier and divider values are found in the PLL Frequency Calculation section on page 31.
Table 15: Bit 4:0 PLL Configuration register (PLLCFG - address 0xE01F C084) bit description Description PLL Multiplier value. Supplies the value "M" in the PLL frequency calculations. Note: For details on selecting the right value for MSEL see Section 3.7.9 PLL frequency calculation on page 31. 6:5 PSEL PLL Divider value. Supplies the value "P" in the PLL frequency calculations. Note: For details on selecting the right value for PSEL see Section 3.7.9 PLL frequency calculation on page 31. 7 Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA value read from a reserved bit is not defined. 0 Reset value 0
Symbol MSEL
3.7.4 PLL Status register (PLLSTAT - 0xE01F C088)

The read-only PLLSTAT register provides the actual PLL parameters that are in effect at the time it is read, as well as the PLL status. PLLSTAT may disagree with values found in PLLCON and PLLCFG because changes to those registers do not take effect until a proper PLL feed has occurred (see Section 3.7.7 PLL Feed register (PLLFEED 0xE01F C08C)).
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
29
Volume 1
UM10120
PLL Status register (PLLSTAT - address 0xE01F C088) bit description Description Read-back for the PLL Multiplier value. This is the value currently used by the PLL. Read-back for the PLL Divider value. This is the value currently used by the PLL. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value 0 0 NA
Table 16: Bit 4:0 6:5 7 8
Symbol MSEL PSEL PLLE
Read-back for the PLL Enable bit. When one, the PLL is currently 0 activated. When zero, the PLL is turned off. This bit is automatically cleared when Power-down mode is activated. Read-back for the PLL Connect bit. When PLLC and PLLE are both 0 one, the PLL is connected as the clock source for the microcontroller. When either PLLC or PLLE is zero, the PLL is bypassed and the oscillator clock is used directly by the microcontroller. This bit is automatically cleared when Power-down mode is activated. Reflects the PLL Lock status. When zero, the PLL is not locked. When one, the PLL is locked onto the requested frequency. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. 0 NA
PLLC
10 15:11
PLOCK -
3.7.5 PLL Interrupt

The PLOCK bit in the PLLSTAT register is connected to the interrupt controller. This allows for software to turn on the PLL and continue with other functions without having to wait for the PLL to achieve lock. When the interrupt occurs (PLOCK = 1), the PLL may be connected, and the interrupt disabled.
3.7.6 PLL Modes

The combinations of PLLE and PLLC are shown in Table 17.
Table 17: PLLC 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 PLL Control bit combinations PLL Function PLL is turned off and disconnected. The system runs from the unmodified clock input. The PLL is active, but not yet connected. The PLL can be connected after PLOCK is asserted. Same as 00 combination. This prevents the possibility of the PLL being connected without also being enabled. The PLL is active and has been connected as the system clock source.
PLLE
3.7.7 PLL Feed register (PLLFEED - 0xE01F C08C)

A correct feed sequence must be written to the PLLFEED register in order for changes to the PLLCON and PLLCFG registers to take effect. The feed sequence is: 1. Write the value 0xAA to PLLFEED. 2. Write the value 0x55 to PLLFEED.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
30
Volume 1
UM10120
The two writes must be in the correct sequence, and must be consecutive VPB bus cycles. The latter requirement implies that interrupts must be disabled for the duration of the PLL feed operation. If either of the feed values is incorrect, or one of the previously mentioned conditions is not met, any changes to the PLLCON or PLLCFG register will not become effective.
Table 18: Bit 7:0 PLL Feed register (PLLFEED - address 0xE01F C08C) bit description Description The PLL feed sequence must be written to this register in order for PLL configuration and control register changes to take effect. Reset value 0x00
Symbol PLLFEED
3.7.8 PLL and Power-down mode

Power-down mode automatically turns off and disconnects the PLL. Wakeup from Power-down mode does not automatically restore the PLL settings, this must be done in software. Typically, a routine to activate the PLL, wait for lock, and then connect the PLL can be called at the beginning of any interrupt service routine that might be called due to the wakeup. It is important not to attempt to restart the PLL by simply feeding it when execution resumes after a wakeup from Power-down mode. This would enable and connect the PLL at the same time, before PLL lock is established.
3.7.9 PLL frequency calculation

The PLL equations use the following parameters:
Table 19: Element FOSC FCCO CCLK M P Elemens determining PLLs frequency Description the frequency from the crystal oscillator/external osicillator the frequency of the PLL current controlled oscillator the PLL output frequency (also the processor clock frequency) PLL Multiplier value from the MSEL bits in the PLLCFG register PLL Divider value from the PSEL bits in the PLLCFG register
The PLL output frequency (when the PLL is both active and connected) is given by: CCLK = M FOSC or CCLK = FCCO / (2 P)
The CCO frequency can be computed as: FCCO = CCLK 2 P or FCCO = FOSC M 2 P
The PLL inputs and settings must meet the following:
FOSC is in the range of 10 MHz to 25 MHz. CCLK is in the range of 10 MHz to Fmax (the maximum allowed frequency for the
microcontroller - determined by the system microcontroller is embedded in).
FCCO is in the range of 156 MHz to 320 MHz.

User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
31
Volume 1
UM10120
3.7.10 Procedure for detrmining PLL settings

If a particular application uses the PLL, its configuration may be determined as follows: 1. Choose the desired processor operating frequency (CCLK). This may be based on processor throughput requirements, need to support a specific set of UART baud rates, etc. Bear in mind that peripheral devices may be running from a lower clock than the processor (see Section 3.10 VPB divider on page 38). 2. Choose an oscillator frequency (FOSC). CCLK must be the whole (non-fractional) multiple of FOSC. 3. Calculate the value of M to configure the MSEL bits. M = CCLK / FOSC. M must be in the range of 1 to 32. The value written to the MSEL bits in PLLCFG is M 1 (see Table 21. 4. Find a value for P to configure the PSEL bits, such that FCCO is within its defined frequency limits. FCCO is calculated using the equation given above. P must have one of the values 1, 2, 4, or 8. The value written to the PSEL bits in PLLCFG is 00 for P = 1; 01 for P = 2; 10 for P = 4; 11 for P = 8 (see Table 20).
Table 20: 00 01 10 11 Table 21: 00000 00001 00010 00011 ... 11110 11111 PLL Multiplier values Value of M 1 2 3 4 ... 31 32 PLL Divider values Value of P 1 2 4 8
PSEL Bits (PLLCFG bits [6:5])
MSEL Bits (PLLCFG bits [4:0])
3.7.11 PLL example

System design asks for FOSC= 10 MHz and requires CCLK = 60 MHz. Based on these specifications, M = CCLK / Fosc = 60 MHz / 10 MHz = 6. Consequently, M - 1 = 5 will be written as PLLCFG[4:0]. Value for P can be derived from P = FCCO / (CCLK x 2), using condition that FCCO must be in range of 156 MHz to 320 MHz. Assuming the lowest allowed frequency for FCCO = 156 MHz, P = 156 MHz / (2 x 60 MHz) = 1.3. The highest FCCO frequency criteria produces P = 2.67. The only solution for P that satisfies both of these requirements and is listed in Table 20 is P = 2. Therefore, PLLCFG[6:5] = 1 will be used.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
32
Volume 1
UM10120
3.8 Power control

The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 supports two reduced power modes: Idle mode and Power-down mode. In Idle mode, execution of instructions is suspended until either a Reset or interrupt occurs. Peripheral functions continue operation during Idle mode and may generate interrupts to cause the processor to resume execution. Idle mode eliminates power used by the processor itself, memory systems and related controllers, and internal buses. In Power-down mode, the oscillator is shut down and the chip receives no internal clocks. The processor state and registers, peripheral registers, and internal SRAM values are preserved throughout Power-down mode and the logic levels of chip pins remain static. The Power-down mode can be terminated and normal operation resumed by either a Reset or certain specific interrupts that are able to function without clocks. Since all dynamic operation of the chip is suspended, Power-down mode reduces chip power consumption to nearly zero. Entry to Power-down and Idle modes must be coordinated with program execution. Wakeup from Power-down or Idle modes via an interrupt resumes program execution in such a way that no instructions are lost, incomplete, or repeated. Wake up from Power-down mode is discussed further in Section 3.11 Wakeup timer on page 39. A Power Control for Peripherals feature allows individual peripherals to be turned off if they are not needed in the application, resulting in additional power savings.

The Power Control function contains two registers, as shown in Table 22. More detailed descriptions follow.
Table 22: Name PCON Power control registers Description Access Reset value[1] 0x00 Address 0xE01F C0C0
Power Control Register. This register contains R/W control bits that enable the two reduced power operating modes of the microcontroller. See Table 23.
PCONP Power Control for Peripherals Register. This R/W register contains control bits that enable and disable individual peripheral functions, Allowing elimination of power consumption by peripherals that are not needed.
[1]
0x0018 17BE 0xE01F C0C4
3.8.2 Power Control register (PCON - 0xE01F COCO)

The PCON register contains two bits. Writing a one to the corresponding bit causes entry to either the Power-down or Idle mode. If both bits are set, Power-down mode is entered.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
33
Volume 1
UM10120
Power Control register (PCON - address 0xE01F COCO) bit description Reset value 0
Table 23: Bit 0
Symbol Description IDL Idle mode - when 1, this bit causes the processor clock to be stopped, while on-chip peripherals remain active. Any enabled interrupt from a peripheral or an external interrupt source will cause the processor to resume execution. Power-down mode - when 1, this bit causes the oscillator and all on-chip clocks to be stopped. A wakeup condition from an external interrupt can cause the oscillator to restart, the PD bit to be cleared, and the processor to resume execution.
PD
PDBOD When PD is 1 and this bit is 0, Brown Out Detection remains operative 0 during Power-down mode, such that its Reset can release the microcontroller from Power-down mode[1]. When PD and this bit are both 1, the BOD circuit is disabled during Power-down mode to conserve power. When PD is 0, the state of this bit has no effect. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA
7:3
[1]
Since execution is delayed until after the Wakeup Timer has allowed the main oscillator to resume stable operation, there is no guarantee that execution will resume before VDD has fallen below the lower BOD threshhold, which prevents execution. If execution does resume, there is no guarantee of how long the microcontroller will continue execution before the lower BOD threshhold terminates execution. These issues depend on the slope of the decline of VDD. High decoupling capacitance (between VDD and ground) in the vicinity of the microcontroller will improve the likelihood that software will be able to do what needs to be done when power is being lost.
3.8.3 Power Control for Peripherals register (PCONP - 0xE01F COC4)

The PCONP register allows turning off selected peripheral functions for the purpose of saving power. This is accomplished by gating off the clock source to the specified peripheral blocks. A few peripheral functions cannot be turned off (i.e. the Watchdog timer, GPIO, the Pin Connect block, and the System Control block). Some peripherals, particularly those that include analog functions, may consume power that is not clock dependent. These peripherals may contain a separate disable control that turns off additional circuitry to reduce power. Each bit in PCONP controls one of the peripherals. The bit numbers correspond to the related peripheral number as shown in the VPB peripheral map Figure 5 VPB peripheral map in the "LPC2131/2/4/6/8 Memory Addressing" chapter. If a peripheral control bit is 1, that peripheral is enabled. If a peripheral bit is 0, that peripheral is disabled to conserve power. For example if bit 19 is 1, the I2C1 interface is enabled. If bit 19 is 0, the I2C1 interface is disabled. Important: valid read from a peripheral register and valid write to a peripheral register is possible only if that peripheral is enabled in the PCONP register!
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
34
Volume 1
UM10120
Power Control for Peripherals register (PCONP - address 0xE01F C0C4) bit description Description Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Timer/Counter 0 power/clock control bit. Timer/Counter 1 power/clock control bit. Reset value NA 1 1 1 1 1 NA 1 1 1 1 NA 1
Table 24: Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Symbol PCTIM0 PCTIM1
PCUART0 UART0 power/clock control bit. PCUART1 UART1 power/clock control bit. PCPWM0 PCI2C0 PCSPI0 PCRTC PCSPI1 PCAD0 PWM0 power/clock control bit. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. The I2C0 interface power/clock control bit. The SPI0 interface power/clock control bit. The RTC power/clock control bit. The SSP interface power/clock control bit. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. A/D converter 0 (ADC0) power/clock control bit. Note: Clear the PDN bit in the AD0CR before clearing this bit, and set this bit before setting PDN.
18:13 19 20
PCI2C1 PCAD1
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. The I2C1 interface power/clock control bit. A/D converter 1 (ADC1) power/clock control bit. Note: Clear the PDN bit in the AD1CR before clearing this bit, and set this bit before setting PDN.
NA 1 1
31:21
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
3.8.4 Power control usage notes

After every reset, the PCONP register contains the value that enables all interfaces and peripherals controlled by the PCONP to be enabled. Therefore, apart from proper configuring via peripheral dedicated registers, the users application has no need to access the PCONP in order to start using any of the on-board peripherals. Power saving oriented systems should have 1s in the PCONP register only in positions that match peripherals really used in the application. All other bits, declared to be "Reserved" or dedicated to the peripherals not used in the current application, must be cleared to 0.
3.9 Reset
Reset has two sources on the LPC2131/2/4/6/8: the RESET pin and Watchdog Reset. The RESET pin is a Schmitt trigger input pin with an additional glitch filter. Assertion of chip Reset by any source starts the Wakeup Timer (see description in Section 3.11
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
35
Volume 1
UM10120
Wakeup timer in this chapter), causing reset to remain asserted until the external Reset is de-asserted, the oscillator is running, a fixed number of clocks have passed, and the on-chip circuitry has completed its initialization. The relationship between Reset, the oscillator, and the Wakeup Timer are shown in Figure 11. The Reset glitch filter allows the processor to ignore external reset pulses that are very short, and also determines the minimum duration of RESET that must be asserted in order to guarantee a chip reset. Once asserted, RESET pin can be deasserted only when crystal oscillator is fully running and an adequate signal is present on the X1 pin of the microcontroller. Assuming that an external crystal is used in the crystal oscillator subsystem, after power on, the RESET pin should be asserted for 10 ms. For all subsequent resets when crystal oscillator is already running and stable signal is on the X1 pin, the RESET pin needs to be asserted for 300 ns only. When the internal Reset is removed, the processor begins executing at address 0, which is initially the Reset vector mapped from the Boot Block. At that point, all of the processor and peripheral registers have been initialized to predetermined values. External and internal Resets have some small differences. An external Reset causes the value of certain pins to be latched to configure the part. External circuitry cannot determine when an internal Reset occurs in order to allow setting up those special pins, so those latches are not reloaded during an internal Reset. Pins that are examined during an external Reset for various purposes are: P1.20/TRACESYNC, P1.26/RTCK (see chapters "Pin Configuration" on page 64 and "Pin Connect Block" on page 73). Pin P0.14 (see "Flash Memory System and Programming" chapter on page 216) is examined by on-chip bootloader when this code is executed after every Reset. It is possible for a chip Reset to occur during a Flash programming or erase operation. The Flash memory will interrupt the ongoing operation and hold off the completion of Reset to the CPU until internal Flash high voltages have settled.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
36
Volume 1
UM10120
External reset
C Q
Reset to the on-chip circuitry Reset to PCON.PD
Watchdog reset
WAKEUP TIMER Power down Oscillator output (FOSC ) START

n COUNT 2
C Q S
EINT0 Wakeup EINT1 Wakeup EINT2 Wakeup EINT3 Wakeup RTC Wakeup
Write 1 from VPB Reset VBP Read of PDBIT in PCON FOSC to PLL
Fig 11. Reset block diagram including the wakeup timer
3.9.1 Reset Source Identification Register (RSIR - 0xE01F C180)

This register contains one bit for each source of Reset. Writing a 1 to any of these bits clears the corresponding read-side bit to 0. The interactions among the four sources are described below.
Table 25: Bit 0 Reset Source identificator Register (RSIR - address 0xE01F C180) bit description Reset value
Symbol Description POR
Assertion of the POR signal sets this bit, and clears all of the other bits see text in this register. But if another Reset signal (e.g., External Reset) remains asserted after the POR signal is negated, then its bit is set. This bit is not affected by any of the other sources of Reset. Assertion of the RESET signal sets this bit. Ths bit is cleared by POR, but is not affected by WDT or BOD reset. see text
EXTR
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
37
Volume 1
UM10120
Reset Source identificator Register (RSIR - address 0xE01F C180) bit description Reset value
Table 25: Bit 2
Symbol Description WDTR
This bit is set when the Watchdog Timer times out and the WDTRESET see text bit in the Watchdog Mode Register is 1. It is cleared by any of the other sources of Reset. This bit is set when the 3.3 V power reaches a level below 2.6 V. If the seet text VDD voltage dips from 3.3 V to 2.5 V and backs up, the BODR bit will be set to 1. Also, if the VDD voltage rises continuously from below 1 V to a level above 2.6 V, the BODR will be set to 1, too. This bit is not affected by External Reset nor Watchdog Reset. Note: only in case a reset occurs and the POR = 0, the BODR bit indicates if the VDD voltage was below 2.6 V or not.
BODR
7:4
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
NA
3.10 VPB divider

The VPB Divider determines the relationship between the processor clock (CCLK) and the clock used by peripheral devices (PCLK). The VPB Divider serves two purposes. The first is to provides peripherals with desired PCLK via VPB bus so that they can operate at the speed chosen for the ARM processor. In order to achieve this, the VPB bus may be slowed down to one half or one fourth of the processor clock rate. Because the VPB bus must work properly at power up (and its timing cannot be altered if it does not work since the VPB divider control registers reside on the VPB bus), the default condition at reset is for the VPB bus to run at one quarter speed. The second purpose of the VPB Divider is to allow power savings when an application does not require any peripherals to run at the full processor rate. The connection of the VPB Divider relative to the oscillator and the processor clock is shown in Figure 12. Because the VPB Divider is connected to the PLL output, the PLL remains active (if it was running) during Idle mode.

Only one register is used to control the VPB Divider.
Table 26: Name VPBDIV
[1]
VPB divider register map Description Controls the rate of the VPB clock in relation to the processor clock. Access Reset Address value[1] R/W 0x00 0xE01F C100
3.10.2 VPBDIV register (VPBDIV - 0xE01F C100)

The VPB Divider register contains two bits, allowing three divider values, as shown in Table 27.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
38
Volume 1
UM10120
VPB Divider register (VPBDIV - address 0xE01F C100) bit description Description VPB bus clock is one fourth of the processor clock. VPB bus clock is the same as the processor clock. VPB bus clock is one half of the processor clock. Reserved. If this value is written to the VPBDIV register, it has no effect (the previous setting is retained). Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA Reset value 00
Table 27: Bit 1:0
Symbol Value VPBDIV 00 01 10 11
7:2
Crystal oscillator or external clock source (F OSC )
PLL
Processor clock (CCLK)
VPB DIVIDER
VPB Clock (PCLK)
Fig 12. VPB divider connections
3.11 Wakeup timer

The purpose of the wakeup timer is to ensure that the oscillator and other analog functions required for chip operation are fully functional before the processor is allowed to execute instructions. This is important at power on, all types of Reset, and whenever any of the aforementioned functions are turned off for any reason. Since the oscillator and other functions are turned off during Power-down mode, any wakeup of the processor from Power-down mode makes use of the Wakeup Timer. The Wakeup Timer monitors the crystal oscillator as the means of checking whether it is safe to begin code execution. When power is applied to the chip, or some event caused the chip to exit Power-down mode, some time is required for the oscillator to produce a signal of sufficient amplitude to drive the clock logic. The amount of time depends on many factors, including the rate of VDD ramp (in the case of power on), the type of crystal and its electrical characteristics (if a quartz crystal is used), as well as any other external circuitry (e.g. capacitors), and the characteristics of the oscillator itself under the existing ambient conditions. Once a clock is detected, the Wakeup Timer counts 4096 clocks, then enables the on-chip circuitry to initialize. When the onboard modules initialization is complete, the processor is released to execute instructions if the external Reset has been deasserted. In the case where an external clock source is used in the system (as opposed to a crystal connected to the oscillator pins), the possibility that there could be little or no delay for oscillator start-up must be considered. The Wakeup Timer design then ensures that any other required chip functions will be operational prior to the beginning of program execution.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
39
Volume 1
UM10120
Any of the various Resets can bring the microcontroller out of power-down mode, as can the external interrupts EINT3:0, plus the RTC interrupt if the RTC is operating from its own oscillator on the RTCX1-2 pins. When one of these interrupts is enabled for wakeup and its selected event occurs, an oscillator wakeup cycle is started. The actual interrupt (if any) occurs after the wakeup timer expires, and is handled by the Vectored Interrupt Controller. However, the pin multiplexing on the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 (see chapters "Pin Configuration" on page 64 and "Pin Connect Block" on page 73) was designed to allow other peripherals to, in effect, bring the device out of Power-down mode. The following pin-function pairings allow interrupts from events relating to UART0 or 1, SPI 0 or 1, or the I2C: RxD0 / EINT0, SDA / EINT1, SSEL0 / EINT2, RxD1 / EINT3, DCD1 / EINT1, RI1 / EINT2, SSEL1 / EINT3. To put the device in Power-down mode and allow activity on one or more of these buses or lines to power it back up, software should reprogram the pin function to External Interrupt, select the appropriate mode and polarity for the Interrupt, and then select Power-down mode. Upon wakeup software should restore the pin multiplexing to the peripheral function. All of the bus- or line-activity indications in the list above happen to be low-active. If software wants the device to come out of power -down mode in response to activity on more than one pin that share the same EINTi channel, it should program low-level sensitivity for that channel, because only in level mode will the channel logically OR the signals to wake the device. The only flaw in this scheme is that the time to restart the oscillator prevents the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 from capturing the bus or line activity that wakes it up. Idle mode is more appropriate than power-down mode for devices that must capture and respond to external activity in a timely manner. To summarize: on the LPC2131/2/4/6/8, the Wakeup Timer enforces a minimum reset duration based on the crystal oscillator, and is activated whenever there is a wakeup from Power-down mode or any type of Reset.
3.12 Brown-out detection

The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 includes 2-stage monitoring of the voltage on the VDD pins. If this voltage falls below 2.9 V, the Brown-Out Detector (BOD) asserts an interrupt signal to the Vectored Interrupt Controller. This signal can be enabled for interrupt in the Interrupt Enable register (see Section 5.4.4 Interrupt Enable register (VICIntEnable 0xFFFF F010) on page 52); if not, software can monitor the signal by reading the Raw Interrupt Status register (see Section 5.4.3 Raw Interrupt status register (VICRawIntr 0xFFFF F008) on page 52). The second stage of low-voltage detection asserts Reset to inactivate the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 when the voltage on the VDD pins falls below 2.6 V. This Reset prevents alteration of the Flash as operation of the various elements of the chip would otherwise become unreliable due to low voltage. The BOD circuit maintains this reset down below 1 V, at which point the Power-On Reset circuitry maintains the overall Reset. Both the 2.9 V and 2.6 V thresholds include some hysteresis. In normal operation, this hysteresis allows the 2.9 V detection to reliably interrupt, or a regularly-executed event loop to sense the condition.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
40
Volume 1
UM10120
But when Brown-Out Detection is enabled to bring the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 out of Power-Down mode (which is itself not a guaranteed operation -- see Section 3.8.2 Power Control register (PCON - 0xE01F COCO)), the supply voltage may recover from a transient before the Wakeup Timer has completed its delay. In this case, the net result of the transient BOD is that the part wakes up and continues operation after the instructions that set Power-Down Mode, without any interrupt occurring and with the BOD bit in the RISR being 0. Since all other wakeup conditions have latching flags (see Section 3.5.2 External Interrupt Flag register (EXTINT - 0xE01F C140) and Section 18.4.3 Interrupt Location Register (ILR - 0xE002 4000) on page 202), a wakeup of this type, without any apparent cause, can be assumed to be a Brown-Out that has gone away.
3.13 Code security vs debugging

Applications in development typically need the debugging and tracing facilities in the LPC2131/2/4/6/8. Later in the life cycle of an application, it may be more important to protect the application code from observation by hostile or competitive eyes. The following feature of the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 allows an application to control whether it can be debugged or protected from observation. Details on the way Code Read Protection works can be found in the "Flash Memory System and Programming" chapter on page 216.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
41
UM10120
Chapter 4: Memory Acceleration Module (MAM)
4.1 Introduction
The MAM block in the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 maximizes the performance of the ARM processor when it is running code in Flash memory, but does so using a single Flash bank.
4.2 Operation
Simply put, the Memory Accelerator Module (MAM) attempts to have the next ARM instruction that will be needed in its latches in time to prevent CPU fetch stalls. The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 uses one bank of Flash memory, compared to the two banks used on predecessor devices. It includes three 128-bit buffers called the Prefetch Buffer, the Branch Trail Buffer and the data buffer. When an Instruction Fetch is not satisfied by either the Prefetch or Branch Trail Buffer, nor has a prefetch been initiated for that line, the ARM is stalled while a fetch is initiated for the 128-bit line. If a prefetch has been initiated but not yet completed, the ARM is stalled for a shorter time. Unless aborted by a data access, a prefetch is initiated as soon as the Flash has completed the previous access. The prefetched line is latched by the Flash module, but the MAM does not capture the line in its prefetch buffer until the ARM core presents the address from which the prefetch has been made. If the core presents a different address from the one from which the prefetch has been made, the prefetched line is discarded. The Prefetch and Branch Trail buffers each include four 32-bit ARM instructions or eight 16-bit Thumb instructions. During sequential code execution, typically the Prefetch Buffer contains the current instruction and the entire Flash line that contains it. The MAM uses the LPROT[0] line to differentiate between instruction and data accesses. Code and data accesses use separate 128-bit buffers. 3 of every 4 sequential 32-bit code or data accesses "hit" in the buffer without requiring a Flash access (7 of 8 sequential 16-bit accesses, 15 of every 16 sequential byte accesses). The fourth (eighth, 16th) sequential data access must access Flash, aborting any prefetch in progress. When a Flash data access is concluded, any prefetch that had been in progress is re-initiated. Timing of Flash read operations is programmable and is described later in this section. In this manner, there is no code fetch penalty for sequential instruction execution when the CPU clock period is greater than or equal to one fourth of the Flash access time. The average amount of time spent doing program branches is relatively small (less than 25%) and may be minimized in ARM (rather than Thumb) code through the use of the conditional execution feature present in all ARM instructions. This conditional execution may often be used to avoid small forward branches that would otherwise be necessary. Branches and other program flow changes cause a break in the sequential flow of instruction fetches described above. The Branch Trail Buffer captures the line to which such a non-sequential break occurs. If the same branch is taken again, the next instruction is taken from the Branch Trail Buffer. When a branch outside the contents of
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
42
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 4: MAM Module
the Prefetch and Branch Trail Buffer is taken, a stall of several clocks is needed to load the Branch Trail buffer. Subsequently, there will typically be no further instructionfetch delays until a new and different branch occurs.
4.3 MAM blocks

The Memory Accelerator Module is divided into several functional blocks:
A Flash Address Latch and an incrementor function to form prefetch addresses A 128-bit Prefetch Buffer and an associated Address latch and comparator A 128-bit Branch Trail Buffer and an associated Address latch and comparator A 128-bit Data Buffer and an associated Address latch and comparator Control logic Wait logic
Figure 13 shows a simplified block diagram of the Memory Accelerator Module data paths. In the following descriptions, the term fetch applies to an explicit Flash read request from the ARM. Pre-fetch is used to denote a Flash read of instructions beyond the current processor fetch address.
4.3.1 Flash memory bank

There is one bank of Flash memory with the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 MAM. Flash programming operations are not controlled by the MAM, but are handled as a separate function. A boot block sector contains Flash programming algorithms that may be called as part of the application program, and a loader that may be run to allow serial programming of the Flash memory.
Memory Address
Flash Memory Bank ARM Local Bus BUS INTERFACE BUFFERS
Memory Data
Fig 13. Simplified block diagram of the Memory Accelerator Module (MAM)
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
43
Volume 1
UM10120
4.3.2 Instruction latches and data latches

Code and Data accesses are treated separately by the Memory Accelerator Module. There is a 128-bit Latch, a 15-bit Address Latch, and a 15-bit comparator associated with each buffer (prefetch, branch trail, and data). Each 128-bit latch holds 4 words (4 ARM instructions, or 8 Thumb instructions). Also associated with each buffer are 32 4:1 Multiplexers that select the requested word from the 128-bit line. Each Data access that is not in the Data latch causes a Flash fetch of 4 words of data, which are captured in the Data latch. This speeds up sequential Data operations, but has little or no effect on random accesses.
4.3.3 Flash programming Issues

Since the Flash memory does not allow accesses during programming and erase operations, it is necessary for the MAM to force the CPU to wait if a memory access to a Flash address is requested while the Flash module is busy. (This is accomplished by asserting the ARM7TDMI-S local bus signal CLKEN.) Under some conditions, this delay could result in a Watchdog time-out. The user will need to be aware of this possibility and take steps to insure that an unwanted Watchdog reset does not cause a system failure while programming or erasing the Flash memory. In order to preclude the possibility of stale data being read from the Flash memory, the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 MAM holding latches are automatically invalidated at the beginning of any Flash programming or erase operation. Any subsequent read from a Flash address will cause a new fetch to be initiated after the Flash operation has completed.
4.4 MAM operating modes

Three modes of operation are defined for the MAM, trading off performance for ease of predictability: Mode 0: MAM off. All memory requests result in a Flash read operation (see note 2 below). There are no instruction prefetches. Mode 1: MAM partially enabled. Sequential instruction accesses are fulfilled from the holding latches if the data is present. Instruction prefetch is enabled. Non-sequential instruction accesses initiate Flash read operations (see note 2 below). This means that all branches cause memory fetches. All data operations cause a Flash read because buffered data access timing is hard to predict and is very situation dependent. Mode 2: MAM fully enabled. Any memory request (code or data) for a value that is contained in one of the corresponding holding latches is fulfilled from the latch. Instruction prefetch is enabled. Flash read operations are initiated for instruction prefetch and code or data values not available in the corresponding holding latches.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
44
Volume 1
UM10120
MAM Responses to program accesses of various types MAM Mode 0 1 Use Latched Data[1] Initiate Fetch[1] 2 Use Latched Data[1] Initiate Fetch[1] Initiate Fetch[2] Initiate Fetch Initiate Fetch[2]
Table 28:
Program Memory Request Type Sequential access, data in latches Sequential access, data not in latches Non-sequential access, data in latches
Initiate Fetch[1][2] Use Latched Data[1] Initiate Fetch[1] Initiate Fetch[1]
Non-sequential access, data not in latches Initiate Fetch

[1] [2] Instruction prefetch is enabled in modes 1 and 2.
The MAM actually uses latched data if it is available, but mimics the timing of a Flash read operation. This saves power while resulting in the same execution timing. The MAM can truly be turned off by setting the fetch timing value in MAMTIM to one clock.
Table 29:
MAM responses to data and DMA accesses of various types MAM Mode 0 1 Fetch[1] Initiate Fetch[1] 2 Use Latched Data Initiate Fetch Use Latched Data Initiate Fetch Initiate
Data Memory Request Type Sequential access, data in latches Sequential access, data not in latches Non-sequential access, data in latches
Initiate Fetch Initiate Fetch[1]
Initiate Fetch Initiate Fetch[1]
Non-sequential access, data not in latches Initiate Fetch

[1]
Initiate Fetch
The MAM actually uses latched data if it is available, but mimics the timing of a Flash read operation. This saves power while resulting in the same execution timing. The MAM can truly be turned off by setting the fetch timing value in MAMTIM to one clock.
4.5 MAM configuration

After reset the MAM defaults to the disabled state. Software can turn memory access acceleration on or off at any time. This allows most of an application to be run at the highest possible performance, while certain functions can be run at a somewhat slower but more predictable rate if more precise timing is required.

All registers, regardless of size, are on word address boundaries. Details of the registers appear in the description of each function.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
45
Volume 1
UM10120
Summary of MAM registers Description Access Reset Address value[1] R/W 0x0 0xE01F C000
Table 30: Name
MAMCR Memory Accelerator Module Control Register. Determines the MAM functional mode, that is, to what extent the MAM performance enhancements are enabled. See Table 31. MAMTIM Memory Accelerator Module Timing control. Determines the number of clocks used for Flash memory fetches (1 to 7 processor clocks).
[1]
R/W
0x07
0xE01F C004
Reset value reflects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
4.7 MAM Control Register (MAMCR - 0xE01F C000)

Two configuration bits select the three MAM operating modes, as shown in Table 31. Following Reset, MAM functions are disabled. Changing the MAM operating mode causes the MAM to invalidate all of the holding latches, resulting in new reads of Flash information as required.
Table 31: Bit 1:0 MAM Control Register (MAMCR - address 0xE01F C000) bit description Value Description MAM functions disabled MAM functions partially enabled MAM functions fully enabled Reserved. Not to be used in the application. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved NA bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value 0
Symbol
MAM_mode 00 _control 01 10 11
7:2
4.8 MAM Timing register (MAMTIM - 0xE01F C004)

The MAM Timing register determines how many CCLK cycles are used to access the Flash memory. This allows tuning MAM timing to match the processor operating frequency. Flash access times from 1 clock to 7 clocks are possible. Single clock Flash accesses would essentially remove the MAM from timing calculations. In this case the MAM mode may be selected to optimize power usage.
Table 32: Bit 2:0 MAM Timing register (MAMTIM - address 0xE01F C004) bit description Value Description 000 001 010 011 100 101 0 - Reserved. 1 - MAM fetch cycles are 1 processor clock (CCLK) in duration 2 - MAM fetch cycles are 2 CCLKs in duration 3 - MAM fetch cycles are 3 CCLKs in duration 4 - MAM fetch cycles are 4 CCLKs in duration 5 - MAM fetch cycles are 5 CCLKs in duration
Symbol MAM_fetch_ cycle_timing
Reset value 07
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
46
Volume 1
UM10120
MAM Timing register (MAMTIM - address 0xE01F C004) bit description Value Description 110 111 6 - MAM fetch cycles are 6 CCLKs in duration 7 - MAM fetch cycles are 7 CCLKs in duration Reset value
Table 32: Bit
Symbol
Warning: These bits set the duration of MAM Flash fetch operations as listed here. Improper setting of this value may result in incorrect operation of the device. 7:3 Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA
4.9 MAM usage notes

When changing MAM timing, the MAM must first be turned off by writing a zero to MAMCR. A new value may then be written to MAMTIM. Finally, the MAM may be turned on again by writing a value (1 or 2) corresponding to the desired operating mode to MAMCR. For system clock slower than 20 MHz, MAMTIM can be 001. For system clock between 20 MHz and 40 MHz, Flash access time is suggested to be 2 CCLKs, while in systems with system clock faster than 40 MHz, 3 CCLKs are proposed.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
47
UM10120
Chapter 5: Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
5.1 Features

ARM PrimeCell Vectored Interrupt Controller 32 interrupt request inputs 16 vectored IRQ interrupts 16 priority levels dynamically assigned to interrupt requests Software interrupt generation
5.2 Description
The Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC) takes 32 interrupt request inputs and programmably assigns them into 3 categories, FIQ, vectored IRQ, and non-vectored IRQ. The programmable assignment scheme means that priorities of interrupts from the various peripherals can be dynamically assigned and adjusted. Fast Interrupt reQuest (FIQ) requests have the highest priority. If more than one request is assigned to FIQ, the VIC ORs the requests to produce the FIQ signal to the ARM processor. The fastest possible FIQ latency is achieved when only one request is classified as FIQ, because then the FIQ service routine can simply start dealing with that device. But if more than one request is assigned to the FIQ class, the FIQ service routine can read a word from the VIC that identifies which FIQ source(s) is (are) requesting an interrupt. Vectored IRQs have the middle priority, but only 16 of the 32 requests can be assigned to this category. Any of the 32 requests can be assigned to any of the 16 vectored IRQ slots, among which slot 0 has the highest priority and slot 15 has the lowest. Non-vectored IRQs have the lowest priority. The VIC ORs the requests from all the vectored and non-vectored IRQs to produce the IRQ signal to the ARM processor. The IRQ service routine can start by reading a register from the VIC and jumping there. If any of the vectored IRQs are requesting, the VIC provides the address of the highest-priority requesting IRQs service routine, otherwise it provides the address of a default routine that is shared by all the non-vectored IRQs. The default routine can read another VIC register to see what IRQs are active. All registers in the VIC are word registers. Byte and halfword reads and write are not supported. Additional information on the Vectored Interrupt Controller is available in the ARM PrimeCell Vectored Interrupt Controller (PL190) documentation.

The VIC implements the registers shown in Table 33. More detailed descriptions follow.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
48
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
Table 33: Name
VIC register map Description IRQ Status Register. This register reads out the state of those interrupt requests that are enabled and classified as IRQ. FIQ Status Requests. This register reads out the state of those interrupt requests that are enabled and classified as FIQ. Raw Interrupt Status Register. This register reads out the state of the 32 interrupt requests / software interrupts, regardless of enabling or classification. Access RO Reset value[1] 0 Address 0xFFFF F000
VICIRQStatus
VICFIQStatus
RO
0xFFFF F004
VICRawIntr
RO
0xFFFF F008
VICIntSelect VICIntEnable
Interrupt Select Register. This register classifies each of the R/W 32 interrupt requests as contributing to FIQ or IRQ. Interrupt Enable Register. This register controls which of the R/W 32 interrupt requests and software interrupts are enabled to contribute to FIQ or IRQ. Interrupt Enable Clear Register. This register allows software to clear one or more bits in the Interrupt Enable register. WO
0 0
0xFFFF F00C 0xFFFF F010
VICIntEnClr
0xFFFF F014
VICSoftInt
Software Interrupt Register. The contents of this register are R/W ORed with the 32 interrupt requests from various peripheral functions. Software Interrupt Clear Register. This register allows software to clear one or more bits in the Software Interrupt register. WO
0xFFFF F018
VICSoftIntClear
0xFFFF F01C
VICProtection
Protection enable register. This register allows limiting R/W access to the VIC registers by software running in privileged mode. Vector Address Register. When an IRQ interrupt occurs, the R/W IRQ service routine can read this register and jump to the value read. R/W
0xFFFF F020
VICVectAddr
0xFFFF F030
VICDefVectAddr Default Vector Address Register. This register holds the address of the Interrupt Service routine (ISR) for non-vectored IRQs. VICVectAddr0 Vector address 0 register. Vector Address Registers 0-15 hold the addresses of the Interrupt Service routines (ISRs) for the 16 vectored IRQ slots. Vector address 1 register. Vector address 2 register. Vector address 3 register. Vector address 4 register. Vector address 5 register. Vector address 6 register. Vector address 7 register. Vector address 8 register. Vector address 9 register. Vector address 10 register. Vector address 11 register.
0xFFFF F034
R/W
0xFFFF F100
VICVectAddr1 VICVectAddr2 VICVectAddr3 VICVectAddr4 VICVectAddr5 VICVectAddr6 VICVectAddr7 VICVectAddr8 VICVectAddr9 VICVectAddr10 VICVectAddr11
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0xFFFF F104 0xFFFF F108 0xFFFF F10C 0xFFFF F110 0xFFFF F114 0xFFFF F118 0xFFFF F11C 0xFFFF F120 0xFFFF F124 0xFFFF F128 0xFFFF F12C
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
49
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
Table 33: Name
VIC register map Description Vector address 12 register. Vector address 13 register. Vector address 14 register. Vector address 15 register. Access R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset value[1] 0 0 0 0 0 Address 0xFFFF F130 0xFFFF F134 0xFFFF F138 0xFFFF F13C 0xFFFF F200
VICVectAddr12 VICVectAddr13 VICVectAddr14 VICVectAddr15 VICVectCntl0
Vector control 0 register. Vector Control Registers 0-15 each R/W control one of the 16 vectored IRQ slots. Slot 0 has the highest priority and slot 15 the lowest. Vector control 1 register. Vector control 2 register. Vector control 3 register. Vector control 4 register. Vector control 5 register. Vector control 6 register. Vector control 7 register. Vector control 8 register. Vector control 9 register. Vector control 10 register. Vector control 11 register. Vector control 12 register. Vector control 13 register. Vector control 14 register. Vector control 15 register.
[1]
VICVectCntl1 VICVectCntl2 VICVectCntl3 VICVectCntl4 VICVectCntl5 VICVectCntl6 VICVectCntl7 VICVectCntl8 VICVectCntl9 VICVectCntl10 VICVectCntl11 VICVectCntl12 VICVectCntl13 VICVectCntl14 VICVectCntl15
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0xFFFF F204 0xFFFF F208 0xFFFF F20C 0xFFFF F210 0xFFFF F214 0xFFFF F218 0xFFFF F21C 0xFFFF F220 0xFFFF F224 0xFFFF F228 0xFFFF F22C 0xFFFF F230 0xFFFF F234 0xFFFF F238 0xFFFF F23C
5.4 VIC registers

The following section describes the VIC registers in the order in which they are used in the VIC logic, from those closest to the interrupt request inputs to those most abstracted for use by software. For most people, this is also the best order to read about the registers when learning the VIC.
5.4.1 Software Interrupt register (VICSoftInt - 0xFFFF F018)

The contents of this register are ORed with the 32 interrupt requests from the various peripherals, before any other logic is applied.
Table 34: Software Interrupt register (VICSoftInt - address 0xFFFF F018) bit allocation Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Bit Symbol Access 31 R/W 30 R/W 29 R/W 28 R/W 27 R/W 26 R/W 25 R/W 24 R/W
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
50
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
21 AD1 R/W 13 RTC R/W 5 TIMER1 R/W 20 BOD R/W 12 PLL R/W 4 TIMER0 R/W 19 I2C1 R/W 11 SPI1/SSP R/W 3 ARMCore1 R/W 18 AD0 R/W 10 SPI0 R/W 2 ARMCore0 R/W 17 EINT3 R/W 9 I2C0 R/W 1 R/W 16 EINT2 R/W 8 PWM0 R/W 0 WDT R/W
Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Table 35: Bit 31:0
23 R/W 15 EINT1 R/W 7 UART1 R/W
Software Interrupt register (VICSoftInt - address 0xFFFF F018) bit description Symbol Value Description Do not force the interrupt request with this bit number. Writing zeroes to bits in VICSoftInt has no effect, see VICSoftIntClear (Section 5.4.2). Force the interrupt request with this bit number. Reset value 0 See VICSoftInt 0 bit allocation table. 1
5.4.2 Software Interrupt Clear register (VICSoftIntClear - 0xFFFF F01C)

This register allows software to clear one or more bits in the Software Interrupt register, without having to first read it.
Table 36: Software Interrupt Clear register (VICSoftIntClear - address 0xFFFF F01C) bit allocation Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Table 37: Bit 31:0 31 WO 23 WO 15 EINT1 WO 7 UART1 WO 30 WO 22 WO 14 EINT0 WO 6 UART0 WO 29 WO 21 AD1 WO 13 RTC WO 5 TIMER1 WO 28 WO 20 BOD WO 12 PLL WO 4 TIMER0 WO 27 WO 19 I2C1 WO 11 SPI1/SSP WO 3 ARMCore1 WO 26 WO 18 AD0 WO 10 SPI0 WO 2 ARMCore0 WO 25 WO 17 EINT3 WO 9 I2C0 WO 1 WO 24 WO 16 EINT2 WO 8 PWM0 WO 0 WDT WO
Software Interrupt Clear register (VICSoftIntClear - address 0xFFFF F01C) bit description Symbol Value Description Writing a 0 leaves the corresponding bit in VICSoftInt unchanged. Writing a 1 clears the corresponding bit in the Software Interrupt register, thus releasing the forcing of this request. Reset value 0
See 0 VICSoftIntClea 1 r bit allocation table.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
51
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
5.4.3 Raw Interrupt status register (VICRawIntr - 0xFFFF F008)

This is a read only register. This register reads out the state of the 32 interrupt requests and software interrupts, regardless of enabling or classification.
Table 38: Raw Interrupt status register (VICRawIntr - address 0xFFFF F008) bit allocation Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Table 39: Bit 31:0 31 RO 23 RO 15 EINT1 RO 7 UART1 RO 30 RO 22 RO 14 EINT0 RO 6 UART0 RO 29 RO 21 AD1 RO 13 RTC RO 5 TIMER1 RO 28 RO 20 BOD RO 12 PLL RO 4 TIMER0 RO 27 RO 19 I2C1 RO 11 SPI1/SSP RO 3 ARMCore1 RO 26 RO 18 AD0 RO 10 SPI0 RO 2 ARMCore0 RO 25 RO 17 EINT3 RO 9 I2C0 RO 1 RO 24 RO 16 EINT2 RO 8 PWM0 RO 0 WDT RO
Raw Interrupt status register (VICRawIntr - address 0xFFFF F008) bit description Symbol See VICRawIntr bit allocation table. Value 0 1 Description The interrupt request or software interrupt with this bit number is negated. The interrupt request or software interrupt with this bit number is negated. Reset value 0
5.4.4 Interrupt Enable register (VICIntEnable - 0xFFFF F010)

This is a read/write accessible register. This register controls which of the 32 interrupt requests and software interrupts contribute to FIQ or IRQ.
Table 40: Interrupt Enable register (VICIntEnable - address 0xFFFF F010) bit allocation Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access 31 R/W 23 R/W 15 EINT1 R/W 7 UART1 R/W 30 R/W 22 R/W 14 EINT0 R/W 6 UART0 R/W 29 R/W 21 AD1 R/W 13 RTC R/W 5 TIMER1 R/W 28 R/W 20 BOD R/W 12 PLL R/W 4 TIMER0 R/W 27 R/W 19 I2C1 R/W 11 SPI1/SSP R/W 3 ARMCore1 R/W 26 R/W 18 AD0 R/W 10 SPI0 R/W 2 ARMCore0 R/W 25 R/W 17 EINT3 R/W 9 I2C0 R/W 1 R/W 24 R/W 16 EINT2 R/W 8 PWM0 R/W 0 WDT R/W
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
52
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
Table 41: Bit 31:0
Interrupt Enable register (VICIntEnable - address 0xFFFF F010) bit description Symbol See VICIntEnable bit allocation table. Description When this register is read, 1s indicate interrupt requests or software interrupts that are enabled to contribute to FIQ or IRQ. When this register is written, ones enable interrupt requests or software interrupts to contribute to FIQ or IRQ, zeroes have no effect. See Section 5.4.5 Interrupt Enable Clear register (VICIntEnClear - 0xFFFF F014) on page 53 and Table 43 below for how to disable interrupts. Reset value 0
5.4.5 Interrupt Enable Clear register (VICIntEnClear - 0xFFFF F014)

This is a write only register. This register allows software to clear one or more bits in the Interrupt Enable register (see Section 5.4.4 Interrupt Enable register (VICIntEnable 0xFFFF F010) on page 52), without having to first read it.
Table 42: Software Interrupt Clear register (VICIntEnClear - address 0xFFFF F014) bit allocation Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Table 43: Bit 31:0 31 WO 23 WO 15 EINT1 WO 7 UART1 WO 30 WO 22 WO 14 EINT0 WO 6 UART0 WO 29 WO 21 AD1 WO 13 RTC WO 5 TIMER1 WO 28 WO 20 BOD WO 12 PLL WO 4 TIMER0 WO 27 WO 19 I2C1 WO 11 SPI1/SSP WO 3 ARMCore1 WO 26 WO 18 AD0 WO 10 SPI0 WO 2 ARMCore0 WO 25 WO 17 EINT3 WO 9 I2C0 WO 1 WO 24 WO 16 EINT2 WO 8 PWM0 WO 0 WDT WO
Software Interrupt Clear register (VICIntEnClear - address 0xFFFF F014) bit description Symbol See VICIntEnClear bit allocation table. Value 0 1 Description Writing a 0 leaves the corresponding bit in VICIntEnable unchanged. Writing a 1 clears the corresponding bit in the Interrupt Enable register, thus disabling interrupts for this request. Reset value 0
5.4.6 Interrupt Select register (VICIntSelect - 0xFFFF F00C)

This is a read/write accessible register. This register classifies each of the 32 interrupt requests as contributing to FIQ or IRQ.
Table 44: Interrupt Select register (VICIntSelect - address 0xFFFF F00C) bit allocation Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Bit Symbol Access 31 R/W 30 R/W 29 R/W 28 R/W 27 R/W 26 R/W 25 R/W 24 R/W
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
53
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
21 AD1 R/W 13 RTC R/W 5 TIMER1 R/W 20 BOD R/W 12 PLL R/W 4 TIMER0 R/W 19 I2C1 R/W 11 SPI1/SSP R/W 3 ARMCore1 R/W 18 AD0 R/W 10 SPI0 R/W 2 ARMCore0 R/W 17 EINT3 R/W 9 I2C0 R/W 1 R/W 16 EINT2 R/W 8 PWM0 R/W 0 WDT R/W
Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Table 45: Bit 31:0
Interrupt Select register (VICIntSelect - address 0xFFFF F00C) bit description Symbol See VICIntSelect bit allocation table. Value 0 1 Description The interrupt request with this bit number is assigned to the IRQ category. The interrupt request with this bit number is assigned to the FIQ category. Reset value 0
5.4.7 IRQ Status register (VICIRQStatus - 0xFFFF F000)

This is a read only register. This register reads out the state of those interrupt requests that are enabled and classified as IRQ. It does not differentiate between vectored and non-vectored IRQs.
Table 46: IRQ Status register (VICIRQStatus - address 0xFFFF F000) bit allocation Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Table 47: Bit 31:0 31 RO 23 RO 15 EINT1 RO 7 UART1 RO 30 RO 22 RO 14 EINT0 RO 6 UART0 RO 29 RO 21 AD1 RO 13 RTC RO 5 TIMER1 RO 28 RO 20 BOD RO 12 PLL RO 4 TIMER0 RO 27 RO 19 I2C1 RO 11 SPI1/SSP RO 3 ARMCore1 RO 26 RO 18 AD0 RO 10 SPI0 RO 2 ARMCore0 RO 25 RO 17 EINT3 RO 9 I2C0 RO 1 RO 24 RO 16 EINT2 RO 8 PWM0 RO 0 WDT RO
IRQ Status register (VICIRQStatus - address 0xFFFF F000) bit description Symbol See VICIRQStatus bit allocation table. Description A bit read as 1 indicates a coresponding interrupt request being enabled, classified as IRQ, and asserted Reset value 0
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
54
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
5.4.8 FIQ Status register (VICFIQStatus - 0xFFFF F004)

This is a read only register. This register reads out the state of those interrupt requests that are enabled and classified as FIQ. If more than one request is classified as FIQ, the FIQ service routine can read this register to see which request(s) is (are) active.
Table 48: FIQ Status register (VICFIQStatus - address 0xFFFF F004) bit allocation Reset value: 0x0000 0000 Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Bit Symbol Access Table 49: Bit 31:0 31 RO 23 RO 15 EINT1 RO 7 UART1 RO 30 RO 22 RO 14 EINT0 RO 6 UART0 RO 29 RO 21 AD1 RO 13 RTC RO 5 TIMER1 RO 28 RO 20 BOD RO 12 PLL RO 4 TIMER0 RO 27 RO 19 I2C1 RO 11 SPI1/SSP RO 3 ARMCore1 RO 26 RO 18 AD0 RO 10 SPI0 RO 2 ARMCore0 RO 25 RO 17 EINT3 RO 9 I2C0 RO 1 RO 24 RO 16 EINT2 RO 8 PWM0 RO 0 WDT RO
FIQ Status register (VICFIQStatus - address 0xFFFF F004) bit description Symbol See VICFIQStatus bit allocation table. Description A bit read as 1 indicates a coresponding interrupt request being enabled, classified as IRQ, and asserted Reset value 0
5.4.9 Vector Control registers 0-15 (VICvectCntl0-15 - 0xFFFF F200-23C)

These are a read/write accessible registers. Each of these registers controls one of the 16 vectored IRQ slots. Slot 0 has the highest priority and slot 15 the lowest. Note that disabling a vectored IRQ slot in one of the VICVectCntl registers does not disable the interrupt itself, the interrupt is simply changed to the non-vectored form.
Table 50: Bit 4:0 Vector Control registers 0-15 (VICvectCntl0-15 - 0xFFFF F200-23C) bit description Symbol int_request/ sw_int_assig Description The number of the interrupt request or software interrupt assigned to this vectored IRQ slot. As a matter of good programming practice, software should not assign the same interrupt number to more than one enabled vectored IRQ slot. But if this does occur, the lowernumbered slot will be used when the interrupt request or software interrupt is enabled, classified as IRQ, and asserted. When 1, this vectored IRQ slot is enabled, and can produce a unique ISR address when its assigned interrupt request or software interrupt is enabled, classified as IRQ, and asserted. Reset value 0
IRQslot_en
31:6
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read NA from a reserved bit is not defined.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
55
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
5.4.10 Vector Address registers 0-15 (VICVectAddr0-15 - 0xFFFF F100-13C)

These are a read/write accessible registers. These registers hold the addresses of the Interrupt Service routines (ISRs) for the 16 vectored IRQ slots.
Table 51: Bit 31:0 Vector Address registers (VICVectAddr0-15 - addresses 0xFFFF F100-13C) bit description Symbol IRQ_vector Description Reset value When one or more interrupt request or software interrupt is (are) enabled, 0x0000 0000 classified as IRQ, asserted, and assigned to an enabled vectored IRQ slot, the value from this register for the highest-priority such slot will be provided when the IRQ service routine reads the Vector Address register -VICVectAddr (Section 5.4.10).
5.4.11 Default Vector Address register (VICDefVectAddr - 0xFFFF F034)

This is a read/write accessible register. This register holds the address of the Interrupt Service routine (ISR) for non-vectored IRQs.
Table 52: Bit 31:0 Default Vector Address register (VICDefVectAddr - address 0xFFFF F034) bit description Symbol IRQ_vector Description Reset value When an IRQ service routine reads the Vector Address register 0x0000 0000 (VICVectAddr), and no IRQ slot responds as described above, this address is returned.
5.4.12 Vector Address register (VICVectAddr - 0xFFFF F030)

This is a read/write accessible register. When an IRQ interrupt occurs, the IRQ service routine can read this register and jump to the value read.
Table 53: Bit 31:0 Vector Address register (VICVectAddr - address 0xFFFF F030) bit description Symbol IRQ_vector Description Reset value If any of the interrupt requests or software interrupts that are assigned to a 0x0000 0000 vectored IRQ slot is (are) enabled, classified as IRQ, and asserted, reading from this register returns the address in the Vector Address Register for the highest-priority such slot (lowest-numbered) such slot. Otherwise it returns the address in the Default Vector Address Register. Writing to this register does not set the value for future reads from it. Rather, this register should be written near the end of an ISR, to update the priority hardware.
5.4.13 Protection Enable register (VICProtection - 0xFFFF F020)

This is a read/write accessible register. This one-bit register controls access to the VIC registers by software running in User mode.
Table 54: Bit 0 31:1 Protection Enable register (VICProtection - address 0xFFFF F020) bit description Symbol VIC_access Value 0 1 Description VIC registers can be accessed in User or privileged mode. The VIC registers can only be accessed in privileged mode. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value 0
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
56
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
5.5 Interrupt sources

Table 55 lists the interrupt sources for each peripheral function. Each peripheral device has one interrupt line connected to the Vectored Interrupt Controller, but may have several internal interrupt flags. Individual interrupt flags may also represent more than one interrupt source.
Table 55: Block WDT ARM Core ARM Core TIMER0 TIMER1 UART0 Connection of interrupt sources to the Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC) Flag(s) Watchdog Interrupt (WDINT) Reserved for Software Interrupts only Embedded ICE, DbgCommRx Embedded ICE, DbgCommTX Match 0 - 3 (MR0, MR1, MR2, MR3) Capture 0 - 3 (CR0, CR1, CR2, CR3) Match 0 - 3 (MR0, MR1, MR2, MR3) Capture 0 - 3 (CR0, CR1, CR2, CR3) Rx Line Status (RLS) Transmit Holding Register Empty (THRE) Rx Data Available (RDA) Character Time-out Indicator (CTI) UART1 Rx Line Status (RLS) Transmit Holding Register Empty (THRE) Rx Data Available (RDA) Character Time-out Indicator (CTI) Modem Status Interrupt (MSI)[1] PWM0 I2C0 SPI0 SPI1 (SSP) Match 0 - 6 (MR0, MR1, MR2, MR3, MR4, MR5, MR6) SI (state change) SPI Interrupt Flag (SPIF) Mode Fault (MODF) TX FIFO at least half empty (TXRIS) Rx FIFO at least half full (RXRIS) Receive Timeout condition (RTRIS) Receive overrun (RORRIS) PLL RTC System Control PLL Lock (PLOCK) Counter Increment (RTCCIF) Alarm (RTCALF) External Interrupt 0 (EINT0) External Interrupt 1 (EINT1) External Interrupt 2 (EINT2) External Interrupt 3 (EINT3) ADC0 A/D Converter 0 end of conversion 14 15 16 17 18 0x0000 4000 0x0000 8000 0x0001 0000 0x0002 0000 0x0004 0000 12 13 0x0000 1000 0x0000 2000 11 0x0000 0800 8 9 10 0x0000 0100 0x0000 0200 0x0000 0400 7 0x0000 0080 6 0x0000 0040 5 0x0000 0020 VIC Channel # and Hex Mask 0 1 2 3 4 0x0000 0001 0x0000 0002 0x0000 0004 0x0000 0008 0x0000 0010
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
57
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
Table 55: Block I2C1 BOD ADC1
Connection of interrupt sources to the Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC) Flag(s) SI (state change) Brown Out detect A/D Converter 1 end of conversion[1]
[1] LPC2134/6/8 Only.
VIC Channel # and Hex Mask 19 20 21 0x0008 0000 0x0010 0000 0x0020 0000
Interrupt request, masking and selection SOFTINTCLEAR [31:0] INTENABLECLEAR [31:0]
nVICFIQIN
Non-vectored FIQ interrupt logic
SOFTINT [31:0]
INTENABLE [31:0]
FIQSTATUS[31:0]
FIQSTATUS [31:0]
nVICFIQ
VICINT SOURCE [31:0]
Non-vectored IRQ interrupt logic IRQSTATUS[31:0] IRQSTATUS [31:0] IRQ NonVectIRQ
RAWINTERRUPT [31:0]
INTSELECT [31:0]
Vector interrupt 0
Priority 0 Interrupt priority logic
VECTIRQ0
HARDWARE PRIORITY LOGIC
IRQ
nVICIRQ
Address select for highest priority interrupt SOURCE ENABLE VECTORADDR [31:0] VECTADDR0[31:0]
VECTORCNTL[5:0] Vector interrupt 1
Priority1
VECTIRQ1 VECTADDR1[31:0]
VECTORADDR [31:0]
VICVECT ADDROUT [31:0]
Priority2 Vector interrupt 15 Priority14
VECTIRQ15 VECTADDR15[31:0]
DEFAULT VECTORADDR [31:0]
Priority15 nVICIRQIN VICVECTADDRIN[31:0]
Fig 14. Block diagram of the Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
58
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
5.6 Spurious interrupts

Spurious interrupts are possible in the ARM7TDMI based microcontrollers such as the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 due to asynchronous interrupt handling. The asynchronous character of the interrupt processing has its roots in the interaction of the core and the VIC. If the VIC state is changed between the moments when the core detects an interrupt, and the core actually processes an interrupt, problems may be generated. Real-life applications may experience the following scenarios: 1. VIC decides there is an IRQ interrupt and sends the IRQ signal to the core. 2. Core latches the IRQ state. 3. Processing continues for a few cycles due to pipelining. 4. Core loads IRQ address from VIC. Furthermore, It is possible that the VIC state has changed during step 3. For example, VIC was modified so that the interrupt that triggered the sequence starting with step 1) is no longer pending -interrupt got disabled in the executed code. In this case, the VIC will not be able to clearly identify the interrupt that generated the interrupt request, and as a result the VIC will return the default interrupt VicDefVectAddr (0xFFFF F034). This potentially disastrous chain of events can be prevented in two ways: 1. Application code should be set up in a way to prevent the spurious interrupts from occurring. Simple guarding of changes to the VIC may not be enough since, for example, glitches on level sensitive interrupts can also cause spurious interrupts. 2. VIC default handler should be set up and tested properly.
5.6.1 Details and case studies on spurious interrupts

This chapter contains details that can be obtained from the official ARM website (http://www.arm.com), FAQ section under the "Technical Support" link: http://www.arm.com/support/faqip/3677.html. What happens if an interrupt occurs as it is being disabled? Applies to: ARM7TDMI If an interrupt is received by the core during execution of an instruction that disables interrupts, the ARM7 family will still take the interrupt. This occurs for both IRQ and FIQ interrupts. For example, consider the following instruction sequence: MRS r0, cpsr ORR r0, r0, #I_Bit:OR:F_Bit MSR cpsr_c, r0
;disable IRQ and FIQ interrupts
If an IRQ interrupt is received during execution of the MSR instruction, then the behavior will be as follows:
The IRQ interrupt is latched.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
59
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
The MSR cpsr, r0 executes to completion setting both the I bit and the F bit in the
CPSR.
The IRQ interrupt is taken because the core was committed to taking the interrupt
exception before the I bit was set in the CPSR.
The CPSR (with the I bit and F bit set) is moved to the SPSR_IRQ.
This means that, on entry to the IRQ interrupt service routine, you can see the unusual effect that an IRQ interrupt has just been taken while the I bit in the SPSR is set. In the example above, the F bit will also be set in both the CPSR and SPSR. This means that FIQs are disabled upon entry to the IRQ service routine, and will remain so until explicitly re-enabled. FIQs will not be reenabled automatically by the IRQ return sequence. Although the example shows both IRQ and FIQ interrupts being disabled, similar behavior occurs when only one of the two interrupt types is being disabled. The fact that the core processes the IRQ after completion of the MSR instruction which disables IRQs does not normally cause a problem, since an interrupt arriving just one cycle earlier would be expected to be taken. When the interrupt routine returns with an instruction like: SUBS pc, lr, #4 the SPSR_IRQ is restored to the CPSR. The CPSR will now have the I bit and F bit set, and therefore execution will continue with all interrupts disabled. However, this can cause problems in the following cases: Problem 1: A particular routine maybe called as an IRQ handler, or as a regular subroutine. In the latter case, the system guarantees that IRQs would have been disabled prior to the routine being called. The routine exploits this restriction to determine how it was called (by examining the I bit of the SPSR), and returns using the appropriate instruction. If the routine is entered due to an IRQ being received during execution of the MSR instruction which disables IRQs, then the I bit in the SPSR will be set. The routine would therefore assume that it could not have been entered via an IRQ. Problem 2: FIQs and IRQs are both disabled by the same write to the CPSR. In this case, if an IRQ is received during the CPSR write, FIQs will be disabled for the execution time of the IRQ handler. This may not be acceptable in a system where FIQs must not be disabled for more than a few cycles.
5.6.2 Workaround
There are 3 suggested workarounds. Which of these is most applicable will depend upon the requirements of the particular system.
5.6.3 Solution 1: test for an IRQ received during a write to disable IRQs
Add code similar to the following at the start of the interrupt routine. SUB STMFD MRS TST LDMNEFD lr, lr, #4 sp!, {..., lr} lr, SPSR lr, #I_Bit sp!, {..., pc}^ ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Adjust LR to point to return Get some free regs See if we got an interrupt while interrupts were disabled. If so, just return immediately. The interrupt will remain pending since we havent acknowledged it and will be reissued when interrupts
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
60
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC ; are next enabled. ; Rest of interrupt routine
This code will test for the situation where the IRQ was received during a write to disable IRQs. If this is the case, the code returns immediately - resulting in the IRQ not being acknowledged (cleared), and further IRQs being disabled. Similar code may also be applied to the FIQ handler, in order to resolve the first issue. This is the recommended workaround, as it overcomes both problems mentioned above. However, in the case of problem two, it does add several cycles to the maximum length of time FIQs will be disabled.
5.6.4 Solution 2: disable IRQs and FIQs using separate writes to the CPSR
MRS ORR MSR ORR MSR r0, cpsr r0, r0, #I_Bit cpsr_c, r0 r0, r0, #F_Bit cpsr_c, r0 ;disable IRQs ;disable FIQs
This is the best workaround where the maximum time for which FIQs are disabled is critical (it does not increase this time at all). However, it does not solve problem one, and requires extra instructions at every point where IRQs and FIQs are disabled together.
5.6.5 Solution 3: re-enable FIQs at the beginning of the IRQ handler

As the required state of all bits in the c field of the CPSR are known, this can be most efficiently be achieved by writing an immediate value to CPSR_C, for example: MSR cpsr_c, #I_Bit:OR:irq_MODE ;IRQ should be disabled ;FIQ enabled ;ARM state, IRQ mode
This requires only the IRQ handler to be modified, and FIQs may be re-enabled more quickly than by using workaround 1. However, this should only be used if the system can guarantee that FIQs are never disabled while IRQs are enabled. It does not address problem one.
5.7 VIC usage notes

If user code is running from an on-chip RAM and an application uses interrupts, interrupt vectors must be re-mapped to on-chip address 0x0. This is necessary because all the exception vectors are located at addresses 0x0 and above. This is easily achieved by configuring the MEMMAP register (see Section 3.6.1 Memory Mapping control register (MEMMAP - 0xE01F C040) on page 25) to User RAM mode. Application code should be linked such that at 0x4000 0000 the Interrupt Vector Table (IVT) will reside. Although multiple sources can be selected (VICIntSelect) to generate FIQ request, only one interrupt service routine should be dedicated to service all available/present FIQ request(s). Therefore, if more than one interrupt sources are classified as FIQ the FIQ interrupt service routine must read VICFIQStatus to decide based on this content what to
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
61
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
do and how to process the interrupt request. However, it is recommended that only one interrupt source should be classified as FIQ. Classifying more than one interrupt sources as FIQ will increase the interrupt latency. Following the completion of the desired interrupt service routine, clearing of the interrupt flag on the peripheral level will propagate to corresponding bits in VIC registers (VICRawIntr, VICFIQStatus and VICIRQStatus). Also, before the next interrupt can be serviced, it is necessary that write is performed into the VICVectAddr register before the return from interrupt is executed. This write will clear the respective interrupt flag in the internal interrupt priority hardware. In order to disable the interrupt at the VIC you need to clear corresponding bit in the VICIntEnClr register, which in turn clears the related bit in the VICIntEnable register. This also applies to the VICSoftInt and VICSoftIntClear in which VICSoftIntClear will clear the respective bits in VICSoftInt. For example, if VICSoftInt = 0x0000 0005 and bit 0 has to be cleared, VICSoftIntClear = 0x0000 0001 will accomplish this. Before the new clear operation on the same bit in VICSoftInt using writing into VICSoftIntClear is performed in the future, VICSoftIntClear = 0x0000 0000 must be assigned. Therefore writing 1 to any bit in Clear register will have one-time-effect in the destination register. If the watchdog is enabled for interrupt on underflow or invalid feed sequence only then there is no way of clearing the interrupt. The only way you could perform return from interrupt is by disabling the interrupt at the VIC (using VICIntEnClr). Example: Assuming that UART0 and SPI0 are generating interrupt requests that are classified as vectored IRQs (UART0 being on the higher level than SPI0), while UART1 and I2C are generating non-vectored IRQs, the following could be one possibility for VIC setup: VICIntSelect = 0x0000 0000 VICIntEnable = 0x0000 06C0 VICDefVectAddr = 0x... VICVectAddr0 = 0x... VICVectAddr1 = 0x... VICVectCntl0 = 0x0000 0026 VICVectCntl1 = 0x0000 002A ; SPI0, I2C, UART1 and UART0 are IRQ => ; bit10, bit9, bit7 and bit6=0 ; SPI0, I2C, UART1 and UART0 are enabled interrupts => ; bit10, bit9, bit 7 and bit6=1 ; holds address at what routine for servicing ; non-vectored IRQs (i.e. UART1 and I2C) starts ; holds address where UART0 IRQ service routine starts ; holds address where SPI0 IRQ service routine starts ; interrupt source with index 6 (UART0) is enabled as ; the one with priority 0 (the highest) ; interrupt source with index 10 (SPI0) is enabled ; as the one with priority 1
After any of IRQ requests (SPI0, I2C, UART0 or UART1) is made, microcontroller will redirect code execution to the address specified at location 0x0000 0018. For vectored and non-vectored IRQs the following instruction could be placed at 0x0000 0018: LDR pc, [pc,#-0xFF0] This instruction loads PC with the address that is present in VICVectAddr register.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
62
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 5: VIC
In case UART0 request has been made, VICVectAddr will be identical to VICVectAddr0, while in case SPI0 request has been made value from VICVectAddr1 will be found here. If neither UART0 nor SPI0 have generated IRQ request but UART1 and/or I2C were the reason, content of VICVectAddr will be identical to VICDefVectAddr.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
63
UM10120
Chapter 6: Pin configuration
6.1 LPC2131/2132/2134/2136/2138 pinout

54 P0.19/MAT1.2/MOSI1/CAP1.2 53 P0.18/CAP1.3/MISO1/MAT1.3
55 P0.20/MAT1.3/SSEL1/EINT3
64 P1.27/TDO
52 P1.30/TMS
56 P1.29/TCK
60 P1.28/TDI
57 RESET
62 XTAL1
61 XTAL2
58 P0.23
59 VSSA
63 VREF
P0.21/PWM5/CAP1.3 P0.22/CAP0.0/MAT0.0 RTXC1 P1.19/TRACEPKT3 RTXC2 VSS VDDA P1.18/TRACEPKT2 P0.25/AD0.4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
49 VBAT 48 P1.20/TRACESYNC 47 P0.17/CAP1.2/SCK1/MAT1.2 46 P0.16/EINT0/MAT0.2/CAP0.2 45 P0.15/EINT2 44 P1.21/PIPESTAT0 43 VDD 42 VSS 41 P0.14/EINT1/SDA1 40 P1.22/PIPESTAT1 39 P0.13/MAT1.1 38 P0.12/MAT1.0 37 P0.11/CAP1.1/SCL1 36 P1.23/PIPESTAT2 35 P0.10/CAP1.0 34 P0.9/RXD1/PWM6/EINT3 33 P0.8/TXD1/PWM4 P1.24/TRACECLK 32
002aab068
51 VDD P0.6/MOSI0/CAP0.2 30
LPC2131
P0.26/AD0.5 10 P0.27/AD0.0/CAP0.1/MAT0.1 11 P1.17/TRACEPKT1 12 P0.28/AD0.1/CAP0.2/MAT0.2 13 P0.29/AD0.2/CAP0.3/MAT0.3 14 P0.30/AD0.3/EINT3/CAP0.0 15 P1.16/TRACEPKT0 16
P0.31 17
VSS 18
P0.0/TXD0/PWM1 19
P1.31/TRST 20
P0.1/RXD0/PWM3/EINT0 21
P0.2/SCL0/CAP0.0 22
VDD 23
P1.26/RTCK 24
VSS 25
P0.3/SDA0/MAT0.0/EINT1 26
P0.4/SCK0/CAP0.1/AD0.6 27
P1.25/EXTIN0 28
P0.5/MISO0/MAT0.1/AD0.7 29
Fig 15. LPC2131 64-pin package
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
P0.7/SSEL0/PWM2/EINT2 31
50 VSS
64
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 6: Pin Configuration
54 P0.19/MAT1.2/MOSI1/CAP1.2
53 P0.18/CAP1.3/MISO1/MAT1.3
64 P1.27/TDO
52 P1.30/TMS
56 P1.29/TCK
60 P1.28/TDI
57 RESET
62 XTAL1
61 XTAL2
58 P0.23
59 VSSA
63 VREF
P0.21/PWM5/CAP1.3 P0.22/CAP0.0/MAT0.0 RTXC1 P1.19/TRACEPKT3 RTXC2 VSS VDDA P1.18/TRACEPKT2 P0.25/AD0.4/AOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
49 VBAT 48 P1.20/TRACESYNC 47 P0.17/CAP1.2/SCK1/MAT1.2 46 P0.16/EINT0/MAT0.2/CAP0.2 45 P0.15/EINT2 44 P1.21/PIPESTAT0 43 VDD 42 VSS 41 P0.14/EINT1/SDA1 40 P1.22/PIPESTAT1 39 P0.13/MAT1.1 38 P0.12/MAT1.0 37 P0.11/CAP1.1/SCL1 36 P1.23/PIPESTAT2 35 P0.10/CAP1.0 34 P0.9/RXD1/PWM6/EINT3 33 P0.8/TXD1/PWM4 P1.24/TRACECLK 32
002aab406
51 VDD P0.6/MOSI0/CAP0.2 30
LPC2132
P0.31 17
VSS 18
P0.0/TXD0/PWM1 19
P1.31/TRST 20
P0.2/SCL0/CAP0.0 22
VDD 23
P1.26/RTCK 24
VSS 25
P0.4/SCK0/CAP0.1/AD0.6 27
P1.25/EXTIN0 28
P0.5/MISO0/MAT0.1/AD0.7 29
Fig 16. LPC2132 64-pin package
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
50 VSS
65
Volume 1
UM10120
54 P0.19/MAT1.2/MOSI1/CAP1.2
53 P0.18/CAP1.3/MISO1/MAT1.3
64 P1.27/TDO
52 P1.30/TMS
56 P1.29/TCK
60 P1.28/TDI
57 RESET
62 XTAL1
61 XTAL2
58 P0.23
59 VSSA
63 VREF
P0.21/PWM5/AD1.6/CAP1.3 P0.22/AD1.7/CAP0.0/MAT0.0 RTXC1 P1.19/TRACEPKT3 RTXC2 VSS VDDA P1.18/TRACEPKT2 P0.25/AD0.4/AOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
49 VBAT 48 P1.20/TRACESYNC 47 P0.17/CAP1.2/SCK1/MAT1.2 46 P0.16/EINT0/MAT0.2/CAP0.2 45 P0.15/RI1/EINT2/AD1.5 44 P1.21/PIPESTAT0 43 VDD 42 VSS 41 P0.14/DCD1/EINT1/SDA1 40 P1.22/PIPESTAT1 39 P0.13/DTR1/MAT1.1/AD1.4 38 P0.12/DSR1/MAT1.0/AD1.3 37 P0.11/CTS1/CAP1.1/SCL1 36 P1.23/PIPESTAT2 35 P0.10/RTS1/CAP1.0/AD1.2 34 P0.9/RXD1/PWM6/EINT3 33 P0.8/TXD1/PWM4/AD1.1 P1.24/TRACECLK 32
002aab407
51 VDD P0.6/MOSI0/CAP0.2/AD1.0 30
LPC2134/2136/2138
P0.31 17
VSS 18
P0.0/TXD0/PWM1 19
P1.31/TRST 20
P0.2/SCL0/CAP0.0 22
VDD 23
P1.26/RTCK 24
VSS 25
P0.4/SCK0/CAP0.1/AD0.6 27
P1.25/EXTIN0 28
P0.5/MISO0/MAT0.1/AD0.7 29
Fig 17. LPC2134/6/8 64-pin package
6.2 Pin description for LPC2131/2/4/6/8

Pin description for LPC2131/2/4/6/8 and a brief explanation of corresponding functions are shown in the following table.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
50 VSS
66
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 56: Symbol
Pin description Pin Type I/O Description Port 0: Port 0 is a 32-bit I/O port with individual direction controls for each bit. Total of 30 pins of the Port 0 can be used as a general purpose bi-directional digital I/Os while P0.31 is output only pin. The operation of port 0 pins depends upon the pin function selected via the pin connect block. Pin P0.24 is not available. P0.0 General purpose digital input/output pin TXD0 Transmitter output for UART0 PWM1 Pulse Width Modulator output 1 P0.1 General purpose digital input/output pin RxD0 Receiver input for UART0 PWM3 Pulse Width Modulator output 3 EINT0 External interrupt 0 input P0.2 General purpose digital input/output pin SCL0 I2C0 clock input/output. Open drain output (for I2C compliance) CAP0.0 Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0 P0.3 General purpose digital input/output pin SDA0 I2C0 data input/output. Open drain output (for I2C compliance) MAT0.0 Match output for Timer 0, channel 0 EINT1 External interrupt 1 input P0.4 General purpose digital input/output pin SCK0 Serial clock for SPI0. SPI clock output from master or input to slave CAP0.1 Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0 AD0.6 A/D converter 0, input 6. This analog input is always connected to its pin P0.5 General purpose digital input/output pin MISO0 Master In Slave OUT for SPI0. Data input to SPI master or data output from SPI slave MAT0.1 Match output for Timer 0, channel 1 AD0.7 A/D converter 0, input 7. This analog input is always connected to its pin P0.6 General purpose digital input/output pin MOSI0 Master Out Slave In for SPI0. Data output from SPI master or data input to SPI slave CAP0.2 Capture input for Timer 0, channel 2 AD1.0 A/D converter 1, input 0. This analog input is always connected to its pin. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. P0.7 General purpose digital input/output pin SSEL0 Slave Select for SPI0. Selects the SPI interface as a slave PWM2 Pulse Width Modulator output 2 EINT2 External interrupt 2 input
P0.0 to P0.31
P0.0/TXD0/ PWM1
19[1]
I/O O O
P0.1/RxD0/ PWM3/EINT0
21[2]
I/O I O I
P0.2/SCL0/ CAP0.0
22[3]
I/O I/O I
P0.3/SDA0/ MAT0.0/EINT1
26[3]
I/O I/O O I
P0.4/SCK0/ CAP0.1/AD0.6
27[4]
I/O I/O I I
P0.5/MISO0/ MAT0.1/AD0.7
29[4]
I/O I/O O I
P0.6/MOSI0/ CAP0.2/AD1.0
30[4]
I/O I/O I I
P0.7/SSEL0/ PWM2/EINT2
31[2]
I/O I O I
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
67
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 56: Symbol
Pin description continued Pin 33[4] Type I/O O O I Description P0.8 General purpose digital input/output pin TXD1 Transmitter output for UART1 PWM4 Pulse Width Modulator output 4 AD1.1 A/D converter 1, input 1. This analog input is always connected to its pin. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only P0.9 General purpose digital input/output pin RxD1 Receiver input for UART1 PWM6 Pulse Width Modulator output 6 EINT3 External interrupt 3 input P0.10 General purpose digital input/output pin RTS1 Request to Send output for UART1. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. CAP1.0 Capture input for Timer 1, channel 0 AD1.2 A/D converter 1, input 2. This analog input is always connected to its pin. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. P0.11 General purpose digital input/output pin CTS1 Clear to Send input for UART1. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. CAP1.1 Capture input for Timer 1, channel 1. SCL1 I2C1 clock input/output. Open drain output (for I2C compliance) P0.12 General purpose digital input/output pin DSR1 Data Set Ready input for UART1. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. MAT1.0 Match output for Timer 1, channel 0. AD1.3 A/D converter input 3. This analog input is always connected to its pin. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. P0.13 General purpose digital input/output pin DTR1 Data Terminal Ready output for UART1. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. MAT1.1 Match output for Timer 1, channel 1. AD1.4 A/D converter input 4. This analog input is always connected to its pin. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. P0.14 General purpose digital input/output pin DCD1 Data Carrier Detect input for UART1. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. EINT1 External interrupt 1 input SDA1 I2C1 data input/output. Open drain output (for I2C compliance) Note: LOW on this pin while RESET is LOW forces on-chip boot-loader to take over control of the part after reset.
P0.8/TXD1/ PWM4/AD1.1
P0.9/RxD1/ PWM6/EINT3
34[2]
I/O I O I
P0.10/RTS1/ CAP1.0/AD1.2
35[4]
I/O O I I
P0.11/CTS1/ CAP1.1/SCL1
37[3]
I/O I I I/O
P0.12/DSR1/ MAT1.0/AD1.3
38[4]
I/O I O I
P0.13/DTR1/ MAT1.1/AD1.4
39[4]
I/O O O I
P0.14/DCD1/ EINT1/SDA1
41[3]
I/O I I I/O
P0.15/RI1/ EINT2/AD1.5
45[4]
I/O I I I
P0.15 General purpose digital input/output pin RI1 Ring Indicator input for UART1. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. EINT2 External interrupt 2 input. AD1.5 A/D converter 1, input 5. This analog input is always connected to its pin. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
68
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 56: Symbol
Pin description continued Pin Type I/O I O I Description P0.16 General purpose digital input/output pin EINT0 External interrupt 0 input. MAT0.2 Match output for Timer 0, channel 2. CAP0.2 Capture input for Timer 0, channel 2. P0.17 General purpose digital input/output pin CAP1.2 Capture input for Timer 1, channel 2. SCK1 Serial Clock for SSP. Clock output from master or input to slave. MAT1.2 Match output for Timer 1, channel 2. P0.18 General purpose digital input/output pin CAP1.3 Capture input for Timer 1, channel 3. MISO1 Master In Slave Out for SSP. Data input to SPI master or data output from SSP slave. MAT1.3 Match output for Timer 1, channel 3. P0.19 General purpose digital input/output pin MAT1.2 Match output for Timer 1, channel 2. MOSI1 Master Out Slave In for SSP. Data output from SSP master or data input to SSP slave. CAP1.2 Capture input for Timer 1, channel 2. P0.20 General purpose digital input/output pin MAT1.3 Match output for Timer 1, channel 3. SSEL1 Slave Select for SSP. Selects the SSP interface as a slave. EINT3 External interrupt 3 input. P0.21 General purpose digital input/output pin PWM5 Pulse Width Modulator output 5. AD1.6 A/D converter 1, input 6. This analog input is always connected to its pin. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. CAP1.3 Capture input for Timer 1, channel 3. P0.22 General purpose digital input/output pin AD1.7 A/D converter 1, input 7. This analog input is always connected to its pin. Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. CAP0.0 Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0. MAT0.0 Match output for Timer 0, channel 0. P0.23 General purpose digital input/output pin P0.25 General purpose digital input/output pin AD0.4 A/D converter 0, input 4. This analog input is always connected to its pin. Aout D/A converter output. Available in LPC2132/4/6/8 only. P0.26 General purpose digital input/output pin AD0.5 A/D converter 0, input 5. This analog input is always connected to its pin.
P0.16/EINT0/ 46[2] MAT0.2/CAP0.2
P0.17/CAP1.2/ SCK1/MAT1.2
47[1]
I/O I I/O O
P0.18/CAP1.3/ MISO1/MAT1.3
53[1]
I/O I I/O O
P0.19/MAT1.2/ MOSI1/CAP1.2
54[1]
I/O O I/O I
P0.20/MAT1.3/ SSEL1/EINT3
55[2]
I/O O I I
P0.21/PWM5/ AD1.6/CAP1.3
1[4]
I/O O I I
P0.22/AD1.7/ 2[4] CAP0.0/MAT0.0
I/O I I O
P0.23 P0.25/AD0.4/ Aout
58[1] 9[5]
I/O I/O I O
P0.26/AD0.5
10[4]
I/O I
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
69
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 56: Symbol
Pin description continued Pin Type I/O I I O Description P0.27 General purpose digital input/output pin AD0.0 A/D converter 0, input 0. This analog input is always connected to its pin. CAP0.1 Capture input for Timer 0, channel 1. MAT0.1 Match output for Timer 0, channel 1. P0.28 General purpose digital input/output pin AD0.1 A/D converter 0, input 1. This analog input is always connected to its pin. CAP0.2 Capture input for Timer 0, channel 2. MAT0.2 Match output for Timer 0, channel 2. P0.29 General purpose digital input/output pin AD0.2 A/D converter 0, input 2. This analog input is always connected to its pin. CAP0.3 Capture input for Timer 0, Channel 3. MAT0.3 Match output for Timer 0, channel 3. P0.30 General purpose digital input/output pin AD0.3 A/D converter 0, input 3. This analog input is always connected to its pin. EINT3 External interrupt 3 input. CAP0.0 Capture input for Timer 0, channel 0. P0.31 General purpose digital output only pin Note: This pin MUST NOT be externally pulled LOW when RESET pin is LOW or the JTAG port will be disabled.
P0.27/AD0.0/ 11[4] CAP0.1/MAT0.1
P0.28/AD0.1/ CAP0.2/MAT0.2
13[4]
I/O I I O
P0.29/AD0.2/ CAP0.3/MAT0.3
14[4]
I/O I I O
P0.30/AD0.3/ EINT3/CAP0.0
15[4]
I/O I I I
P0.31
17[6]
P1.0 to P1.31
I/O
Port 1: Port 1 is a 32-bit bi-directional I/O port with individual direction controls for each bit. The operation of port 1 pins depends upon the pin function selected via the pin connect block. Pins 0 through 15 of port 1 are not available. P1.16 General purpose digital input/output pin TRACEPKT0 Trace Packet, bit 0. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up. P1.17 General purpose digital input/output pin TRACEPKT1 Trace Packet, bit 1. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up. P1.18 General purpose digital input/output pin TRACEPKT2 Trace Packet, bit 2. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up. P1.19 General purpose digital input/output pin TRACEPKT3 Trace Packet, bit 3. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up. P1.20 General purpose digital input/output pin TRACESYNC Trace Synchronization. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up. Note: LOW on this pin while RESET is LOW enables pins P1.25:16 to operate as Trace port after reset
P1.16/ TRACEPKT0 P1.17/ TRACEPKT1 P1.18/ TRACEPKT2 P1.19/ TRACEPKT3 P1.20/ TRACESYNC
16[6] 12[6] 8[6] 4[6] 48[6]
I/O O I/O O I/O O I/O O I/O O
P1.21/ PIPESTAT0 P1.22/ PIPESTAT1
44[6] 40[6]
I/O O I/O O
P1.21 General purpose digital input/output pin PIPESTAT0 Pipeline Status, bit 0. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up. P1.22 General purpose digital input/output pin PIPESTAT1 Pipeline Status, bit 1. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
70
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 56: Symbol
Pin description continued Pin 36[6] 32[6] 28[6] 24[6] Type I/O O I/O O I/O I I/O I/O Description P1.23 General purpose digital input/output pin PIPESTAT2 Pipeline Status, bit 2. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up. P1.24 General purpose digital input/output pin TRACECLK Trace Clock. Standard I/O port with internal pull-up. P1.25 General purpose digital input/output pin EXTIN0 External Trigger Input. Standard I/O with internal pull-up. P1.26 General purpose digital input/output pin RTCK Returned Test Clock output. Extra signal added to the JTAG port. Assists debugger synchronization when processor frequency varies. Bi-directional pin with internal pull-up. Note: LOW on this pin while RESET is LOW enables pins P1.31:26 to operate as Debug port after reset
P1.23/ PIPESTAT2 P1.24/ TRACECLK P1.25/EXTIN0 P1.26/RTCK
P1.27/TDO P1.28/TDI P1.29/TCK P1.30/TMS P1.31/TRST RESET
64[6] 60[6] 56[6] 52[6] 20[6] 57[7]
I/O O I/O I I/O I I/O I I/O I I
P1.27 General purpose digital input/output pin TDO Test Data out for JTAG interface. P1.28 General purpose digital input/output pin TDI Test Data in for JTAG interface. P1.29 General purpose digital input/output pin TCK Test Clock for JTAG interface. P1.30 General purpose digital input/output pin TMS Test Mode Select for JTAG interface. P1.31 General purpose digital input/output pin TRST Test Reset for JTAG interface. External reset input: A LOW on this pin resets the device, causing I/O ports and peripherals to take on their default states, and processor execution to begin at address 0. TTL with hysteresis, 5 V tolerant. Input to the oscillator circuit and internal clock generator circuits. Output from the oscillator amplifier. Input to the RTC oscillator circuit. Output from the RTC oscillator circuit. Ground: 0 V reference Analog Ground: 0 V reference. This should nominally be the same voltage as VSS, but should be isolated to minimize noise and error. 3.3 V Power Supply: This is the power supply voltage for the core and I/O ports. Analog 3.3 V Power Supply: This should be nominally the same voltage as VDD but should be isolated to minimize noise and error. This voltage is used to power the ADC(s). A/D Converter Reference: This should be nominally the same voltage as VDD but should be isolated to minimize noise and error. Level on this pin is used as a reference for A/D convertor. RTC Power Supply: 3.3 V on this pin supplies the power to the RTC.
XTAL1 XTAL2 RTXC1 RTXC2 VSS VSSA VDD VDDA
62[8] 61[8] 3[8] 5[8]
I O I O
6, 18, 25, 42, I 50 59 23, 43, 51 7 I I I
VREF
63
VBAT
49
[1]
Bidirectional pin; Plain input; 3 State Output; 10 ns Slew rate Control; TTL with Hysteresis; 5 V Tolerant.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
71
Volume 1
UM10120
[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
Bidirectional; Input Glitch Filter (pulses shorter than 4 ns are ignored); 3 State Ouptut; 10 ns Slew rate Control; TTL with Hysteresis. I2C Pad; 400 kHz Specification; Open Drain; 5 V Tolerant. Bidirectional; Input Glitch Filter (pulses shorter than 4 ns are ignored); Analog I/O; digital receiver disable; 3 State Output; 10 ns Slew Rate Control; TTL with Hysteresis; 5 V Tolerant Bidirectional; Analog I/O; digital receiver disable; 3 State Output; 10 ns Slew Rate Control; TTL with Hysteresis; DAC enable output. Bidirectional pin; Plain input; 3 State Output; 10 ns Slew rate Control; TTL with Hysteresis; Pull-up; 5 V Tolerant. Input; TTL with Hysteresis; 5 V Tolerant (pulses shorter than 20 ns are ignored). Analog like pads having ESD structures only.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
72
UM10120
Chapter 7: Pin Connect Block
7.1 Features
Allows individual pin configuration.
7.2 Applications
The purpose of the Pin Connect Block is to configure the microcontroller pins to the desired functions.
7.3 Description
The pin connect block allows selected pins of the microcontroller to have more than one function. Configuration registers control the multiplexers to allow connection between the pin and the on chip peripherals. Peripherals should be connected to the appropriate pins prior to being activated, and prior to any related interrupt(s) being enabled. Activity of any enabled peripheral function that is not mapped to a related pin should be considered undefined. Selection of a single function on a port pin completely excludes all other functions otherwise available on the same pin. The only partial exception from the above rule of exclusion is the case of inputs to the A/D converter. Regardless of the function that is selected for the port pin that also hosts the A/D input, this A/D input can be read at any time and variations of the voltage level on this pin will be reflected in the A/D readings. However, valid analog reading(s) can be obtained if and only if the function of an analog input is selected. Only in this case proper interface circuit is active in between the physical pin and the A/D module. In all other cases, a part of digital logic necessary for the digital function to be performed will be active, and will disrupt proper behavior of the A/D.

The Pin Control Module contains 2 registers as shown in Table 57 below.
Table 57: Name PINSEL0 PINSEL1 PINSEL2
[1]
Pin connect block register map Description Access Reset value[1] 0x0000 0000 0x0000 0000 See Table 60 Address 0xE002 C000 0xE002 C004 0xE002 C014 Pin function select Read/Write register 0. Pin function select Read/Write register 1. Pin function select Read/Write register 2.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
73
Volume 1
UM10120
7.4.1 Pin Function Select Register 0 (PINSEL0 - 0xE002 C000)

The PINSEL0 register controls the functions of the pins as per the settings listed in Table 61. The direction control bit in the IO0DIR register is effective only when the GPIO function is selected for a pin. For other functions, direction is controlled automatically.
Table 58: Bit 1:0 Pin function Select register 0 (PINSEL0 - address 0xE002 C000) bit description Symbol P0.0 Value 00 01 10 11 3:2 P0.1 00 01 10 11 5:4 P0.2 00 01 10 11 7:6 P0.3 00 01 10 11 9:8 P0.4 00 01 10 11 11:10 P0.5 00 01 10 11 13:12 P0.6 00 01 10 11 15:14 P0.7 00 01 10 11 17:16 P0.8 00 01 10 11 Function GPIO Port 0.0 TXD (UART0) PWM1 Reserved GPIO Port 0.1 RxD (UART0) PWM3 EINT0 GPIO Port 0.2 SCL0 (I2C0) Capture 0.0 (Timer 0) Reserved GPIO Port 0.3 SDA0 (I2C0) Match 0.0 (Timer 0) EINT1 GPIO Port 0.4 SCK0 (SPI0) Capture 0.1 (Timer 0) AD0.6 GPIO Port 0.5 MISO0 (SPI0) Match 0.1 (Timer 0) AD0.7 GPIO Port 0.6 MOSI0 (SPI0) Capture 0.2 (Timer 0) Reserved[1][2] or AD1.0[3] GPIO Port 0.7 SSEL0 (SPI0) PWM2 EINT2 GPIO Port 0.8 TXD UART1 PWM4 Reserved[1][2] or AD1.1[3] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reset value 0
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
74
Volume 1
UM10120
Pin function Select register 0 (PINSEL0 - address 0xE002 C000) bit description Symbol P0.9 Value 00 01 10 11 Function GPIO Port 0.9 RxD (UART1) PWM6 EINT3 GPIO Port 0.10 Reserved[1][2] or RTS (UART1)[3] Capture 1.0 (Timer 1) Reserved[1][2] or AD1.2[3] GPIO Port 0.11 Reserved[1][2] SCL1 (I2C1) GPIO Port 0.12 Reserved[1][2] or DSR (UART1)[3] Match 1.0 (Timer 1) Reserved[1][2] or AD1.3[3] GPIO Port 0.13 Reserved[1][2] or DTR (UART1)[3] Match 1.1 (Timer 1) Reserved[1][2] or AD1.4[3] GPIO Port 0.14 Reserved[1][2] EINT1 SDA1 (I2C1) GPIO Port 0.15 Reserved[1][2] EINT2 Reserved[1][2] or AD1.5[3] or RI (UART1)[3] 0 or DCD (UART1)[3] 0 0 0 or CTS (UART1)[3] Capture 1.1 (Timer 1) 0 0 Reset value 0
Table 58: Bit 19:18
21:20
P0.10
00 01 10 11
23:22
P0.11
00 01 10 11
25:24
P0.12
00 01 10 11
27:26
P0.13
00 01 10 11
29:28
P0.14
00 01 10 11
31:30
P0.15
00 01 10 11
[1] [2] [3]
Available on LPC2131. Available on LPC2132. Available on LPC2134/6/8.
7.4.2 Pin function Select register 1 (PINSEL1 - 0xE002 C004)

The PINSEL1 register controls the functions of the pins as per the settings listed in following tables. The direction control bit in the IO0DIR register is effective only when the GPIO function is selected for a pin. For other functions direction is controlled automatically.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
75
Volume 1
UM10120
Pin function Select register 1 (PINSEL1 - address 0xE002 C004) bit description Symbol P0.16 Value 00 01 10 11 Function GPIO Port 0.16 EINT0 Match 0.2 (Timer 0) Capture 0.2 (Timer 0) GPIO Port 0.17 Capture 1.2 (Timer 1) SCK (SSP) Match 1.2 (Timer 1) GPIO Port 0.18 Capture 1.3 (Timer 1) MISO (SSP) Match 1.3 (Timer 1) GPIO Port 0.19 Match 1.2 (Timer 1) MOSI (SSP) Capture 1.2 (Timer 1) GPIO Port 0.20 Match 1.3 (Timer 1) SSEL (SSP) EINT3 GPIO Port 0.21 PWM5 Reserved[1][2] or AD1.6[3] Capture 1.3 (Timer 1) GPIO Port 0.22 Reserved[1][2] or AD1.7[3] Capture 0.0 (Timer 0) Match 0.0 (Timer 0) GPIO Port 0.23 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved GPIO Port 0.25 AD0.4 Reserved[1] or Aout(DAC)[2][3] Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reset value 0
Table 59: Bit 1:0
3:2
P0.17
00 01 10 11
5:4
P0.18
00 01 10 11
7:6
P0.19
00 01 10 11
9:8
P0.20
00 01 10 11
11:10
P0.21
00 01 10 11
13:12
P0.22
00 01 10 11
15:14
P0.23
00 01 10 11
17:16
P0.24
00 01 10 11
19:18
P0.25
00 01 10 11
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
76
Volume 1
UM10120
Pin function Select register 1 (PINSEL1 - address 0xE002 C004) bit description Symbol P0.26 Value 00 01 10 11 Function GPIO Port 0.26 AD0.5 Reserved Reserved GPIO Port 0.27 AD0.0 Capture 0.1 (Timer 0) Match 0.1 (Timer 0) GPIO Port 0.28 AD0.1 Capture 0.2 (Timer 0) Match 0.2 (Timer 0) GPIO Port 0.29 AD0.2 Capture 0.3 (Timer 0) Match 0.3 (Timer 0) GPIO Port 0.30 AD0.3 EINT3 Capture 0.0 (Timer 0) GPO Port only Reserved Reserved Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 Reset value 0
Table 59: Bit 21:20
23:22
P0.27
00 01 10 11
25:24
P0.28
00 01 10 11
27:26
P0.29
00 01 10 11
29:28
P0.30
00 01 10 11
31:30
P0.31
00 01 10 11
[1] [2] [3]
Available on LPC2131. Available on LPC2132. Available on LPC2134/6/8.
7.4.3 Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2 - 0xE002 C014)

The PINSEL2 register controls the functions of the pins as per the settings listed in Table 60. The direction control bit in the IO1DIR register is effective only when the GPIO function is selected for a pin. For other functions direction is controlled automatically. Warning: use read-modify-write operation when accessing PINSEL2 register. Accidental write of 0 to bit 2 and/or bit 3 results in loss of debug and/or trace functionality! Changing of either bit 4 or bit 5 from 1 to 0 may cause an incorrect code execution!
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
77
Volume 1
UM10120
Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2 - 0xE002 C014) bit description Value Function Reset value Reserved, user software should not write ones NA to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Pins P1.36-26 are used as GPIO pins. Pins P1.36-26 are used as a Debug port. Pins P1.25-16 are used as GPIO pins. Pins P1.25-16 are used as a Trace port. Reserved, user software should not write ones NA to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. P1.20/ TRACESYNC P1.26/RTCK
Table 60: Bit 1:0 -
Symbol
2 3
GPIO/DEBUG 0 1 GPIO/TRACE 0 1
31:4 -
7.4.4 Pin function select register values

The PINSEL registers control the functions of device pins as shown below. Pairs of bits in these registers correspond to specific device pins.
Table 61: 00 01 10 11 Pin function select register bits Value after Reset 00 Primary (default) function, typically GPIO port First alternate function Second alternate function Reserved
PINSEL0 and PINSEL1 Values Function
The direction control bit in the IO0DIR/IO1DIR register is effective only when the GPIO function is selected for a pin. For other functions, direction is controlled automatically. Each derivative typically has a different pinout and therefore a different set of functions possible for each pin. Details for a specific derivative may be found in the appropriate data sheet.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
78
UM10120
Chapter 8: General Purpose Input/Output ports (GPIO)
8.1 Features
Direction control of individual bits Separate control of output set and clear All I/O default to inputs after reset
8.2 Applications

General purpose I/O Driving LEDs, or other indicators Controlling off-chip devices Sensing digital inputs
8.3 Pin description

Table 62: Pin P0.0-P.31 P1.16-P1.31 GPIO pin description Type Input/ Output Description General purpose input/output. The number of GPIOs actually available depends on the use of alternate functions.

LPC2131/2/4/6/8 has two 32-bit General Purpose I/O ports. Total of 30 input/output and a single output only pin out of 32 pins are available on PORT0. PORT1 has up to 16 pins available for GPIO functions. PORT0 and PORT1 are controlled via two groups of 4 registers as shown in Table 63.
Table 63: Generic Name IOPIN GPIO register map Description Access Reset value[1] NA PORT0 PORT1 Address & Name Address & Name 0xE002 8000 IO0PIN 0xE002 8010 IO1PIN
GPIO Port Pin value register. The current R/W state of the GPIO configured port pins can always be read from this register, regardless of pin direction.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
79
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 8: GPIO
Table 63: Generic Name IOSET
GPIO register map Description GPIO Port Output set register. This register controls the state of output pins in conjunction with the IOCLR register. Writing ones produces highs at the corresponding port pins. Writing zeroes has no effect. GPIO Port Direction control register. This register individually controls the direction of each port pin. GPIO Port Output clear register. This register controls the state of output pins. Writing ones produces lows at the corresponding port pins and clears the corresponding bits in the IOSET register. Writing zeroes has no effect.
[1]
Access Reset value[1] R/W
PORT0 PORT1 Address & Name Address & Name 0xE002 8014 IO1SET
0x0000 0000 0xE002 8004 IO0SET
IODIR
R/W
0x0000 0000 0xE002 8008 IO0DIR 0x0000 0000 0xE002 800C IO0CLR
0xE002 8018 IO1DIR 0xE002 801C IO1CLR
IOCLR
WO
8.4.1 GPIO Pin Value register 0 and 1 (IO0PIN - 0xE002 8000 and IO1PIN 0xE002 8010)
This register provides the value of the GPIO pins. Registers value reflects any outside world influence on the GPIO configured pins only. Monitoring of non-GPIO configured port pins using IOPIN register will not be valid, since activities on non-GPIO configured pins are not indicated in the IOPIN register. Selection of a single function on a port pin completely excludes all other functions otherwise available on the same pin. The only partial exception from the above rule of exclusion is in the case of inputs to the A/D converter. Regardless of the function that is selected for the port pin that also hosts the A/D input, this A/D input can be read at any time and variations of the voltage level on this pin will be reflected in the A/D readings. However, valid analog reading(s) can be obtained if and only if the function of an analog input is selected. Only in this case proper interface circuit is active in between the physical pin and the A/D module. In all other cases, a part of digital logic necessary for the digital function to be performed will be active, and will disrupt proper behavior of the A/D.
Table 64: Bit 31:0 GPIO Pin Value register 0 (IO0PIN - address 0xE002 8000) bit description Symbol P0xVAL Description GPIO pin value bits. Bit 0 in IO0PIN corresponds to P0.0 ... Bit 31 in IO0PIN corresponds to P0.31. Reset value Undefined
Table 65: Bit 31:0
GPIO Pin Value register 1 (IO1PIN - address 0xE002 8010) bit description Symbol P1xVAL Description GPIO pin value bits. Bit 0 in IO1PIN corresponds to P1.0 ... Bit 31 in IO1PIN corresponds to P1.31. Reset value Undefined
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
80
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 8: GPIO
8.4.2 GPIO Output Set register 0 and 1 (IO0SET - 0xE002 8004 and IO1SET 0xE002 8014)
This register is used to produce a HIGH level output at the port pins if they are configured as GPIO in an OUTPUT mode. Writing 1 produces a HIGH level at the corresponding port pins. Writing 0 has no effect. If any pin is configured as an input or a secondary function, writing to IOSET has no effect. Reading the IOSET register returns the value of this register, as determined by previous writes to IOSET and IOCLR (or IOPIN as noted above). This value does not reflect the effect of any outside world influence on the I/O pins.
Table 66: Bit 31:0 GPIO Output Set register 0 (IO0SET - address 0xE002 8004 bit description Symbol P0xSET Description Reset value Output value SET bits. Bit 0 in IO0SET corresponds to P0.0 ... 0x0000 0000 Bit 31 in IO0SET corresponds to P0.31.
Table 67: Bit 31:0
GPIO Output Set register 1 (IO1SET - address 0xE002 8014) bit description Symbol P1xSET Description Reset value Output value SET bits. Bit 0 in IO1SET corresponds to P1.0 ... 0x0000 0000 Bit 31 in IO1SET corresponds to P1.31.
8.4.3 GPIO Output Clear register 0 and 1 (IO0CLR - 0xE002 800C and IO1CLR - 0xE002 801C)
This register is used to produce a LOW level at port pins if they are configured as GPIO in an OUTPUT mode. Writing 1 produces a LOW level at the corresponding port pins and clears the corresponding bits in the IOSET register. Writing 0 has no effect. If any pin is configured as an input or a secondary function, writing to IOCLR has no effect.
Table 68: Bit 31:0 GPIO Output Clear register 0 (IO0CLR - address 0xE002 800C) bit description Symbol P0xCLR Description Output value CLEAR bits. Bit 0 in IO0CLR corresponds to P0.0 ... Bit 31 in IO0CLR corresponds to P0.31. Reset value 0x0000 0000
Table 69: Bit 31:0
GPIO Output Clear register 1 (IO1CLR - address 0xE002 801C) bit description Symbol P1xCLR Description Output value CLEAR bits. Bit 0 in IO1CLR corresponds to P1.0 ... Bit 31 in IO1CLR corresponds to P1.31. Reset value 0x0000 0000
8.4.4 GPIO Direction Register 0 and 1 (IO0DIR - 0xE002 8008 and IO1DIR 0xE002 8018)
This register is used to control the direction of the pins when they are configured as GPIO port pins. Direction bit for any pin must be set according to the pin functionality.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
81
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 8: GPIO
GPIO Direction Register 0 (IO0DIR - address 0xE002 8008) bit description Description Direction control bits. Bit 0 in IO0DIR controls P0.0 ... Bit 30 in IO0DIR controls P0.30. 0 1 Controlled pin is input. Controlled pin is output. Reset value 0x0000 0000
Table 70: Bit 31:0
Symbol Value P0xDIR
Table 71: Bit 31:0
GPIO Direction Register 1 (IO1DIR - address 0xE002 8018) bit description Description Direction control bits. Bit 0 in IO1DIR controls P1.0 ... Bit 30 in IO1DIR controls P1.30. 0 1 Controlled pin is input. Controlled pin is output. Reset value 0x0000 0000
Symbol Value P1xDIR
8.5 GPIO usage notes

8.5.1 Example 1: sequential accesses to IOSET and IOCLR affecting the same GPIO pin/bit
State of the output configured GPIO pin is determined by writes into the pins port IOSET and IOCLR registers. Last of these accesses to the IOSET/IOCLR register will determine the final output of a pin. In case of a code: IO0DIR IO0CLR IO0SET IO0CLR = = = = 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0080 0080 0080 0080 ;pin P0.7 configured as output ;P0.7 goes LOW ;P0.7 goes HIGH ;P0.7 goes LOW
pin P0.7 is configured as an output (write to IO0DIR register). After this, P0.7 output is set to low (first write to IO0CLR register). Short high pulse follows on P0.7 (write access to IO0SET), and the final write to IO0CLR register sets pin P0.7 back to low level.
8.5.2 Example 2: immediate output of 0s and 1s on a GPIO port

Write access to ports IOSET followed by write to the IOCLR register results with pins outputting 0s being slightly later then pins outputting 1s. There are systems that can tolerate this delay of a valid output, but for some applications simultaneous output of a binary content (mixed 0s and 1s) within a group of pins on a single GPIO port is required. This can be accomplished by writing to the ports IOPIN register. Following code will preserve existing output on PORT0 pins P0.[31:16] and P0.[7:0] and at the same time set P0.[15:8] to 0xA5, regardless of the previous value of pins P0.[15:8]: IO0PIN = (IO0PIN && #0xFFFF00FF) || #0x0000A500
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
82
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 8: GPIO
8.5.3 Writing to IOSET/IOCLR .vs. IOPIN

Write to IOSET/IOCLR register allows easy change of ports selected output pin(s) to high/low level at a time. Only pin/bit(s) in IOSET/IOCLR written with 1 will be set to high/low level, while those written as 0 will remain unaffected. However, by just writing to either IOSET or IOCLR register it is not possible to instantaneously output arbitrary binary data containing mixture of 0s and 1s on a GPIO port. Write to IOPIN register enables instantaneous output of a desired content on a parallel GPIO. Binary data written into the IOPIN register will affect all output configured pins of that parallel port: 0s in the IOPIN will produce low level pin outputs and 1s in IOPIN will produce high level pin outputs. In order to change output of only a group of ports pins, application must logically AND readout from the IOPIN with mask containing 0s in bits corresponding to pins that will be changed, and 1s for all others. Finally, this result has to be logically ORred with the desired content and stored back into the IOPIN register. Example 2 from above illustrates output of 0xA5 on PORT0 pins 15 to 8 while preserving all other PORT0 output pins as they were before.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
83
UM10120
Chapter 9: Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter 0 (UART0)
9.1 Features

16 byte Receive and Transmit FIFOs Register locations conform to 550 industry standard. Receiver FIFO trigger points at 1, 4, 8, and 14 bytes. Built-in baud rate generator. LPC2131/2/4/6/8 UART0 contains mechanism that enables software flow control implementation.
9.2 Pin description

Table 72: Pin RXD0 TXD0 UART0 pin description Type Input Output Description Serial Input. Serial receive data. Serial Output. Serial transmit data.

UART0 contains registers organized as shown in Table 73. The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) is contained in U0LCR[7] and enables access to the Divisor Latches.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
84
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
User manual Rev. 01 24 June 2005
Table 73: Name
UART0 register map Description Bit functions and addresses MSB BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 LSB BIT0 RO WO R/W R/W Enable RX Line Status Interrupt IIR2 Enable THRE Interrupt IIR1 RX FIFO Reset Enable R/W RX Data Available Interrupt IIR0 FIFO Enable RO WO NA NA 0x01 0x00 0x00 0xE000 C000 (DLAB=0) 0xE000 C000 (DLAB=0) 0xE000 C000 (DLAB=1) 0xE000 C004 (DLAB=1) 0xE000 C004 (DLAB=0) 8-bit Read Data 8-bit Write Data 8-bit Data 8-bit Data Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Access Reset Address value[1]
Volume 1
U0RBR U0THR U0DLL U0DLM U0IER
Receiver Buffer Register Transmit Holding Register Divisor Latch LSB Divisor Latch MSB Interrupt Enable Register
U0IIR U0FCR U0LCR
Interrupt ID Register FIFO Control Register Line Control Register Line Status Register Scratch Pad Register Transmit Enable Register
[1]
FIFOs Enabled RX Trigger DLAB Set Break TEMT
Reserved Reserved
IIR3
0x01 0x00 0x00
0xE000 C008 0xE000 C008 0xE000 C00C
Reserved Reserved Reserved TX FIFO Reset Stick Parity THRE Even Parity Select BI Parity Enable FE Number of Stop Bits PE
Word Length Select R/W
U0LSR U0SCR U0TER
RX FIFO Error
OE
DR
RO R/W
0x60 0x00 0x80
0xE000 C014 0xE000 C01C 0xE000 C030
8-bit Data TXEN
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved R/W
UM10120
Chapter 9: UART0
85
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 9: UART0
9.3.1 UART0 Receiver Buffer Register (U0RBR - 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Read Only)
The U0RBR is the top byte of the UART0 Rx FIFO. The top byte of the Rx FIFO contains the oldest character received and can be read via the bus interface. The LSB (bit 0) represents the oldest received data bit. If the character received is less than 8 bits, the unused MSBs are padded with zeroes. The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) in U0LCR must be zero in order to access the U0RBR. The U0RBR is always Read Only. Since PE, FE and BI bits correspond to the byte sitting on the top of the RBR FIFO (i.e. the one that will be read in the next read from the RBR), the right approach for fetching the valid pair of received byte and its status bits is first to read the content of the U0LSR register, and then to read a byte from the U0RBR.
Table 74: Bit 7:0 UART0 Receiver Buffer Register (U0RBR - address 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Read Only) bit description Description The UART0 Receiver Buffer Register contains the oldest received byte in the UART0 Rx FIFO. Reset value undefined
Symbol RBR
9.3.2 UART0 Transmit Holding Register (U0THR - 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Write Only)
The U0THR is the top byte of the UART0 TX FIFO. The top byte is the newest character in the TX FIFO and can be written via the bus interface. The LSB represents the first bit to transmit. The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) in U0LCR must be zero in order to access the U0THR. The U0THR is always Write Only.
Table 75: Bit 7:0 UART0 Transmit Holding Register (U0THR - address 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Write Only) bit description Description Reset value Writing to the UART0 Transmit Holding Register causes the data NA to be stored in the UART0 transmit FIFO. The byte will be sent when it reaches the bottom of the FIFO and the transmitter is available.
Symbol THR
9.3.3 UART0 Divisor Latch Registers 0 and 1 (U0DLL - 0xE000 C000 and U0DLM - 0xE000 C004, when DLAB = 1)
The UART0 Divisor Latch is part of the UART0 Baud Rate Generator and holds the value used to divide the VPB clock (PCLK) in order to produce the baud rate clock, which must be 16x the desired baud rate (Equation 1). The U0DLL and U0DLM registers together form a 16 bit divisor where U0DLL contains the lower 8 bits of the divisor and U0DLM contains the higher 8 bits of the divisor. A 0x0000 value is treated like a 0x0001 value as division by zero is not allowed.The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) in U0LCR must be one in order to access the UART0 Divisor Latches. Details on how to select the right value for U0DLL and U0DLM can be found later on in this chapter.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
86
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 9: UART0 (1)
pclk UART0 baudrate = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------16 ( 16 U0DLM + U0DLL )
Table 76: Bit 7:0
UART0 Divisor Latch LSB register (U0DLL - address 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 1) bit description Description The UART0 Divisor Latch LSB Register, along with the U0DLM register, determines the baud rate of the UART0. Reset value 0x01
Symbol DLLSB
Table 77: Bit 7:0
UART0 Divisor Latch MSB register (U0DLM - address 0xE000 C004, when DLAB = 1) bit description Description The UART0 Divisor Latch MSB Register, along with the U0DLL register, determines the baud rate of the UART0. Reset value 0x00
Symbol DLMSB
9.3.4 UART0 Baud-rate calculation

Example: Using UART0baudrate Equation 1 from above, it can be determined that system with PCLK = 20 MHz, U0DL = 130 (U0DLM = 0x00 and U0DLL = 0x82) will enable UART0 with UART0baudrate=9615 baud.
Table 78: Some baud-rates available when using 20 MHz peripheral clock (PCLK=20 MHz) % error[1] 0 0.0020 0.0032 0.0034 0.0040 0.0080 0.0160 0.0320 0.0640 0 0.0320 0.0640 Desired U0DLM:U0DLL baud-rate hex dec 4800 7200 9600 19200 38400 56000 57600 112000 115200 224000 448000 0x0104 0x00AE 0x0082 0x0041 0x0021 0x0021 0x0016 0x000B 0x000B 0x0006 0x0003 260 174 130 65 33 22 22 11 11 6 3 % error[1] 0.1603 0.2235 0.1603 0.1603 1.3573 1.4610 1.3573 1.4610 1.3573 6.9940 6.9940
Desired U0DLM:U0DLL baud-rate hex dec 50 75 110 134.5 150 300 600 1200 1800 2000 2400 3600
[1]
0x61A8 0x411B 0x2C64 0x244E 0x208D 0x1047 0x0823 0x0412 0x02B6 0x0271 0x0209 0x015B
25000 16667 11364 9294 8333 4167 2083 1042 694 625 521 347
Relative error calculated as: actual_baudrate/desired_baudrate-1. Actual baudrate based on Equation 1.
9.3.5 UART0 Interrupt Enable Register (U0IER - 0xE000 C004, when DLAB = 0)
The U0IER is used to enable the three UART0 interrupt sources.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
87
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 9: UART0
UART0 Interrupt Enable Register (U0IER - address 0xE000 C004, when DLAB = 0) bit description Value Description U0IER[0] enables the Receive Data Available interrupt for UART0. It also controls the Character Receive Time-out interrupt. 0 1 Disable the RDA interrupts. Enable the RDA interrupts. U0IER[1] enables the THRE interrupt for UART0. The status of this can be read from U0LSR[5]. 0 1 Disable the THRE interrupts. Enable the THRE interrupts. U0IER[2] enables the UART0 RX line status interrupts. 0 The status of this interrupt can be read from U0LSR[4:1]. 0 1 Disable the RX line status interrupts. Enable the RX line status interrupts. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA 0 Reset value 0
Table 79: Bit 0
Symbol RBR Interrupt Enable
THRE Interrupt Enable
RX Line Status Interrupt Enable
7:3
9.3.6 UART0 Interrupt Identification Register (U0IIR - 0xE000 C008, Read Only)
The U0IIR provides a status code that denotes the priority and source of a pending interrupt. The interrupts are frozen during an U0IIR access. If an interrupt occurs during an U0IIR access, the interrupt is recorded for the next U0IIR access.
Table 80: Bit 0 UART0 Interrupt Identification Register (UOIIR - address 0xE000 C008, read only) bit description Value Description Note that U0IIR[0] is active low. The pending interrupt can be determined by evaluating U0IIR[3:1]. 0 1 3:1 Interrupt Identification 011 010 110 001 5:4 7:6 FIFO Enable At least one interrupt is pending. No pending interrupts. U0IER[3:1] identifies an interrupt corresponding to the UART0 Rx FIFO. All other combinations of U0IER[3:1] not listed above are reserved (000,100,101,111). 1 - Receive Line Status (RLS). 2a - Receive Data Available (RDA). 2b - Character Time-out Indicator (CTI). 3 - THRE Interrupt Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. These bits are equivalent to U0FCR[0]. NA 0 0 Reset value 1
Symbol Interrupt Pending
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
88
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 9: UART0
Interrupts are handled as described in Table 81. Given the status of U0IIR[3:0], an interrupt handler routine can determine the cause of the interrupt and how to clear the active interrupt. The U0IIR must be read in order to clear the interrupt prior to exiting the Interrupt Service Routine. The UART0 RLS interrupt (U0IIR[3:1] = 011) is the highest priority interrupt and is set whenever any one of four error conditions occur on the UART0 Rx input: overrun error (OE), parity error (PE), framing error (FE) and break interrupt (BI). The UART0 Rx error condition that set the interrupt can be observed via U0LSR[4:1]. The interrupt is cleared upon an U0LSR read. The UART0 RDA interrupt (U0IIR[3:1] = 010) shares the second level priority with the CTI interrupt (U0IIR[3:1] = 110). The RDA is activated when the UART0 Rx FIFO reaches the trigger level defined in U0FCR[7:6] and is reset when the UART0 Rx FIFO depth falls below the trigger level. When the RDA interrupt goes active, the CPU can read a block of data defined by the trigger level. The CTI interrupt (U0IIR[3:1] = 110) is a second level interrupt and is set when the UART0 Rx FIFO contains at least one character and no UART0 Rx FIFO activity has occurred in 3.5 to 4.5 character times. Any UART0 Rx FIFO activity (read or write of UART0 RSR) will clear the interrupt. This interrupt is intended to flush the UART0 RBR after a message has been received that is not a multiple of the trigger level size. For example, if a peripheral wished to send a 105 character message and the trigger level was 10 characters, the CPU would receive 10 RDA interrupts resulting in the transfer of 100 characters and 1 to 5 CTI interrupts (depending on the service routine) resulting in the transfer of the remaining 5 characters.
Table 81: UART0 interrupt handling Interrupt Source None OE[2] or PE[2] or FE[2] or BI[2] Rx data available or trigger level reached in FIFO (U0FCR0=1) Minimum of one character in the Rx FIFO and no character input or removed during a time period depending on how many characters are in FIFO and what the trigger level is set at (3.5 to 4.5 character times). The exact time will be: [(word length) 7 2] 8 + [(trigger level number of characters) 8 + 1] RCLKs 0010 Third THRE THRE[2] U0IIR Read (if source of interrupt) or THR write[4] Interrupt Reset U0LSR Read[2] U0RBR Read[3] or UART0 FIFO drops below trigger level U0RBR Read[3]
U0IIR[3:0] Priority Interrupt Type value[1] 0001 0110 0100 Highest Second None RX Line Status / Error RX Data Available
1100
Second
Character Time-out indication
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Values "0000", 0011, 0101, 0111, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011,1101,1110,1111 are reserved. For details see Section 9.3.9 UART0 Line Status Register (U0LSR - 0xE000 C014, Read Only) For details see Section 9.3.1 UART0 Receiver Buffer Register (U0RBR - 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Read Only) For details see Section 9.3.6 UART0 Interrupt Identification Register (U0IIR - 0xE000 C008, Read Only) and Section 9.3.2 UART0 Transmit Holding Register (U0THR - 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Write Only)
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
89
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 9: UART0
The UART0 THRE interrupt (U0IIR[3:1] = 001) is a third level interrupt and is activated when the UART0 THR FIFO is empty provided certain initialization conditions have been met. These initialization conditions are intended to give the UART0 THR FIFO a chance to fill up with data to eliminate many THRE interrupts from occurring at system start-up. The initialization conditions implement a one character delay minus the stop bit whenever THRE=1 and there have not been at least two characters in the U0THR at one time since the last THRE = 1 event. This delay is provided to give the CPU time to write data to U0THR without a THRE interrupt to decode and service. A THRE interrupt is set immediately if the UART0 THR FIFO has held two or more characters at one time and currently, the U0THR is empty. The THRE interrupt is reset when a U0THR write occurs or a read of the U0IIR occurs and the THRE is the highest interrupt (U0IIR[3:1] = 001).
9.3.7 UART0 FIFO Control Register (U0FCR - 0xE000 C008)

The U0FCR controls the operation of the UART0 Rx and TX FIFOs.
Table 82: Bit 0 UART0 FIFO Control Register (U0FCR - address 0xE000 C008) bit description Value Description Reset value UART0 FIFOs are disabled. Must not be used in the 0 application. Active high enable for both UART0 Rx and TX FIFOs and U0FCR[7:1] access. This bit must be set for proper UART0 operation. Any transition on this bit will automatically clear the UART0 FIFOs. No impact on either of UART0 FIFOs. Writing a logic 1 to U0FCR[1] will clear all bytes in UART0 Rx FIFO and reset the pointer logic. This bit is self-clearing. No impact on either of UART0 FIFOs. Writing a logic 1 to U0FCR[2] will clear all bytes in UART0 TX FIFO and reset the pointer logic. This bit is self-clearing. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. These two bits determine how many receiver UART0 FIFO characters must be written before an interrupt is activated. Trigger level 0 (1 character or 0x01) 01 10 11 Trigger level 1 (4 characters or 0x04) Trigger level 2 (8 characters or 0x08) Trigger level 3 (14 characters or 0x0E) NA 0 0
Symbol
FIFO Enable 0 1
RX FIFO Reset
0 1
TX FIFO Reset
0 1
5:3
7:6
RX Trigger Level 00
9.3.8 UART0 Line Control Register (U0LCR - 0xE000 C00C)

The U0LCR determines the format of the data character that is to be transmitted or received.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
90
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 9: UART0
Table 83: Bit 1:0
UART0 Line Control Register (U0LCR - address 0xE000 C00C) bit description Value 00 01 10 11 Description 5 bit character length 6 bit character length 7 bit character length 8 bit character length 1 stop bit. 2 stop bits (1.5 if U0LCR[1:0]=00). Disable parity generation and checking. Enable parity generation and checking. Odd parity. Number of 1s in the transmitted character and the attached parity bit will be odd. Even Parity. Number of 1s in the transmitted character and the attached parity bit will be even. Forced "1" stick parity. Forced "0" stick parity. Disable break transmission. Enable break transmission. Output pin UART0 TXD is forced to logic 0 when U0LCR[6] is active high. Disable access to Divisor Latches. Enable access to Divisor Latches. 0 0 0 0 0 Reset value 0
Symbol Word Length Select
2 3 5:4
Stop Bit Select Parity Enable Parity Select
0 1 0 1 00 01 10 11
Break Control
0 1
Divisor Latch 0 Access Bit (DLAB) 1
9.3.9 UART0 Line Status Register (U0LSR - 0xE000 C014, Read Only)
The U0LSR is a read-only register that provides status information on the UART0 TX and RX blocks.
Table 84: 0 UART0 Line Status Register (U0LSR - address 0xE000 C014, read only) bit description Value Description U0LSR0 is set when the U0RBR holds an unread character and is cleared when the UART0 RBR FIFO is empty. 0 1 1 Overrun Error (OE) U0RBR is empty. U0RBR contains valid data. The overrun error condition is set as soon as it occurs. An U0LSR read clears 0 U0LSR1. U0LSR1 is set when UART0 RSR has a new character assembled and the UART0 RBR FIFO is full. In this case, the UART0 RBR FIFO will not be overwritten and the character in the UART0 RSR will be lost. 0 1 2 Parity Error (PE) Overrun error status is inactive. Overrun error status is active. When the parity bit of a received character is in the wrong state, a parity error 0 occurs. An U0LSR read clears U0LSR[2]. Time of parity error detection is dependent on U0FCR[0]. Note: A parity error is associated with the character at the top of the UART0 RBR FIFO. 0 1 Parity error status is inactive. Parity error status is active. Reset value 0
Bit Symbol Receiver Data Ready (RDR)
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
91
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 9: UART0
Table 84: 3
UART0 Line Status Register (U0LSR - address 0xE000 C014, read only) bit description Value Description Reset value When the stop bit of a received character is a logic 0, a framing error occurs. 0 An U0LSR read clears U0LSR[3]. The time of the framing error detection is dependent on U0FCR0. Upon detection of a framing error, the Rx will attempt to resynchronize to the data and assume that the bad stop bit is actually an early start bit. However, it cannot be assumed that the next received byte will be correct even if there is no Framing Error. Note: A framing error is associated with the character at the top of the UART0 RBR FIFO. 0 1 Framing error status is inactive. Framing error status is active. When RXD0 is held in the spacing state (all 0s) for one full character 0 transmission (start, data, parity, stop), a break interrupt occurs. Once the break condition has been detected, the receiver goes idle until RXD0 goes to marking state (all 1s). An U0LSR read clears this status bit. The time of break detection is dependent on U0FCR[0]. Note: The break interrupt is associated with the character at the top of the UART0 RBR FIFO. 0 1 Break interrupt status is inactive. Break interrupt status is active. THRE is set immediately upon detection of an empty UART0 THR and is cleared on a U0THR write. 0 1 U0THR contains valid data. U0THR is empty. TEMT is set when both U0THR and U0TSR are empty; TEMT is cleared when 1 either the U0TSR or the U0THR contain valid data. 0 1 U0THR and/or the U0TSR contains valid data. U0THR and the U0TSR are empty. U0LSR[7] is set when a character with a Rx error such as framing error, parity 0 error or break interrupt, is loaded into the U0RBR. This bit is cleared when the U0LSR register is read and there are no subsequent errors in the UART0 FIFO. 0 1 U0RBR contains no UART0 RX errors or U0FCR[0]=0. UART0 RBR contains at least one UART0 RX error. 1
Bit Symbol Framing Error (FE)
Break Interrupt (BI)
Transmitter Holding Register Empty (THRE)) Transmitter Empty (TEMT)
Error in RX FIFO (RXFE)
9.3.10 UART0 Scratch pad register (U0SCR - 0xE000 C01C)

The U0SCR has no effect on the UART0 operation. This register can be written and/or read at users discretion. There is no provision in the interrupt interface that would indicate to the host that a read or write of the U0SCR has occurred.
Table 85: Bit 7:0 UART0 Scratch pad register (U0SCR - address 0xE000 C01C) bit description Symbol Pad Description A readable, writable byte. Reset value 0x00
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
92
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 9: UART0
9.3.11 UART0 Transmit Enable Register (U0TER - 0xE000 C030)

LPC2131/2/4/6/8s U0TER enables implementation of software flow control. When TXEn=1, UART0 transmitter will keep sending data as long as they are available. As soon as TXEn becomes 0, UART0 transmittion will stop. Table 86 describes how to use TXEn bit in order to achieve software flow control.
Table 86: Bit 6:0 7 UART0 Transmit Enable Register (U0TER - address 0xE000 C030) bit description Description Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value NA
Symbol TXEN
When this bit is 1, as it is after a Reset, data written to the THR is output 1 on the TXD pin as soon as any preceding data has been sent. If this bit is cleared to 0 while a character is being sent, the transmission of that character is completed, but no further characters are sent until this bit is set again. In other words, a 0 in this bit blocks the transfer of characters from the THR or TX FIFO into the transmit shift register. Software implementing software-handshaking can clear this bit when it receives an XOFF character (DC3). Software can set this bit again when it receives an XON (DC1) character.
9.4 Architecture
The architecture of the UART0 is shown below in the block diagram. The VPB interface provides a communications link between the CPU or host and the UART0. The UART0 receiver block, U0RX, monitors the serial input line, RXD0, for valid input. The UART0 RX Shift Register (U0RSR) accepts valid characters via RXD0. After a valid character is assembled in the U0RSR, it is passed to the UART0 RX Buffer Register FIFO to await access by the CPU or host via the generic host interface. The UART0 transmitter block, U0TX, accepts data written by the CPU or host and buffers the data in the UART0 TX Holding Register FIFO (U0THR). The UART0 TX Shift Register (U0TSR) reads the data stored in the U0THR and assembles the data to transmit via the serial output pin, TXD0. The UART0 Baud Rate Generator block, U0BRG, generates the timing enables used by the UART0 TX block. The U0BRG clock input source is the VPB clock (PCLK). The main clock is divided down per the divisor specified in the U0DLL and U0DLM registers. This divided down clock is a 16x oversample clock, NBAUDOUT. The interrupt interface contains registers U0IER and U0IIR. The interrupt interface receives several one clock wide enables from the U0TX and U0RX blocks. Status information from the U0TX and U0RX is stored in the U0LSR. Control information for the U0TX and U0RX is stored in the U0LCR.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
93
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 9: UART0
U0TX
NTXRDY U0TSR TXD0
U0THR
U0BRG
U0DLL
NBAUDOUT
U0DLM
RCLK
U0RX INTERRUPT U0RBR U0INTR U0IER U0RSR
NRXRDY RXD0
U0IIR
U0FCR
U0LSR U0SCR U0LCR
PA[2:0] PSEL PSTB PWRITE PD[7:0] AR MR PCLK VPB INTERFACE DDIS
Fig 18. LPC2131/2/4/6/8 UART0 block diagram
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
94
UM10120
10.1 Features

UART1 is identical to UART0, with the addition of a modem interface. 16 byte Receive and Transmit FIFOs. Register locations conform to 550 industry standard. Receiver FIFO trigger points at 1, 4, 8, and 14 bytes. Built-in baud rate generator. Standard modem interface signals included (LPC2134/6/8 only). LPC2131/2/4/6/8 UART1 provides mechanism that enables implementation of either software or hardware flow control.
10.2 Pin description

Table 87: Pin RXD1 TXD1 CTS1[1] UART1 pin description Type Input Output Input Description Serial Input. Serial receive data. Serial Output. Serial transmit data. Clear To Send. Active low signal indicates if the external modem is ready to accept transmitted data via TXD1 from the UART1. In normal operation of the modem interface (U1MCR[4] = 0), the complement value of this signal is stored in U1MSR[4]. State change information is stored in U1MSR[0] and is a source for a priority level 4 interrupt, if enabled (U1IER[3] = 1). Data Carrier Detect. Active low signal indicates if the external modem has established a communication link with the UART1 and data may be exchanged. In normal operation of the modem interface (U1MCR[4]=0), the complement value of this signal is stored in U1MSR[7]. State change information is stored in U1MSR3 and is a source for a priority level 4 interrupt, if enabled (U1IER[3] = 1). Data Set Ready. Active low signal indicates if the external modem is ready to establish a ommunications link with the UART1. In normal operation of the modem interface (U1MCR[4] = 0), the complement value of this signal is stored in U1MSR[5]. State change information is stored in U1MSR[1] and is a source for a priority level 4 interrupt, if enabled (U1IER[3] = 1). Data Terminal Ready. Active low signal indicates that the UART1 is ready to establish connection with external modem. The complement value of this signal is stored in U1MCR[0]. Ring Indicator. Active low signal indicates that a telephone ringing signal has been detected by the modem. In normal operation of the modem interface (U1MCR[4] = 0), the complement value of this signal is stored in U1MSR[6]. State change information is stored in U1MSR[2] and is a source for a priority level 4 interrupt, if enabled (U1IER[3] = 1). Request To Send. Active low signal indicates that the UART1 would like to transmit data to the external modem. The complement value of this signal is stored in U1MCR[1].
LPC2134/6/8 only.
DCD1[1]
Input
DSR1[1]
Input
DTR1[1]
Output
RI1[1]
Input
RTS1[1]
Output
[1]
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
95
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 10: UART1

UART1 contains registers organized as shown in Table 76. The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) iscontained in U1LCR[7] and enables access to the Divisor Latches.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
96
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx x x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx xx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx x x xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx
User manual Rev. 01 24 June 2005
Table 88: Name
UART1 register map Description Bit functions and addresses MSB BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 LSB BIT0 RO WO R/W R/W Enable THRE Interrupt IIR1 RX FIFO Reset Enable R/W RX Data Available Interrupt IIR0 FIFO Enable RO WO NA NA 0x01 0x00 0x00 0xE001 0000 (DLAB=0) 0xE001 0000 (DLAB=0) 0xE001 0000 (DLAB=1) 0xE001 0004 (DLAB=1) 0xE001 0004 (DLAB=0) 8-bit Read Data 8-bit Write Data 8-bit Data 8-bit Data Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Enable Enable Modem RX Line Status Status interrupt[2] Interrupt IIR3 IIR2 TX FIFO Reset Number of Stop Bits Access Reset value[1] Address
Volume 1
U1RBR U1THR U1DLL U1DLM U1IER
Receiver Buffer Register Transmit Holding Register Divisor Latch LSB Divisor Latch MSB Interrupt Enable Register
U1IIR U1FCR U1LCR
Interrupt ID Register FIFO Control Register Line Control Register Modem Control Register Line Status Register Modem Status Register Scratch Pad Register Transmit Enable Register
[1] [2]
FIFOs Enabled RX Trigger DLAB Set Break
Reserved Reserved
0x01 0x00 0x00
0xE001 0008 0xE001 0008 0xE001 000C
Reserved Reserved Reserved Stick Parity Even Parity Select Loop Back BI CTS Parity Enable
Word Length Select R/W
U1MCR[2] U1LSR U1MSR[2] U1SCR U1TER
Reserved Reserved Reserved RX FIFO Error DCD TEMT RI THRE DSR
Reserved Reserved FE Delta DCD PE Trailing Edge RI
RTS OE Delta DSR
DTR DR Delta CTS
R/W RO RO R/W
0x00 0x60 0x00 0x00 0x80
0xE001 0010 0xE001 0014 0xE001 0018 0xE001 001C
8-bit Data TXEN
Chapter 10: UART1
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved R/W
0xE001 0030
UM10120
Reset value relects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content. Modem specific features are available in LPC2134/6/8 only.
97
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 10: UART1
10.3.1 UART1 Receiver Buffer Register (U1RBR - 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Read Only)
The U1RBR is the top byte of the UART1 RX FIFO. The top byte of the RX FIFO contains the oldest character received and can be read via the bus interface. The LSB (bit 0) represents the oldest received data bit. If the character received is less than 8 bits, the unused MSBs are padded with zeroes. The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) in U1LCR must be zero in order to access the U1RBR. The U1RBR is always Read Only. Since PE, FE and BI bits correspond to the byte sitting on the top of the RBR FIFO (i.e. the one that will be read in the next read from the RBR), the right approach for fetching the valid pair of received byte and its status bits is first to read the content of the U1LSR register, and then to read a byte from the U1RBR.
Table 89: Bit 7:0 UART1 Receiver Buffer Register (U1RBR - address 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Read Only) bit description Description The UART1 Receiver Buffer Register contains the oldest received byte in the UART1 RX FIFO. Reset value undefined
Symbol RBR
10.3.2 UART1 Transmitter Holding Register (U1THR - 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Write Only)
The U1THR is the top byte of the UART1 TX FIFO. The top byte is the newest character in the TX FIFO and can be written via the bus interface. The LSB represents the first bit to transmit. The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) in U1LCR must be zero in order to access the U1THR. The U1THR is always Write Only.
Table 90: Bit 7:0 UART1 Transmitter Holding Register (U1THR - address 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Write Only) bit description Description Reset value Writing to the UART1 Transmit Holding Register causes the data NA to be stored in the UART1 transmit FIFO. The byte will be sent when it reaches the bottom of the FIFO and the transmitter is available.
Symbol THR
10.3.3 UART1 Divisor Latch Registers 0 and 1 (U1DLL - 0xE001 0000 and U1DLM - 0xE001 0004, when DLAB = 1)
The UART1 Divisor Latch is part of the UART1 Baud Rate Generator and holds the value used to divide the VPB clock (PCLK) in order to produce the baud rate clock, which must be 16x the desired baud rate (Equation 2). The U1DLL and U1DLM registers together form a 16 bit divisor where U1DLL contains the lower 8 bits of the divisor and U1DLM contains the higher 8 bits of the divisor. A 0x0000 value is treated like a 0x0001 value as division by zero is not allowed.The Divisor Latch Access Bit (DLAB) in U1LCR must be one in order to access the UART1 Divisor Latches. Details on how to select the right value for U1DLL and U1DLM can be found later on in this chapter.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
98
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 10: UART1 (2)
pclk UART1 baudrate = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------16 ( 16 U1DLM + U1DLL )
Table 91: Bit 7:0
UART1 Divisor Latch LSB register (U1DLL - address 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 1) bit description Description The UART1 Divisor Latch LSB Register, along with the U1DLM register, determines the baud rate of the UART1. Reset value 0x01
Symbol DLLSB
Table 92: Bit 7:0
UART1 Divisor Latch MSB register (U1DLM - address 0xE001 0004, when DLAB = 1) bit description Description The UART1 Divisor Latch MSB Register, along with the U1DLL register, determines the baud rate of the UART1. Reset value 0x00
Symbol DLMSB
10.3.4 UART1 Baud-rate calculation

Example: Using UART1baudrate Equation 2 from above, it can be determined that system with PCLK = 20 MHz, U1DL = 130 (U1DLM = 0x00 and U1DLL = 0x82) will enable UART1 with UART1baudrate = 9615 baud.
Table 93: Some baud-rates available when using 20 MHz peripheral clock (PCLK = 20 MHz) % error[1] 0 0.0020 0.0032 0.0034 0.0040 0.0080 0.0160 0.0320 0.0640 0 0.0320 0.0640 Desired U1DLM:U1DLL baud-rate hex dec 4800 7200 9600 19200 38400 56000 57600 112000 115200 224000 448000 0x0104 0x00AE 0x0082 0x0041 0x0021 0x0021 0x0016 0x000B 0x000B 0x0006 0x0003 260 174 130 65 33 22 22 11 11 6 3 % error[1] 0.1603 0.2235 0.1603 0.1603 1.3573 1.4610 1.3573 1.4610 1.3573 6.9940 6.9940
Desired U1DLM:U1DLL baud-rate hex dec 50 75 110 134.5 150 300 600 1200 1800 2000 2400 3600
[1]
0x61A8 0x411B 0x2C64 0x244E 0x208D 0x1047 0x0823 0x0412 0x02B6 0x0271 0x0209 0x015B
25000 16667 11364 9294 8333 4167 2083 1042 694 625 521 347
Relative error calculated as: actual_baudrate/desired_baudrate-1. Actual baudrate based on Equation 2.
10.3.5 UART1 Interrupt Enable Register (U1IER - 0xE001 0004, when DLAB = 0)
The U1IER is used to enable the four UART1 interrupt sources.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
99
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 10: UART1
UART1 Interrupt Enable Register (U1IER - address 0xE001 0004, when DLAB = 0) bit description Value Description U1IER[0] enables the Receive Data Available interrupt for UART1. It also controls the Character Receive Time-out interrupt. 0 1 Disable the RDA interrupts. Enable the RDA interrupts. U1IER[1] enables the THRE interrupt for UART1. The status of this interrupt can be read from U1LSR[5]. 0 1 Disable the THRE interrupts. Enable the THRE interrupts. U1IER[2] enables the UART1 RX line status interrupts. The status of this interrupt can be read from U1LSR[4:1]. 0 1 Disable the RX line status interrupts. Enable the RX line status interrupts. U1IER[3] enables the modem interrupt. The status of this interrupt can be read from U1MSR[3:0]. 0 1 Disable the modem interrupt. Enable the modem interrupt. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA 0 0 0 Reset value 0
Table 94: Bit 0
Symbol RBR Interrupt Enable
THRE Interrupt Enable
RX Line Interrupt Enable
Modem Status Interrupt Enable[1] -
7:4
[1]
Available in LPC2134/6/8 only. In all other LPC213x parts this bit is Reserved.
10.3.6 UART1 Interrupt Identification Register (U1IIR - 0xE001 0008, Read Only)
The U1IIR provides a status code that denotes the priority and source of a pending interrupt. The interrupts are frozen during an U1IIR access. If an interrupt occurs during an U1IIR access, the interrupt is recorded for the next U1IIR access.
Table 95: Bit 0 UART1 Interrupt Identification Register (U1IIR - address 0xE001 0008, read only) bit description Value Description Note that U1IIR[0] is active low. The pending interrupt can be determined by evaluating U1IIR[3:1]. 0 1 At least one interrupt is pending. No interrupt is pending. Reset value 1
Symbol Interrupt Pending
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
100
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 10: UART1
UART1 Interrupt Identification Register (U1IIR - address 0xE001 0008, read only) bit description Value Description U1IER[3:1] identifies an interrupt corresponding to the UART1 Rx FIFO. All other combinations of U1IER[3:1] not listed above are reserved (100,101,111). 011 010 110 001 000 1 - Receive Line Status (RLS). 2a - Receive Data Available (RDA). 2b - Character Time-out Indicator (CTI). 3 - THRE Interrupt. 4 - Modem Interrupt.[1] Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. These bits are equivalent to U1FCR[0]. NA Reset value 0
Table 95: Bit 3:1
Symbol Interrupt Identification
5:4
7:6
[1]
FIFO Enable
LPC2134/6/8 only. For all other LPC213x devices 000 combination is Reserved.
Interrupts are handled as described in Table 83. Given the status of U1IIR[3:0], an interrupt handler routine can determine the cause of the interrupt and how to clear the active interrupt. The U1IIR must be read in order to clear the interrupt prior to exiting the Interrupt Service Routine. The UART1 RLS interrupt (U1IIR[3:1] = 011) is the highest priority interrupt and is set whenever any one of four error conditions occur on the UART1RX input: overrun error (OE), parity error (PE), framing error (FE) and break interrupt (BI). The UART1 Rx error condition that set the interrupt can be observed via U1LSR[4:1]. The interrupt is cleared upon an U1LSR read. The UART1 RDA interrupt (U1IIR[3:1] = 010) shares the second level priority with the CTI interrupt (U1IIR[3:1] = 110). The RDA is activated when the UART1 Rx FIFO reaches the trigger level defined in U1FCR7:6 and is reset when the UART1 Rx FIFO depth falls below the trigger level. When the RDA interrupt goes active, the CPU can read a block of data defined by the trigger level. The CTI interrupt (U1IIR[3:1] = 110) is a second level interrupt and is set when the UART1 Rx FIFO contains at least one character and no UART1 Rx FIFO activity has occurred in 3.5 to 4.5 character times. Any UART1 Rx FIFO activity (read or write of UART1 RSR) will clear the interrupt. This interrupt is intended to flush the UART1 RBR after a message has been received that is not a multiple of the trigger level size. For example, if a peripheral wished to send a 105 character message and the trigger level was 10 characters, the CPU would receive 10 RDA interrupts resulting in the transfer of 100 characters and 1 to 5 CTI interrupts (depending on the service routine) resulting in the transfer of the remaining 5 characters.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
101
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 10: UART1
Table 96:
UART1 interrupt handling Interrupt Type None RX Data Available Interrupt Source None Interrupt Reset U1LSR Read[3]
U1IIR[3:0] Priority value[1] 0001 0110 0100 Highest Second
RX Line Status / Error OE[3] or PE[3] or FE[3] or BI[3]
Rx data available or trigger level reached in FIFO U1RBR Read[4] or (U1FCR0=1) UART1 FIFO drops below trigger level Minimum of one character in the RX FIFO and no U1RBR Read[4] character input or removed during a time period depending on how many characters are in FIFO and what the trigger level is set at (3.5 to 4.5 character times). The exact time will be: [(word length) 7 2] 8 + [(trigger level number of characters) 8 + 1] RCLKs
1100
Second
Character Time-out indication
0010 0000[2]
Third Fourth
THRE Modem Status

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
THRE[3] CTS or DSR or RI or DCD
U1IIR Read[5] (if source of interrupt) or THR write MSR Read
Values "0000" (see Table note 2), 0011, 0101, 0111, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011,1101,1110,1111 are reserved. LPC2134/6/8 only. For details see Section 10.3.10 UART1 Line Status Register (U1LSR - 0xE001 0014, Read Only) For details see Section 10.3.1 UART1 Receiver Buffer Register (U1RBR - 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Read Only) For details see Section 10.3.6 UART1 Interrupt Identification Register (U1IIR - 0xE001 0008, Read Only) and Section 10.3.2 UART1 Transmitter Holding Register (U1THR - 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Write Only)
The UART1 THRE interrupt (U1IIR[3:1] = 001) is a third level interrupt and is activated when the UART1 THR FIFO is empty provided certain initialization conditions have been met. These initialization conditions are intended to give the UART1 THR FIFO a chance to fill up with data to eliminate many THRE interrupts from occurring at system start-up. The initialization conditions implement a one character delay minus the stop bit whenever THRE = 1 and there have not been at least two characters in the U1THR at one time since the last THRE = 1 event. This delay is provided to give the CPU time to write data to U1THR without a THRE interrupt to decode and service. A THRE interrupt is set immediately if the UART1 THR FIFO has held two or more characters at one time and currently, the U1THR is empty. The THRE interrupt is reset when a U1THR write occurs or a read of the U1IIR occurs and the THRE is the highest interrupt (U1IIR[3:1] = 001). The modem interrupt (U1IIR[3:1] = 000) is available in LPC2134/6/8 only. It is the lowest priority interrupt and is activated whenever there is any state change on modem inputs pins, DCD, DSR or CTS. In addition, a low to high transition on modem input RI will generate a modem interrupt. The source of the modem interrupt can be determined by examining U1MSR[3:0]. A U1MSR read will clear the modem interrupt.
10.3.7 UART1 FIFO Control Register (U1FCR - 0xE001 0008)

The U1FCR controls the operation of the UART1 RX and TX FIFOs.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
102
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 10: UART1
Table 97: Bit 0
UART1 FIFO Control Register ( U1FCR - address 0xE001 0008) bit description Value 0 1 Description UART1 FIFOs are disabled. Must not be used in the application. Active high enable for both UART1 Rx and TX FIFOs and U1FCR[7:1] access. This bit must be set for proper UART1 operation. Any transition on this bit will automatically clear the UART1 FIFOs. No impact on either of UART1 FIFOs. Writing a logic 1 to U1FCR[1] will clear all bytes in UART1 Rx FIFO and reset the pointer logic. This bit is self-clearing. No impact on either of UART1 FIFOs. Writing a logic 1 to U1FCR[2] will clear all bytes in UART1 TX FIFO and reset the pointer logic. This bit is self-clearing. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. These two bits determine how many receiver UART1 FIFO characters must be written before an interrupt is activated. 00 01 10 11 trigger level 0 (1 character or 0x01). trigger level 1 (4 characters or 0x04). trigger level 2 (8 characters or 0x08). trigger level 3 (14 characters or 0x0E). NA 0 0 0 Reset value 0
Symbol FIFO Enable
RX FIFO Reset
0 1
TX FIFO Reset
0 1
5:3 7:6
RX Trigger Level
10.3.8 UART1 Line Control Register (U1LCR - 0xE001 000C)

The U1LCR determines the format of the data character that is to be transmitted or received.
Table 98: Bit 1:0 UART1 Line Control Register (U1LCR - address 0xE001 000C) bit description Value 00 01 10 11 2 3 5:4 Stop Bit Select Parity Enable Parity Select 0 1 0 1 00 01 10 11 Description 5 bit character length. 6 bit character length. 7 bit character length. 8 bit character length. 1 stop bit. 2 stop bits (1.5 if U1LCR[1:0]=00). Disable parity generation and checking. Enable parity generation and checking. Odd parity. Number of 1s in the transmitted character and the attached parity bit will be odd. Even Parity. Number of 1s in the transmitted character and the attached parity bit will be even. Forced "1" stick parity. Forced "0" stick parity. 0 0 0 Reset value 0
Symbol Word Length Select
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
103
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 10: UART1
Table 98: Bit 6
UART1 Line Control Register (U1LCR - address 0xE001 000C) bit description Value 0 1 Description Disable break transmission. Enable break transmission. Output pin UART1 TXD is forced to logic 0 when U1LCR[6] is active high. Disable access to Divisor Latches. Enable access to Divisor Latches. 0 Reset value 0
Symbol Break Control
Divisor Latch 0 Access Bit (DLAB) 1
10.3.9 UART1 Modem Control Register (U1MCR - 0xE001 0010), LPC2134/6/8 only
The U1MCR enables the modem loopback mode and controls the modem output signals.
Table 99: Bit 0 1 3:2 4 UART1 Modem Control Register (U1MCR - address 0xE001 0010), LPC2134/6/8 only bit description Value Description Source for modem output pin, DTR. This bit reads as 0 when modem loopback mode is active. Source for modem output pin RTS. This bit reads as 0 when modem loopback mode is active. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value 0 0 NA
Symbol DTR Control RTS Control Loopback Mode Select
The modem loopback mode provides a mechanism to perform 0 diagnostic loopback testing. Serial data from the transmitter is connected internally to serial input of the receiver. Input pin, RXD1, has no effect on loopback and output pin, TXD1 is held in marking state. The four modem inputs (CTS, DSR, RI and DCD) are disconnected externally. Externally, the modem outputs (RTS, DTR) are set inactive. Internally, the four modem outputs are connected to the four modem inputs. As a result of these connections, the upper four bits of the U1MSR will be driven by the lower four bits of the U1MCR rather than the four modem inputs in normal mode. This permits modem status interrupts to be generated in loopback mode by writing the lower four bits of U1MCR. 0 1 Disable modem loopback mode. Enable modem loopback mode. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA
7:5
10.3.10 UART1 Line Status Register (U1LSR - 0xE001 0014, Read Only)
The U1LSR is a read-only register that provides status information on the UART1 TX and RX blocks.
Table 100: UART1 Line Status Register (U1LSR - address 0xE001 0014, read only) bit description Bit Symbol 0 Receiver Data Ready (RDR) Value Description U1LSR[0] is set when the U1RBR holds an unread character and is cleared when the UART1 RBR FIFO is empty. 0 1 U1RBR is empty. U1RBR contains valid data.
Reset value 0
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
104
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 10: UART1
Table 100: UART1 Line Status Register (U1LSR - address 0xE001 0014, read only) bit description Bit Symbol 1 Overrun Error (OE) Value Description Reset value
The overrun error condition is set as soon as it occurs. An U1LSR read clears 0 U1LSR[1]. U1LSR[1] is set when UART1 RSR has a new character assembled and the UART1 RBR FIFO is full. In this case, the UART1 RBR FIFO will not be overwritten and the character in the UART1 RSR will be lost. 0 1 Overrun error status is inactive. Overrun error status is active. When the parity bit of a received character is in the wrong state, a parity error occurs. An U1LSR read clears U1LSR[2]. Time of parity error detection is dependent on U1FCR[0]. Note: A parity error is associated with the character at the top of the UART1 RBR FIFO. 0 1 Parity error status is inactive. Parity error status is active. When the stop bit of a received character is a logic 0, a framing error occurs. An 0 U1LSR read clears U1LSR[3]. The time of the framing error detection is dependent on U1FCR0. Upon detection of a framing error, the RX will attempt to resynchronize to the data and assume that the bad stop bit is actually an early start bit. However, it cannot be assumed that the next received byte will be correct even if there is no Framing Error. Note: A framing error is associated with the character at the top of the UART1 RBR FIFO. 0 1 Framing error status is inactive. Framing error status is active. When RXD1 is held in the spacing state (all 0s) for one full character transmission 0 (start, data, parity, stop), a break interrupt occurs. Once the break condition has been detected, the receiver goes idle until RXD1 goes to marking state (all 1s). An U1LSR read clears this status bit. The time of break detection is dependent on U1FCR[0]. Note: The break interrupt is associated with the character at the top of the UART1 RBR FIFO. 0 1 Break interrupt status is inactive. Break interrupt status is active. THRE is set immediately upon detection of an empty UART1 THR and is cleared on 1 a U1THR write. 0 1 U1THR contains valid data. U1THR is empty. TEMT is set when both U1THR and U1TSR are empty; TEMT is cleared when either the U1TSR or the U1THR contain valid data. 0 1 U1THR and/or the U1TSR contains valid data. U1THR and the U1TSR are empty. U1LSR[7] is set when a character with a RX error such as framing error, parity error 0 or break interrupt, is loaded into the U1RBR. This bit is cleared when the U1LSR register is read and there are no subsequent errors in the UART1 FIFO. 0 1 U1RBR contains no UART1 RX errors or U1FCR[0]=0. UART1 RBR contains at least one UART1 RX error. 1 0
Parity Error (PE)
Framing Error (FE)
Break Interrupt (BI)
Transmitter Holding Register Empty (THRE) Transmitter Empty (TEMT)
Error in RX FIFO (RXFE)
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
105
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 10: UART1
10.3.11 UART1 Modem Status Register (U1MSR - 0xE001 0018), LPC2134/6/8 only
The U1MSR is a read-only register that provides status information on the modem input signals. U1MSR[3:0] is cleared on U1MSR read. Note that modem signals have no direct affect on UART1 operation, they facilitate software implementation of modem signal operations.
Table 101: UART1 Modem Status Register (U1MSR - address 0xE001 0018), LPC2134/6/8 only bit description Bit Symbol 0 Delta CTS 0 1 1 Delta DSR 0 1 2 Trailing Edge RI 0 1 3 Delta DCD 0 1 4 5 6 7 CTS DSR RI DCD Value Description Set upon state change of input CTS. Cleared on an U1MSR read. No change detected on modem input, CTS. State change detected on modem input, CTS. Set upon state change of input DSR. Cleared on an U1MSR read. No change detected on modem input, DSR. State change detected on modem input, DSR. Set upon low to high transition of input RI. Cleared on an U1MSR read. No change detected on modem input, RI. Low-to-high transition detected on RI. Set upon state change of input DCD. Cleared on an U1MSR read. No change detected on modem input, DCD. State change detected on modem input, DCD. Clear To Send State. Complement of input signal CTS. This bit is connected to U1MCR[1] in modem loopback mode. 0 0 0 0 Reset value 0
Data Set Ready State. Complement of input signal DSR. This bit is connected 0 to U1MCR[0] in modem loopback mode. Ring Indicator State. Complement of input RI. This bit is connected to U1MCR[2] in modem loopback mode. 0
Data Carrier Detect State. Complement of input DCD. This bit is connected to 0 U1MCR[3] in modem loopback mode.
10.3.12 UART1 Scratch pad register (U1SCR - 0xE001 001C)

The U1SCR has no effect on the UART1 operation. This register can be written and/or read at users discretion. There is no provision in the interrupt interface that would indicate to the host that a read or write of the U1SCR has occurred.
Table 102: UART1 Scratch pad register (U1SCR - address 0xE001 0014) bit description Bit 7:0 Symbol Pad Description A readable, writable byte. Reset value 0x00
10.3.13 UART1 Transmit Enable Register (U1TER - 0xE001 0030)

LPC2131/2/4/6/8s U1TER enables implementation of software and hardware flow control. When TXEn=1, UART1 transmitter will keep sending data as long as they are available. As soon as TXEn becomes 0, UART1 transmittion will stop. Table 103 describes how to use TXEn bit in order to achieve software flow control.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
106
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 10: UART1
Table 103: UART1 Transmit Enable Register (U1TER - address 0xE001 0030) bit description Bit 6:0 7 Symbol TXEN Description Reset value Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. NA The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. When this bit is 1, as it is after a Reset, data written to the THR 1 is output on the TXD pin as soon as any preceding data has been sent. If this bit cleared to 0 while a character is being sent, the transmission of that character is completed, but no further characters are sent until this bit is set again. In other words, a 0 in this bit blocks the transfer of characters from the THR or TX FIFO into the transmit shift register. Software can clear this bit when it detects that the a hardware-handshaking TX-permit signal (LPC2134/6/8: CTS - otherwise any GPIO/external interrupt line) has gone false, or with software handshaking, when it receives an XOFF character (DC3). Software can set this bit again when it detects that the TX-permit signal has gone true, or when it receives an XON (DC1) character.
10.4 Architecture
The architecture of the UART1 is shown below in the block diagram. The VPB interface provides a communications link between the CPU or host and the UART1. The UART1 receiver block, U1RX, monitors the serial input line, RXD1, for valid input. The UART1 RX Shift Register (U1RSR) accepts valid characters via RXD1. After a valid character is assembled in the U1RSR, it is passed to the UART1 RX Buffer Register FIFO to await access by the CPU or host via the generic host interface. The UART1 transmitter block, U1TX, accepts data written by the CPU or host and buffers the data in the UART1 TX Holding Register FIFO (U1THR). The UART1 TX Shift Register (U1TSR) reads the data stored in the U1THR and assembles the data to transmit via the serial output pin, TXD1. The UART1 Baud Rate Generator block, U1BRG, generates the timing enables used by the UART1 TX block. The U1BRG clock input source is the VPB clock (PCLK). The main clock is divided down per the divisor specified in the U1DLL and U1DLM registers. This divided down clock is a 16x oversample clock, NBAUDOUT. The modem interface contains registers U1MCR and U1MSR. This interface is responsible for handshaking between a modem peripheral and the UART1. The interrupt interface contains registers U1IER and U1IIR. The interrupt interface receives several one clock wide enables from the U1TX and U1RX blocks. Status information from the U1TX and U1RX is stored in the U1LSR. Control information for the U1TX and U1RX is stored in the U1LCR.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
107
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 10: UART1
MODEM
U1TX
NTXRDY U1TSR TXD1
CTS DSR RI DCD DTR RTS U1MCR U1MSR
U1THR
U1BRG
U1DLL
NBAUDOUT
U1DLM
RCLK
U1RX INTERRUPT U1RBR U1INTR U1IER U1RSR
NRXRDY RXD1
U1IIR
U1FCR
U1LSR U1SCR U1LCR
PA[2:0] PSEL PSTB PWRITE PD[7:0] AR MR PCLK VPB INTERFACE DDIS
Fig 19. LPC2131/2/4/6/8 UART1 block diagram
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
108
UM10120
Chapter 11: I2C interfaces I2C0 and I2C1
11.1 Features
Standard I2C compliant bus interfaces that may be configured as Master, Slave, or
Master/Slave.
Arbitration between simultaneously transmitting masters without corruption of serial

data on the bus.
Programmable clock to allow adjustment of I2C transfer rates. Bidirectional data transfer between masters and slaves. Serial clock synchronization allows devices with different bit rates to communicate via
one serial bus.
Serial clock synchronization can be used as a handshake mechanism to suspend and

resume serial transfer.
The I2C-bus may be used for test and diagnostic purposes.
11.2 Applications
Interfaces to external I2C standard parts, such as serial RAMs, LCDs, tone generators, etc.
11.3 Description
A typical I2C-bus configuration is shown in Figure 20. Depending on the state of the direction bit (R/W), two types of data transfers are possible on the I2C-bus:
Data transfer from a master transmitter to a slave receiver. The first byte transmitted
by the master is the slave address. Next follows a number of data bytes. The slave returns an acknowledge bit after each received byte.
Data transfer from a slave transmitter to a master receiver. The first byte (the slave
address) is transmitted by the master. The slave then returns an acknowledge bit. Next follows the data bytes transmitted by the slave to the master. The master returns an acknowledge bit after all received bytes other than the last byte. At the end of the last received byte, a not acknowledge is returned. The master device generates all of the serial clock pulses and the START and STOP conditions. A transfer is ended with a STOP condition or with a repeated START condition. Since a repeated START condition is also the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C-bus will not be released. The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 I2C interfaces are byte oriented, and have four operating modes: master transmitter mode, master receiver mode, slave transmitter mode and slave receiver mode. The I2C interfaces complie with entire I2C specification, supporting the ability to turn power off to the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 without causing a problem with other devices on the same I2C-bus (see "The I2C-bus specification" description under the heading "Fast-Mode", and notes for the table titled "Characteristics of the SDA and SCL I/O stages
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
109
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 11: I2C interfaces
for F/S-mode I2C-bus devices" in the microcontrollers datasheet). This is sometimes a useful capability, but intrinsically limits alternate uses for the same pins if the I2C interface is not used. Seldom is this capability needed on multiple I2C interfaces within the same microcontroller.
Pull-up resisor
Pull-up resisor SDA
I2 C BUS SCL
SDA
SCL
LPC2131/2/4/6/8
OTHER DEVICE WITH I 2C INTERFACE
OTHER DEVICE WITH I 2 C INTERFACE
Fig 20. I2C-bus Configuration

Table 104: I2C Pin Description Pin SDA0,1 SCL0,1 Type Input/Output Input/Output Description I2C Serial Data. I2C Serial Clock.
11.5 I2C operating modes

In a given application, the I2C block may operate as a master, a slave, or both. In the slave mode, the I2C hardware looks for its own slave address and the general call address. If one of these addresses is detected, an interrupt is requested. If the processor wishes to become the bus master, the hardware waits until the bus is free before the master mode is entered so that a possible slave operation is not interrupted. If bus arbitration is lost in the master mode, the I2C block switches to the slave mode immediately and can detect its own slave address in the same serial transfer.
11.5.1 Master Transmitter mode

In this mode data is transmitted from master to slave. Before the master transmitter mode can be entered, the I2CONSET register must be initialized as shown in Table 105. I2EN must be set to 1 to enable the I2C function. If the AA bit is 0, the I2C interface will not
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
110
Volume 1
UM10120
acknowledge any address when another device is master of the bus, so it can not enter slave mode. The STA, STO and SI bits must be 0. The SI Bit is cleared by writing 1 to the SIC bit in the I2CONCLR register.
Table 105: I2C0CONSET and I2C1CONSET used to configure Master mode Bit Symbol Value 7 6 I2EN 1 5 STA 0 4 STO 0 3 SI 0 2 AA 0 1 0 -
The first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the receiving device (7 bits) and the data direction bit. In this mode the data direction bit (R/W) should be 0 which means Write. The first byte transmitted contains the slave address and Write bit. Data is transmitted 8 bits at a time. After each byte is transmitted, an acknowledge bit is received. START and STOP conditions are output to indicate the beginning and the end of a serial transfer. The I2C interface will enter master transmitter mode when software sets the STA bit. The I2C logic will send the START condition as soon as the bus is free. After the START condition is transmitted, the SI bit is set, and the status code in the I2STAT register is 0x08. This status code is used to vector to a state service routine which will load the slave address and Write bit to the I2DAT register, and then clear the SI bit. SI is cleared by writing a 1 to the SIC bit in the I2CONCLR register. When the slave address and R/W bit have been transmitted and an acknowledgment bit has been received, the SI bit is set again, and the possible status codes now are 0x18, 0x20, or 0x38 for the master mode, or 0x68, 0x78, or 0xB0 if the slave mode was enabled (by setting AA to 1). The appropriate actions to be taken for each of these status codes are shown in Table 120 to Table 123.
SLAVE ADDRESS
RW 0 - Write 1 - Read
DATA
DATA
A/A
Data Transferred (n Bytes + Acknowledge) A = Acknowledge (SDA low) A = Not acknowledge (SDA high) S = START Condition P = STOP Condition
From Master to Slave From Slave to Master
Fig 21. Format in the Master Transmitter mode
11.5.2 Master Receiver mode

In the master receiver mode, data is received from a slave transmitter. The transfer is initiated in the same way as in the master transmitter mode. When the START condition has been transmitted, the interrupt service routine must load the slave address and the data direction bit to the I2C Data register (I2DAT), and then clear the SI bit. In this case, the data direction bit (R/W) should be 1 to indicate a read.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
111
Volume 1
UM10120
When the slave address and data direction bit have been transmitted and an acknowledge bit has been received, the SI bit is set, and the Status Register will show the status code. For master mode, the possible status codes are 0x40, 0x48, or 0x38. For slave mode, the possible status codes are 0x68, 0x78, or 0xB0. For details, refer to Table 121.
SLAVE ADDRESS
R 0 - Write 1 - Read
DATA
DATA
Fig 22. Format of Master Receive mode
After a repeated START condition, I2C may switch to the master transmitter mode.
SLA
DATA
DATA
RS
SLA
DATA
Data Transferred (n Bytes + Acknowledge) From Master to Slave From Slave to Master A = Acknowledge (SDA low) A = Not acknowledge (SDA high) S = START Condition P = STOP Condition SLA = Slave Address
Fig 23. A Master Receiver switches to Master Transmitter after sending Repeated START
11.5.3 Slave Receiver mode

In the slave receiver mode, data bytes are received from a master transmitter. To initialize the slave receiver mode, user write the Slave Address register (I2ADR) and write the I2C Control Set register (I2CONSET) as shown in Table 106.
Table 106: I2C0CONSET and I2C1CONSET used to configure Slave mode Bit Symbol Value 7 6 I2EN 1 5 STA 0 4 STO 0 3 SI 0 2 AA 1 1 0 -
I2EN must be set to 1 to enable the I2C function. AA bit must be set to 1 to acknowledge its own slave address or the general call address. The STA, STO and SI bits are set to 0.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
112
Volume 1
UM10120
After I2ADR and I2CONSET are initialized, the I2C interface waits until it is addressed by its own address or general address followed by the data direction bit. If the direction bit is 0 (W), it enters slave receiver mode. If the direction bit is 1 (R), it enters slave transmitter mode. After the address and direction bit have been received, the SI bit is set and a valid status code can be read from the Status register (I2STAT). Refer to Table 122 for the status codes and actions.
SLAVE ADDRESS
W 0 - Write 1 - Read
DATA
DATA
A/A
P/RS
Data Transferred (n Bytes + Acknowledge) A = Acknowledge (SDA low) A = Not acknowledge (SDA high) S = START Condition P = STOP Condition RS = Repeated START condition
Fig 24. Format of Slave Receiver mode
11.5.4 Slave Transmitter mode

The first byte is received and handled as in the slave receiver mode. However, in this mode, the direction bit will be 1, indicating a read operation. Serial data is transmitted via SDA while the serial clock is input through SCL. START and STOP conditions are recognized as the beginning and end of a serial transfer. In a given application, I2C may operate as a master and as a slave. In the slave mode, the I2C hardware looks for its own slave address and the general call address. If one of these addresses is detected, an interrupt is requested. When the microcontrollers wishes to become the bus master, the hardware waits until the bus is free before the master mode is entered so that a possible slave action is not interrupted. If bus arbitration is lost in the master mode, the I2C interface switches to the slave mode immediately and can detect its own slave address in the same serial transfer.
SLAVE ADDRESS
R 0 - Write 1 - Read
DATA
DATA
Fig 25. Format of Slave Transmitter mode
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
113
Volume 1
UM10120
11.6 I2C Implementation and operation

Figure 26 shows how the on-chip I2C-bus interface is implemented, and the following text describes the individual blocks.
11.6.1 Input filters and output stages

Input signals are synchronized with the internal clock , and spikes shorter than three clocks are filtered out. The output for I2C is a special pad designed to conform to the I2C specification.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
114
Volume 1
UM10120
ADDRESS REGISTER
I2ADR
INPUT FILTER SDA OUTPUT STAGE
COMPARATOR
SHIFT REGISTER 8
ACK I2DAT
INPUT FILTER SCL OUTPUT STAGE
BIT COUNTER/ ARBITRATION & SYNC LOGIC TIMING & CONTROL LOGIC SERIAL CLOCK GENERATOR
PCLK
Interrupt
I2CONSET I2CONCLR I2SCLH I2SCLL
CONTROL REGISTER & SCL DUTY CYCLE REGISTERS
16
Staus bus
STATUS DECODER I2STAT
STATUS REGISTER 8
Fig 26. I2C serial interface block diagram
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
APB BUS
115
Volume 1
UM10120
11.6.2 Address Register, I2ADDR

This register may be loaded with the 7-bit slave address (7 most significant bits) to which the I2C block will respond when programmed as a slave transmitter or receiver. The LSB (GC) is used to enable general call address (0x00) recognition.
11.6.3 Comparator
The comparator compares the received 7-bit slave address with its own slave address (7 most significant bits in I2ADR). It also compares the first received 8-bit byte with the general call address (0x00). If an equality is found, the appropriate status bits are set and an interrupt is requested.
11.6.4 Shift register, I2DAT

This 8-bit register contains a byte of serial data to be transmitted or a byte which has just been received. Data in I2DAT is always shifted from right to left; the first bit to be transmitted is the MSB (bit 7) and, after a byte has been received, the first bit of received data is located at the MSB of I2DAT. While data is being shifted out, data on the bus is simultaneously being shifted in; I2DAT always contains the last byte present on the bus. Thus, in the event of lost arbitration, the transition from master transmitter to slave receiver is made with the correct data in I2DAT.
11.6.5 Arbitration and synchronization logic

In the master transmitter mode, the arbitration logic checks that every transmitted logic 1 actually appears as a logic 1 on the I2C-bus. If another device on the bus overrules a logic 1 and pulls the SDA line low, arbitration is lost, and the I2C block immediately changes from master transmitter to slave receiver. The I2C block will continue to output clock pulses (on SCL) until transmission of the current serial byte is complete. Arbitration may also be lost in the master receiver mode. Loss of arbitration in this mode can only occur while the I2C block is returning a not acknowledge: (logic 1) to the bus. Arbitration is lost when another device on the bus pulls this signal LOW. Since this can occur only at the end of a serial byte, the I2C block generates no further clock pulses. Figure 27 shows the arbitration procedure.
(1) SDA Line
(1)
(2)
(3)
SCL Line
9 ACK
1. Another device transmits identical serial data. 2C 2. Another device overrules a logic (dotted line) transmitted this I master, by pulling the SDA line low. Arbitration is lost and this 2 I C enters Slave Receiver mode. 3. This I2 C is in Slave Receiver mode, but still generates clock pulses until the current byte has been transmitted. This 2 I C will not generate clock pulses for the next byte. Data on SDA originates from the new master once it has won arbitration.
Fig 27. Arbitration procedure
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
116
Volume 1
UM10120
The synchronization logic will synchronize the serial clock generator with the clock pulses on the SCL line from another device. If two or more master devices generate clock pulses, the mark duration is determined by the device that generates the shortest marks, and the space duration is determined by the device that generates the longest spaces. Figure 28 shows the synchronization procedure.
SDA Line
(1)
(3)
(1)
SCL Line
(2) High period Low period
2 1. Another device pulls the SCL line low before this C I has timed a complete high time. The other device effectively determines the (shorter) high period. 2 C 2. Another device continues to pull the SCL line low after this I has timed a complete low time and released SCL. The I2C clock generator is forced to wait until SCL goes high. The other device effectively determines the (longer) low period. 3. The SCL line is released and the clock generator begins timing the high time.
Fig 28. Serial clock synchronization
A slave may stretch the space duration to slow down the bus master. The space duration may also be stretched for handshaking purposes. This can be done after each bit or after a complete byte transfer. the I2C block will stretch the SCL space duration after a byte has been transmitted or received and the acknowledge bit has been transferred. The serial interrupt flag (SI) is set, and the stretching continues until the serial interrupt flag is cleared.
11.6.6 Serial clock generator

This programmable clock pulse generator provides the SCL clock pulses when the I2C block is in the master transmitter or master receiver mode. It is switched off when the I2C block is in a slave mode. The I2C output clock frequency and duty cycle is programmable via the I2C Clock Control Registers. See the description of the I2CSCLL and I2CSCLH registers for details. The output clock pulses have a duty cycle as programmed unless the bus is synchronizing with other SCL clock sources as described above.
11.6.7 Timing and control

The timing and control logic generates the timing and control signals for serial byte handling. This logic block provides the shift pulses for I2DAT, enables the comparator, generates and detects start and stop conditions, receives and transmits acknowledge bits, controls the master and slave modes, contains interrupt request logic, and monitors the I2C-bus status.
11.6.8 Control register, I2CONSET and I2CONCLR

The I2C control register contains bits used to control the following I2C block functions: start and restart of a serial transfer, termination of a serial transfer, bit rate, address recognition, and acknowledgment.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
117
Volume 1
UM10120
The contents of the I2C control register may be read as I2CONSET. Writing to I2CONSET will set bits in the I2C control register that correspond to ones in the value written. Conversely, writing to I2CONCLR will clear bits in the I2C control register that correspond to ones in the value written.
11.6.9 Status decoder and Status register

The status decoder takes all of the internal status bits and compresses them into a 5-bit code. This code is unique for each I2C-bus status. The 5-bit code may be used to generate vector addresses for fast processing of the various service routines. Each service routine processes a particular bus status. There are 26 possible bus states if all four modes of the I2C block are used. The 5-bit status code is latched into the five most significant bits of the status register when the serial interrupt flag is set (by hardware) and remains stable until the interrupt flag is cleared by software. The three least significant bits of the status register are always zero. If the status code is used as a vector to service routines, then the routines are displaced by eight address locations. Eight bytes of code is sufficient for most of the service routines (see the software example in this section).

Each I2C interface contains 7 registers as shown in Table 107 below.
Table 107: I2C register map Name Description Access Reset I2C0 Address I2C1 Address [1] value and Name and Name R/W 0x00 0xE001 C000 0xE005 C000 I2C0CONSET I2C1CONSET
I2CONSET I2C Control Set Register. When a one is written to a bit of this register, the corresponding bit in the I2C control register is set. Writing a zero has no effect on the corresponding bit in the I2C control register. I2STAT I2C Status Register. During I2C operation, this register provides detailed status codes that allow software to determine the next action needed.
RO
0xF8
0xE001 C004 I2C0STAT 0xE001 C008 I2C0DAT
0xE005 C004 I2C1STAT 0xE005 C008 I2C1DAT
I2DAT
I2C Data Register. During master or slave transmit mode, R/W data to be transmitted is written to this register. During master or slave receive mode, data that has been received may be read from this register. I2C Slave Address Register. Contains the 7-bit slave address for operation of the I2C interface in slave mode, and is not used in master mode. The least significant bit determines whether a slave responds to the general call address. SCH Duty Cycle Register High Half Word. Determines the high time of the I2C clock. SCL Duty Cycle Register Low Half Word. Determines the low time of the I2C clock. I2nSCLL and I2nSCLH together determine the clock frequency generated by an I2C master and certain times used in slave mode. R/W
0x00
I2ADR
0x00
0xE001 C00C I2C0ADR
0xE005 C00C I2C1ADR
I2SCLH I2SCLL
R/W R/W
0x04 0x04
0xE001 C010 I2C0SCLH 0xE001 C014 I2C0SCLL
0xE005 C010 I2C1SCLH 0xE005 C014 I2C1SCLL
I2CONCLR I2C Control Clear Register. When a one is written to a WO bit of this register, the corresponding bit in the I2C control register is cleared. Writing a zero has no effect on the corresponding bit in the I2C control register.
[1]
NA
0xE001 C018 0xE005 C018 I2C0CONCLR I2C1CONCLR
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
118
Volume 1
UM10120
11.7.1 I2C Control Set register (I2CONSET: I2C0, I2C0CONSET - 0xE001 C000 and I2C1, I2C1CONSET - 0xE005 C000)
The I2CONSET registers control setting of bits in the I2CON register that controls operation of the I2C interface. Writing a one to a bit of this register causes the corresponding bit in the I2C control register to be set. Writing a zero has no effect.
Table 108: I2C Control Set register (I2CONSET: I2C0, I2C0CONSET - address 0xE001 C000 and I2C1, I2C1CONSET - address 0xE005 C000) bit description Bit Symbol 1:0 2 3 4 5 6 7 AA SI STO STA I2EN Description Reset value
Reserved. User software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Assert acknowledge flag. See the text below. I2C interrupt flag. STOP flag. See the text below. START flag. See the text below. I2C interface enable. See the text below. 0 0 0 0
Reserved. User software should not write ones to reserved bits. The NA value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
I2EN I2C Interface Enable. When I2EN is 1, the I2C interface is enabled. I2EN can be cleared by writing 1 to the I2ENC bit in the I2CONCLR register. When I2EN is 0, the I2C interface is disabled. When I2EN is 0, the SDA and SCL input signals are ignored, the I2C block is in the not addressed slave state, and the STO bit is forced to 0. I2EN should not be used to temporarily release the I2C-bus since, when I2EN is reset, the I2C-bus status is lost. The AA flag should be used instead. STA is the START flag. Setting this bit causes the I2C interface to enter master mode and transmit a START condition or transmit a repeated START condition if it is already in master mode. When STA is 1 and the I2C interface is not already in master mode, it enters master mode, checks the bus and generates a START condition if the bus is free. If the bus is not free, it waits for a STOP condition (which will free the bus) and generates a START condition after a delay of a half clock period of the internal clock generator. If the I2C interface is already in master mode and data has been transmitted or received, it transmits a repeated START condition. STA may be set at any time, including when the I2C interface is in an addressed slave mode. STA can be cleared by writing 1 to the STAC bit in the I2CONCLR register. When STA is 0, no START condition or repeated START condition will be generated. If STA and STO are both set, then a STOP condition is transmitted on the I2C-bus if it the interface is in master mode, and transmits a START condition thereafter. If the I2C interface is in slave mode, an internal STOP condition is generated, but is not transmitted on the bus.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
119
Volume 1
UM10120
STO is the STOP flag. Setting this bit causes the I2C interface to transmit a STOP condition in master mode, or recover from an error condition in slave mode. When STO is 1 in master mode, a STOP condition is transmitted on the I2C-bus. When the bus detects the STOP condition, STO is cleared automatically. In slave mode, setting this bit can recover from an error condition. In this case, no STOP condition is transmitted to the bus. The hardware behaves as if a STOP condition has been received and it switches to not addressed slave receiver mode. The STO flag is cleared by hardware automatically. SI is the I2C Interrupt Flag. This bit is set when the I2C state changes. However, entering state F8 does not set SI since there is nothing for an interrupt service routine to do in that case. While SI is set, the low period of the serial clock on the SCL line is stretched, and the serial transfer is suspended. When SCL is high, it is unaffected by the state of the SI flag. SI must be reset by software, by writing a 1 to the SIC bit in I2CONCLR register. AA is the Assert Acknowledge Flag. When set to 1, an acknowledge (low level to SDA) will be returned during the acknowledge clock pulse on the SCL line on the following situations: 1. The address in the Slave Address Register has been received. 2. The general call address has been received while the general call bit (GC) in I2ADR is set. 3. A data byte has been received while the I2C is in the master receiver mode. 4. A data byte has been received while the I2C is in the addressed slave receiver mode The AA bit can be cleared by writing 1 to the AAC bit in the I2CONCLR register. When AA is 0, a not acknowledge (high level to SDA) will be returned during the acknowledge clock pulse on the SCL line on the following situations: 1. A data byte has been received while the I2C is in the master receiver mode. 2. A data byte has been received while the I2C is in the addressed slave receiver mode.
11.7.2 I2C Control Clear register (I2CONCLR: I2C0, I2C0CONCLR 0xE001 C018 and I2C1, I2C1CONCLR - 0xE005 C018)
The I2CONCLR registers control clearing of bits in the I2CON register that controls operation of the I2C interface. Writing a one to a bit of this register causes the corresponding bit in the I2C control register to be cleared. Writing a zero has no effect.
Table 109: I2C Control Set register (I2CONCLR: I2C0, I2C0CONCLR - address 0xE001 C018 and I2C1, I2C1CONCLR - address 0xE005 C018) bit description Bit Symbol 1:0 2 3 4 AAC SIC Description Reserved. User software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Assert acknowledge Clear bit. I2C interrupt Clear bit. Reserved. User software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. 0 NA Reset value NA
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
120
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 109: I2C Control Set register (I2CONCLR: I2C0, I2C0CONCLR - address 0xE001 C018 and I2C1, I2C1CONCLR - address 0xE005 C018) bit description Bit Symbol 5 6 7 STAC I2ENC Description START flag Clear bit. I2C interface Disable bit. Reserved. User software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value 0 0 NA
AAC is the Assert Acknowledge Clear bit. Writing a 1 to this bit clears the AA bit in the I2CONSET register. Writing 0 has no effect. SIC is the I2C Interrupt Clear bit. Writing a 1 to this bit clears the SI bit in the I2CONSET register. Writing 0 has no effect. STAC is the Start flag Clear bit. Writing a 1 to this bit clears the STA bit in the I2CONSET register. Writing 0 has no effect. I2ENC is the I2C Interface Disable bit. Writing a 1 to this bit clears the I2EN bit in the I2CONSET register. Writing 0 has no effect.
11.7.3 I2C Status register (I2STAT: I2C0, I2C0STAT - 0xE001 C004 and I2C1, I2C1STAT - 0xE005 C004)
Each I2C Status register reflects the condition of the corresponding I2C interface. The I2C Status register is Read-Only.
Table 110: I2C Status register (I2STAT: I2C0, I2C0STAT - address 0xE001 C004 and I2C1, I2C1STAT - address 0xE005 C004) bit description Bit Symbol 2:0 7:3 Status Description These bits are unused and are always 0. Reset value 0
These bits give the actual status information about the I2C interface. 0x1F
The three least significant bits are always 0. Taken as a byte, the status register contents represent a status code. There are 26 possible status codes. When the status code is 0xF8, there is no relevant information available and the SI bit is not set. All other 25 status codes correspond to defined I2C states. When any of these states entered, the SI bit will be set. For a complete list of status codes, refer to tables from Table 120 to Table 123.
11.7.4 I2C Data register (I2DAT: I2C0, I2C0DAT - 0xE001 C008 and I2C1, I2C1DAT - 0xE005 C008)
This register contains the data to be transmitted or the data just received. The CPU can read and write to this register only while it is not in the process of shifting a byte, when the SI bit is set. Data in I2DAT remains stable as long as the SI bit is set. Data in I2DAT is always shifted from right to left: the first bit to be transmitted is the MSB (bit 7), and after a byte has been received, the first bit of received data is located at the MSB of I2DAT.
Table 111: I2C Data register ( I2DAT: I2C0, I2C0DAT - address 0xE001 C008 and I2C1, I2C1DAT - address 0xE005 C008) bit description Bit Symbol 7:0 Data Description Reset value This register holds data values that have been received, or are to 0 be transmitted.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
121
Volume 1
UM10120
11.7.5 I2C Slave Address register (I2ADR: I2C0, I2C0ADR - 0xE001 C00C and I2C1, I2C1ADR - address 0xE005 C00C)
These registers are readable and writable, and is only used when an I2C interface is set to slave mode. In master mode, this register has no effect. The LSB of I2ADR is the general call bit. When this bit is set, the general call address (0x00) is recognized.
Table 112: I2C Slave Address register (I2ADR: I2C0, I2C0ADR - address 0xE001 C00C and I2C1, I2C1ADR - address 0xE005 C00C) bit description Bit Symbol 0 GC 7:1 Address Description General Call enable bit. The I2C device address for slave mode. Reset value 0 0x00
11.7.6 I2C SCL High duty cycle register (I2SCLH: I2C0, I2C0SCLH 0xE001 C010 and I2C1, I2C1SCLH - 0xE0015 C010)
Table 113: I2C SCL High Duty Cycle register (I2SCLH: I2C0, I2C0SCLH - address 0xE001 C010 and I2C1, I2C1SCLH - address 0xE005 C010) bit description Bit 15:0 Symbol SCLH Description Count for SCL HIGH time period selection. Reset value 0x0004
11.7.7 I2C SCL Low duty cycle register (I2SCLL: I2C0 - I2C0SCLL: 0xE001 C014; I2C1 - I2C1SCLL: 0xE0015 C014)
Table 114: I2C SCL Low Duty Cycle register (I2SCLL: I2C0, I2C0SCLL - address 0xE001 C014 and I2C1, I2C1SCLL - address 0xE005 C014) bit description Bit 15:0 Symbol SCLL Description Count for SCL LOW time period selection. Reset value 0x0004
11.7.8 Selecting the appropriate I2C data rate and duty cycle
Software must set values for the registers I2SCLH and I2SCLL to select the appropriate data rate and duty cycle. I2SCLH defines the number of PCLK cycles for the SCL high time, I2SCLL defines the number of PCLK cycles for the SCL low time. The frequency is determined by the following formula (fPCLK being the frequency of PCLK): (3) f PCLK I 2 C bitfrequency = -------------------------------------------------------I2CSCLH + I2CSCLL
The values for I2SCLL and I2SCLH should not necessarily be the same. Software can set different duty cycles on SCL by setting these two registers. For example, the I2C-bus specification defines the SCL low time and high time at different values for a 400 kHz I2C rate. The value of the register must ensure that the data rate is in the I2C data rate range of 0 through 400 kHz. Each register value must be greater than or equal to 4. Table 115 gives some examples of I2C-bus rates based on PCLK frequency and I2SCLL and I2SCLH values.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
122
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 115: Example I2C clock rates I2SCLL + I2SCLH 8 10 25 50 100 160 200 400 800 I2C Bit Frequency (kHz) at PCLK (MHz) 1 125 100 40 20 10 6.25 5 2.5 1.25 200 100 50 31.25 25 12.5 6.25 400 200 100 62.5 50 25 12.5 320 160 100 80 40 20 400 200 125 100 50 25 400 250 200 100 50 375 300 150 75 5 10 16 20 40 60
11.8 Details of I2C operating modes

The four operating modes are:
Master Transmitter Master Receiver Slave Receiver Slave Transmitter
Data transfers in each mode of operation are shown in Figures 29 to 33. Table 116 lists abbreviations used in these figures when describing the I2C operating modes.
Table 116: Abbreviations used to describe an I2C operation Abbrevation S SLA R W A A Data P Explanation Start Condition 7-bit slave address Read bit (high level at SDA) Write bit (low level at SDA) Acknowledge bit (low level at SDA) Not acknowledge bit (high level at SDA) 8-bit data byte Stop condition
In Figures 29 to 33, circles are used to indicate when the serial interrupt flag is set. The numbers in the circles show the status code held in the I2STAT register. At these points, a service routine must be executed to continue or complete the serial transfer. These service routines are not critical since the serial transfer is suspended until the serial interrupt flag is cleared by software. When a serial interrupt routine is entered, the status code in I2STAT is used to branch to the appropriate service routine. For each status code, the required software action and details of the following serial transfer are given in tables from Table 120 to Table 124.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
123
Volume 1
UM10120
11.8.1 Master Transmitter mode

In the master transmitter mode, a number of data bytes are transmitted to a slave receiver (see Figure 29). Before the master transmitter mode can be entered, I2CON must be initialized as follows:
Table 117: I2CONSET used to initialize Master Transmitter mode Bit Symbol Value 7 6 I2EN 1 5 STA 0 4 STO 0 3 SI 0 2 AA x 1 0 -
The I2C rate must also be configured in the I2SCLL and I2SCLH registers. I2EN must be set to logic 1 to enable the I2C block. If the AA bit is reset, the I2C block will not acknowledge its own slave address or the general call address in the event of another device becoming master of the bus. In other words, if AA is reset, the I2C interface cannot enter a slave mode. STA, STO, and SI must be reset. The master transmitter mode may now be entered by setting the STA bit. The I2C logic will now test the I2C-bus and generate a start condition as soon as the bus becomes free. When a START condition is transmitted, the serial interrupt flag (SI) is set, and the status code in the status register (I2STAT) will be 0x08. This status code is used by the interrupt service routine to enter the appropriate state service routine that loads I2DAT with the slave address and the data direction bit (SLA+W). The SI bit in I2CON must then be reset before the serial transfer can continue. When the slave address and the direction bit have been transmitted and an acknowledgment bit has been received, the serial interrupt flag (SI) is set again, and a number of status codes in I2STAT are possible. There are 0x18, 0x20, or 0x38 for the master mode and also 0x68, 0x78, or 0xB0 if the slave mode was enabled (AA = logic 1). The appropriate action to be taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 120. After a repeated start condition (state 0x10). The I2C block may switch to the master receiver mode by loading I2DAT with SLA+R).
11.8.2 Master Receiver mode

In the master receiver mode, a number of data bytes are received from a slave transmitter (see Figure 30). The transfer is initialized as in the master transmitter mode. When the start condition has been transmitted, the interrupt service routine must load I2DAT with the 7-bit slave address and the data direction bit (SLA+R). The SI bit in I2CON must then be cleared before the serial transfer can continue. When the slave address and the data direction bit have been transmitted and an acknowledgment bit has been received, the serial interrupt flag (SI) is set again, and a number of status codes in I2STAT are possible. These are 0x40, 0x48, or 0x38 for the master mode and also 0x68, 0x78, or 0xB0 if the slave mode was enabled (AA = 1). The appropriate action to be taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 121. After a repeated start condition (state 0x10), the I2C block may switch to the master transmitter mode by loading I2DAT with SLA+W.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
124
Volume 1
UM10120
11.8.3 Slave Receiver mode

In the slave receiver mode, a number of data bytes are received from a master transmitter (see Figure 31). To initiate the slave receiver mode, I2ADR and I2CON must be loaded as follows:
Table 118: I2C0ADR and I2C1ADR usage in Slave Receiver mode Bit Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 GC own slave 7-bit address
The upper 7 bits are the address to which the I2C block will respond when addressed by a master. If the LSB (GC) is set, the I2C block will respond to the general call address (0x00); otherwise it ignores the general call address.
Table 119: I2C0CONSET and I2C1CONSET used to initialize Slave Receiver mode Bit Symbol Value 7 6 I2EN 1 5 STA 0 4 STO 0 3 SI 0 2 AA 1 1 0 -
The I2C-bus rate settings do not affect the I2C block in the slave mode. I2EN must be set to logic 1 to enable the I2C block. The AA bit must be set to enable the I2C block to acknowledge its own slave address or the general call address. STA, STO, and SI must be reset. When I2ADR and I2CON have been initialized, the I2C block waits until it is addressed by its own slave address followed by the data direction bit which must be 0 (W) for the I2C block to operate in the slave receiver mode. After its own slave address and the W bit have been received, the serial interrupt flag (SI) is set and a valid status code can be read from I2STAT. This status code is used to vector to a state service routine. The appropriate action to be taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 104. The slave receiver mode may also be entered if arbitration is lost while the I2C block is in the master mode (see status 0x68 and 0x78). If the AA bit is reset during a transfer, the I2C block will return a not acknowledge (logic 1) to SDA after the next received data byte. While AA is reset, the I2C block does not respond to its own slave address or a general call address. However, the I2C-bus is still monitored and address recognition may be resumed at any time by setting AA. This means that the AA bit may be used to temporarily isolate the I2C block from the I2C-bus.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
125
Volume 1
UM10120
MT
Successful transmission to a Slave Receiver
SLA
DATA
08H
18H
28H
Next transfer started with a Repeated Start condition
SLA
10H Not Acknowledge received after the Slave Address
20H
Not Acknowledge received after a Data byte
To Master receive mode, entry = MR
30H
Arbitration lost in Slave Address or Data byte
A OR A
Other Master continues
A OR A
38H
38H
Arbitration lost and addressed as Slave
68H
78H
B0H
To corresponding states in Slave mode
From Master to Slave
From Slave to Master
DATA
Any number of data bytes and their associated Acknowledge bits
2C bus This number (contained in I2STA) corresponds to a defined state of the I
Fig 29. Format and States in the Master Transmitter mode
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
126
Volume 1
UM10120
MR
Successful transmission to a Slave Transmitter
SLA
DATA
DATA
08H
40H
50H
58H
Next transfer started with a Repeated Start condition
SLA
10H Not Acknowledge received after the Slave Address
48H To Master transmit mode, entry = MT
Arbitration lost in Slave Address or Acknowledge bit
A OR A
38H
38H
Arbitration lost and addressed as Slave
Other Master continues To corresponding states in Slave mode
68H
78H
B0H
DATA
2C bus This number (contained in I2STA) corresponds to a defined state of the I
Fig 30. Format and States in the Master Receiver mode
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
127
Volume 1
UM10120
Reception of the own Slave Address and one or more Data bytes all are acknowledged
SLA
DATA
DATA
P OR S
60H
80H
80H
A0H
Last data byte received is Not Acknowledged
P OR S
88H Arbitration lost as Master and addressed as Slave
68H
Reception of the General Call address and one or more Data bytes
GENERAL CALL
DATA
DATA
P OR S
70h
90h
90h
A0H
Last data byte is Not Acknowledged
P OR S
98h Arbitration lost as Master and addressed as Slave by General Call
78h
DATA
2 This number (contained in I2STA) corresponds to a defined state of the CI bus
Fig 31. Format and States in the Slave Receiver mode
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
128
Volume 1
UM10120
Reception of the own Slave Address and one or more Data bytes all are Acknowledged
SLA
DATA
DATA
P OR S
A8H
B8H
C0H
Arbitration lost as Master and addressed as Slave
B0H Last data byte transmitted. Switched to Not Addressed Slave (AA bit in I2CON = 0)
ALL ONES
P OR S
C8H
DATA
2C This number (contained in I2STA) corresponds to a defined state of the I bus
Fig 32. Format and States in the Slave Transmitter mode
11.8.4 Slave Transmitter mode

In the slave transmitter mode, a number of data bytes are transmitted to a master receiver (see Figure 32). Data transfer is initialized as in the slave receiver mode. When I2ADR and I2CON have been initialized, the I2C block waits until it is addressed by its own slave address followed by the data direction bit which must be 1 (R) for the I2C block to operate in the slave transmitter mode. After its own slave address and the R bit have been received, the serial interrupt flag (SI) is set and a valid status code can be read from I2STAT. This status code is used to vector to a state service routine, and the appropriate action to be taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 123. The slave transmitter mode may also be entered if arbitration is lost while the I2C block is in the master mode (see state 0xB0). If the AA bit is reset during a transfer, the I2C block will transmit the last byte of the transfer and enter state 0xC0 or 0xC8. The I2C block is switched to the not addressed slave mode and will ignore the master receiver if it continues the transfer. Thus the master receiver receives all 1s as serial data. While AA is reset, the I2C block does not respond to its own slave address or a general call address. However, the I2C-bus is still monitored, and address recognition may be resumed at any time by setting AA. This means that the AA bit may be used to temporarily isolate the I2C block from the I2C-bus.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
129
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 120: Master Transmitter mode Status Status of the I2C-bus Application software response Code and hardware To/From I2DAT To I2CON (I2CSTAT) STA STO SI 0x08 0x10 A START condition Load SLA+W has been transmitted. A repeated START condition has been transmitted. SLA+W has been transmitted; ACK has been received. Load SLA+W or Load SLA+R Load data byte or X X X 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Next action taken by I2C hardware AA X X X X X X X SLA+W will be transmitted; ACK bit will be received. As above. SLA+W will be transmitted; the I2C block will be switched to MST/REC mode. Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will be received. Repeated START will be transmitted. STOP condition will be transmitted; STO flag will be reset. STOP condition followed by a START condition will be transmitted; STO flag will be reset. Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will be received. Repeated START will be transmitted. STOP condition will be transmitted; STO flag will be reset. STOP condition followed by a START condition will be transmitted; STO flag will be reset. Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will be received. Repeated START will be transmitted. STOP condition will be transmitted; STO flag will be reset. STOP condition followed by a START condition will be transmitted; STO flag will be reset. Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will be received. Repeated START will be transmitted. STOP condition will be transmitted; STO flag will be reset. STOP condition followed by a START condition will be transmitted; STO flag will be reset. I2C-bus will be released; not addressed slave will be entered. A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free.
0x18
No I2DAT action or 1 No I2DAT action or 0 No I2DAT action 1
0x20
SLA+W has been Load data byte or 0 transmitted; NOT ACK has been received. No I2DAT action or 1 No I2DAT action or 0 No I2DAT action 1
0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0
X X X X
0x28
Data byte in I2DAT Load data byte or 0 has been transmitted; ACK has been No I2DAT action or 1 received. No I2DAT action or 0 No I2DAT action 1
0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0
X X X X
0x30
Data byte in I2DAT Load data byte or 0 has been transmitted; NOT ACK has been No I2DAT action or 1 received. No I2DAT action or 0 No I2DAT action 1
0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0
X X X X
0x38
Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W or Data bytes.
No I2DAT action or 0 No I2DAT action 1
0 0
0 0
X X
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
130
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 121: Master Receiver mode Status Status of the I2C-bus Application software response Code and hardware To/From I2DAT To I2CON (I2CSTAT) STA STO SI 0x08 0x10 A START condition Load SLA+R has been transmitted. A repeated START condition has been transmitted. Load SLA+R or Load SLA+W X X X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Next action taken by I2C hardware AA X X X X X 0 1 X X X SLA+R will be transmitted; ACK bit will be received. As above. SLA+W will be transmitted; the I2C block will be switched to MST/TRX mode. I2C-bus will be released; the I2C block will enter a slave mode. A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free. Data byte will be received; NOT ACK bit will be returned. Data byte will be received; ACK bit will be returned. Repeated START condition will be transmitted. STOP condition will be transmitted; STO flag will be reset. STOP condition followed by a START condition will be transmitted; STO flag will be reset. Data byte will be received; NOT ACK bit will be returned. Data byte will be received; ACK bit will be returned. Repeated START condition will be transmitted. STOP condition will be transmitted; STO flag will be reset. STOP condition followed by a START condition will be transmitted; STO flag will be reset.
0x38
Arbitration lost in NOT No I2DAT action or 0 ACK bit. No I2DAT action 1
0x40
SLA+R has been transmitted; ACK has been received.
No I2DAT action or 0 No I2DAT action 0
0x48
SLA+R has been No I2DAT action or 1 transmitted; NOT ACK has been received. No I2DAT action or 0 No I2DAT action 1
0x50
Data byte has been received; ACK has been returned. Data byte has been received; NOT ACK has been returned.
Read data byte or 0 Read data byte 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
0 1 X X X
0x58
Read data byte or 1 Read data byte or 0 Read data byte 1
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
131
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 122: Slave Receiver mode Status Status of the I2C-bus Application software response Code and hardware To/From I2DAT To I2CON (I2CSTAT) STA STO SI 0x60 Own SLA+W has been received; ACK has been returned. Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as master; Own SLA+W has been received, ACK returned. General call address (0x00) has been received; ACK has been returned. Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as master; General call address has been received, ACK has been returned. Previously addressed with own SLV address; DATA has been received; ACK has been returned. Previously addressed with own SLA; DATA byte has been received; NOT ACK has been returned. No I2DAT action or X No I2DAT action X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Next action taken by I2C hardware AA 0 1 0 1 Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned. Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned. Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned. Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned. Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned. Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned. Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned. Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned.
0x68
No I2DAT action or X No I2DAT action X
0x70
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 1 0 1
0x78
0x80
Read data byte or X Read data byte X
0 0
0 0
0 1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned. Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition of own SLA or General call address. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will be recognized; General call address will be recognized if I2ADR[0] = logic 1. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition of own SLA or General call address. A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will be recognized; General call address will be recognized if I2ADR[0] = logic 1. A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free. Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned. Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned.
0x88
Read data byte or 0
Read data byte or 0
Read data byte or 1
Read data byte
0x90
Previously addressed with General Call; DATA byte has been received; ACK has been returned.
Read data byte or X Read data byte X
0 0
0 0
0 1
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
132
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 122: Slave Receiver mode Status Status of the I2C-bus Application software response Code and hardware To/From I2DAT To I2CON (I2CSTAT) STA STO SI 0x98 Previously addressed with General Call; DATA byte has been received; NOT ACK has been returned. Read data byte or 0 0 0 Next action taken by I2C hardware AA 0 Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition of own SLA or General call address. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will be recognized; General call address will be recognized if I2ADR[0] = logic 1. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition of own SLA or General call address. A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will be recognized; General call address will be recognized if I2ADR[0] = logic 1. A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition of own SLA or General call address. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will be recognized; General call address will be recognized if I2ADR[0] = logic 1. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition of own SLA or General call address. A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will be recognized; General call address will be recognized if I2ADR[0] = logic 1. A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free.
Read data byte or 0
Read data byte or 1
Read data byte
0xA0
A STOP condition or repeated START condition has been received while still addressed as SLV/REC or SLV/TRX.
No STDAT action or No STDAT action or
No STDAT action or
No STDAT action
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
133
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 123: Slave Transmitter mode Status Status of the I2C-bus Application software response Code and hardware To/From I2DAT To I2CON (I2CSTAT) STA STO SI 0xA8 Own SLA+R has been Load data byte or received; ACK has been returned. Load data byte Arbitration lost in Load data byte or SLA+R/W as master; Own SLA+R has been Load data byte received, ACK has been returned. Data byte in I2DAT Load data byte or has been transmitted; ACK has been Load data byte received. X X X X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Next action taken by I2C hardware AA 0 1 0 1 Last data byte will be transmitted and ACK bit will be received. Data byte will be transmitted; ACK will be received. Last data byte will be transmitted and ACK bit will be received. Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will be received. Last data byte will be transmitted and ACK bit will be received. Data byte will be transmitted; ACK bit will be received. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition of own SLA or General call address. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will be recognized; General call address will be recognized if I2ADR[0] = logic 1. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition of own SLA or General call address. A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will be recognized; General call address will be recognized if I2ADR[0] = logic 1. A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition of own SLA or General call address. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will be recognized; General call address will be recognized if I2ADR[0] = logic 1. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; no recognition of own SLA or General call address. A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free. Switched to not addressed SLV mode; Own SLA will be recognized; General call address will be recognized if I2ADR.0 = logic 1. A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free.
0xB0
0xB8
X X
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 1 0
0xC0
Data byte in I2DAT No I2DAT action or 0 has been transmitted; NOT ACK has been received. No I2DAT action or 0
No I2DAT action or 1
No I2DAT action
0xC8
Last data byte in I2DAT has been transmitted (AA = 0); ACK has been received.
No I2DAT action
01
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
134
Volume 1
UM10120
11.8.5 Miscellaneous States

There are two I2STAT codes that do not correspond to a defined I2C hardware state (see Table 124). These are discussed below.
11.8.6 I2STAT = 0xF8

This status code indicates that no relevant information is available because the serial interrupt flag, SI, is not yet set. This occurs between other states and when the I2C block is not involved in a serial transfer.
11.8.7 I2STAT = 0x00

This status code indicates that a bus error has occurred during an I2C serial transfer. A bus error is caused when a START or STOP condition occurs at an illegal position in the format frame. Examples of such illegal positions are during the serial transfer of an address byte, a data byte, or an acknowledge bit. A bus error may also be caused when external interference disturbs the internal I2C block signals. When a bus error occurs, SI is set. To recover from a bus error, the STO flag must be set and SI must be cleared. This causes the I2C block to enter the not addressed slave mode (a defined state) and to clear the STO flag (no other bits in I2CON are affected). The SDA and SCL lines are released (a STOP condition is not transmitted).
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
135
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 124: Miscellaneous States Status Status of the I2C-bus Application software response Code and hardware To/From I2DAT To I2CON (I2CSTAT) STA STO SI 0xF8 No relevant state information available; SI = 0. No I2DAT action Next action taken by I2C hardware AA Wait or proceed current transfer.
No I2CON action
0x00
Bus error during MST No I2DAT action or selected slave modes, due to an illegal START or STOP condition. State 0x00 can also occur when interference causes the I2C block to enter an undefined state.
Only the internal hardware is affected in the MST or addressed SLV modes. In all cases, the bus is released and the I2C block is switched to the not addressed SLV mode. STO is reset.
11.8.8 Some special cases

The I2C hardware has facilities to handle the following special cases that may occur during a serial transfer:
11.8.9 Simultaneous repeated START conditions from two masters

A repeated START condition may be generated in the master transmitter or master receiver modes. A special case occurs if another master simultaneously generates a repeated START condition (see Figure 33). Until this occurs, arbitration is not lost by either master since they were both transmitting the same data. If the I2C hardware detects a repeated START condition on the I2C-bus before generating a repeated START condition itself, it will release the bus, and no interrupt request is generated. If another master frees the bus by generating a STOP condition, the I2C block will transmit a normal START condition (state 0x08), and a retry of the total serial data transfer can commence.
11.8.10 Data transfer after loss of arbitration

Arbitration may be lost in the master transmitter and master receiver modes (see Figure 27). Loss of arbitration is indicated by the following states in I2STAT; 0x38, 0x68, 0x78, and 0xB0 (see Figure 29 and Figure 30). If the STA flag in I2CON is set by the routines which service these states, then, if the bus is free again, a START condition (state 0x08) is transmitted without intervention by the CPU, and a retry of the total serial transfer can commence.
11.8.11 Forced access to the I2C-bus

In some applications, it may be possible for an uncontrolled source to cause a bus hang-up. In such situations, the problem may be caused by interference, temporary interruption of the bus or a temporary short-circuit between SDA and SCL.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
136
Volume 1
UM10120
If an uncontrolled source generates a superfluous START or masks a STOP condition, then the I2C-bus stays busy indefinitely. If the STA flag is set and bus access is not obtained within a reasonable amount of time, then a forced access to the I2C-bus is possible. This is achieved by setting the STO flag while the STA flag is still set. No STOP condition is transmitted. The I2C hardware behaves as if a STOP condition was received and is able to transmit a START condition. The STO flag is cleared by hardware (see Figure 34).
11.8.12 I2C-bus obstructed by a low level on SCL or SDA

An I2C-bus hang-up occurs if SDA or SCL is pulled LOW by an uncontrolled source. If the SCL line is obstructed (pulled LOW) by a device on the bus, no further serial transfer is possible, and the I2C hardware cannot resolve this type of problem. When this occurs, the problem must be resolved by the device that is pulling the SCL bus line LOW. If the SDA line is obstructed by another device on the bus (e.g., a slave device out of bit synchronization), the problem can be solved by transmitting additional clock pulses on the SCL line (see Figure 35). The I2C hardware transmits additional clock pulses when the STA flag is set, but no START condition can be generated because the SDA line is pulled LOW while the I2C-bus is considered free. The I2C hardware attempts to generate a START condition after every two additional clock pulses on the SCL line. When the SDA line is eventually released, a normal START condition is transmitted, state 0x08 is entered, and the serial transfer continues. If a forced bus access occurs or a repeated START condition is transmitted while SDA is obstructed (pulled LOW), the I2C hardware performs the same action as described above. In each case, state 0x08 is entered after a successful START condition is transmitted and normal serial transfer continues. Note that the CPU is not involved in solving these bus hang-up problems.
11.8.13 Bus error

A bus error occurs when a START or STOP condition is present at an illegal position in the format frame. Examples of illegal positions are during the serial transfer of an address byte, a data bit, or an acknowledge bit. The I2C hardware only reacts to a bus error when it is involved in a serial transfer either as a master or an addressed slave. When a bus error is detected, the I2C block immediately switches to the not addressed slave mode, releases the SDA and SCL lines, sets the interrupt flag, and loads the status register with 0x00. This status code may be used to vector to a state service routine which either attempts the aborted serial transfer again or simply recovers from the error condition as shown in Table 124.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
137
Volume 1
UM10120
SLA
DATA
OTHER MASTER CONTINUES
SLA
08H
18H
28H
08H
Other Master sends Repeated Start earlier
Retry
Fig 33. Simultaneous repeated START conditions from two masters
Time limit STA Flag
STO Flag
SDA Line
SCL Line
Start condition
Fig 34. Forced access to a busy I2C-bus
STA Flag (2) (1) SDA Line (1) (3)
SCL Line
Start condition
1. Unsuccessful attempt to send a Start condition. 2. SDA Line released. 3. Succcessful attempt to send a Start condition; state 08H is entered.
Fig 35. Recovering from a bus obstruction caused by a low level on SDA
11.8.14 I2C State service routines

This section provides examples of operations that must be performed by various I2C state service routines. This includes:
Initialization of the I2C block after a Reset. I2C Interrupt Service

User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
138
Volume 1
UM10120
The 26 state service routines providing support for all four I2C operating modes. 11.8.15 Initialization
In the initialization example, the I2C block is enabled for both master and slave modes. For each mode, a buffer is used for transmission and reception. The initialization routine performs the following functions:
I2ADR is loaded with the parts own slave address and the general call bit (GC) The I2C interrupt enable and interrupt priority bits are set The slave mode is enabled by simultaneously setting the I2EN and AA bits in I2CON
and the serial clock frequency (for master modes) is defined by loading CR0 and CR1 in I2CON. The master routines must be started in the main program. The I2C hardware now begins checking the I2C-bus for its own slave address and general call. If the general call or the own slave address is detected, an interrupt is requested and I2STAT is loaded with the appropriate state information.
11.8.16 I2C interrupt service

When the I2C interrupt is entered, I2STAT contains a status code which identifies one of the 26 state services to be executed.
11.8.17 The State service routines

Each state routine is part of the I2C interrupt routine and handles one of the 26 states.
11.8.18 Adapting State services to an application

The state service examples show the typical actions that must be performed in response to the 26 I2C state codes. If one or more of the four I2C operating modes are not used, the associated state services can be omitted, as long as care is taken that the those states can never occur. In an application, it may be desirable to implement some kind of timeout during I2C operations, in order to trap an inoperative bus or a lost service routine.
11.9 Software example

11.9.1 Initialization routine
Example to initialize I2C Interface as a Slave and/or Master. 1. Load I2ADR with own Slave Address, enable general call recognition if needed. 2. Enable I2C interrupt. 3. Write 0x44 to I2CONSET to set the I2EN and AA bits, enabling Slave functions. For Master only funcitons, write 0x40 to I2CONSET.
11.9.2 Start Master Transmit function

Begin a Master Transmit operation by setting up the buffer, pointer, and data count, then initiating a Start.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
139
Volume 1
UM10120
1. Initialize Master data counter. 2. Set up the Slave Address to which data will be transmitted, and add the Write bit. 3. Write 0x20 to I2CONSET to set the STA bit. 4. Set up data to be transmitted in Master Transmit buffer. 5. Initialize the Master data counter to match the length of the message being sent. 6. Exit
11.9.3 Start Master Receive function

Begin a Master Receive operation by setting up the buffer, pointer, and data count, then initiating a Start. 1. Initialize Master data counter. 2. Set up the Slave Address to which data will be transmitted, and add the Read bit. 3. Write 0x20 to I2CONSET to set the STA bit. 4. Set up the Master Receive buffer. 5. Initialize the Master data counter to match the length of the message to be received. 6. Exit
11.9.4 I2C interrupt routine

Determine the I2C state and which state routine will be used to handle it. 1. Read the I2C status from I2STA. 2. Use the status value to branch to one of 26 possible state routines.
11.9.5 Non mode specific States 11.9.6 State : 0x00

Bus Error. Enter not addressed Slave mode and release bus. 1. Write 0x14 to I2CONSET to set the STO and AA bits. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Exit
11.9.7 Master States

State 08 and State 10 are for both Master Transmit and Master Receive modes. The R/W bit decides whether the next state is within Master Transmit mode or Master Receive mode.
11.9.8 State : 0x08

A Start condition has been transmitted. The Slave Address + R/W bit will be transmitted, an ACK bit will be received. 1. Write Slave Address with R/W bit to I2DAT. 2. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
140
Volume 1
UM10120
3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 4. Set up Master Transmit mode data buffer. 5. Set up Master Receive mode data buffer. 6. Initialize Master data counter. 7. Exit
11.9.9 State : 0x10

A repeated Start condition has been transmitted. The Slave Address + R/W bit will be transmitted, an ACK bit will be received. 1. Write Slave Address with R/W bit to I2DAT. 2. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 4. Set up Master Transmit mode data buffer. 5. Set up Master Receive mode data buffer. 6. Initialize Master data counter. 7. Exit
11.9.10 Master Transmitter States 11.9.11 State : 0x18

Previous state was State 8 or State 10, Slave Address + Write has been transmitted, ACK has been received. The first data byte will be transmitted, an ACK bit will be received. 1. Load I2DAT with first data byte from Master Transmit buffer. 2. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 4. Increment Master Transmit buffer pointer. 5. Exit
11.9.12 State : 0x20

Slave Address + Write has been transmitted, NOT ACK has been received. A Stop condition will be transmitted. 1. Write 0x14 to I2CONSET to set the STO and AA bits. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Exit
11.9.13 State : 0x28

Data has been transmitted, ACK has been received. If the transmitted data was the last data byte then transmit a Stop condition, otherwise transmit the next data byte. 1. Decrement the Master data counter, skip to step 5 if not the last data byte. 2. Write 0x14 to I2CONSET to set the STO and AA bits.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
141
Volume 1
UM10120
3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 4. Exit 5. Load I2DAT with next data byte from Master Transmit buffer. 6. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 7. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 8. Increment Master Transmit buffer pointer 9. Exit
11.9.14 State : 0x30

Data has been transmitted, NOT ACK received. A Stop condition will be transmitted. 1. Write 0x14 to I2CONSET to set the STO and AA bits. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Exit
11.9.15 State : 0x38

Arbitration has been lost during Slave Address + Write or data. The bus has been released and not addressed Slave mode is entered. A new Start condition will be transmitted when the bus is free again. 1. Write 0x24 to I2CONSET to set the STA and AA bits. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Exit
11.9.16 Master Receive States 11.9.17 State : 0x40

Previous state was State 08 or State 10. Slave Address + Read has been transmitted, ACK has been received. Data will be received and ACK returned. 1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Exit
11.9.18 State : 0x48

Slave Address + Read has been transmitted, NOT ACK has been received. A Stop condition will be transmitted. 1. Write 0x14 to I2CONSET to set the STO and AA bits. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Exit
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
142
Volume 1
UM10120
11.9.19 State : 0x50

Data has been received, ACK has been returned. Data will be read from I2DAT. Additional data will be received. If this is the last data byte then NOT ACK will be returned, otherwise ACK will be returned. 1. Read data byte from I2DAT into Master Receive buffer. 2. Decrement the Master data counter, skip to step 5 if not the last data byte. 3. Write 0x0C to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag and the AA bit. 4. Exit 5. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 6. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 7. Increment Master Receive buffer pointer 8. Exit
11.9.20 State : 0x58

Data has been received, NOT ACK has been returned. Data will be read from I2DAT. A Stop condition will be transmitted. 1. Read data byte from I2DAT into Master Receive buffer. 2. Write 0x14 to I2CONSET to set the STO and AA bits. 3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 4. Exit
11.9.21 Slave Receiver States 11.9.22 State : 0x60

Own Slave Address + Write has been received, ACK has been returned. Data will be received and ACK returned. 1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Set up Slave Receive mode data buffer. 4. Initialize Slave data counter. 5. Exit
11.9.23 State : 0x68

Arbitration has been lost in Slave Address and R/W bit as bus Master. Own Slave Address + Write has been received, ACK has been returned. Data will be received and ACK will be returned. STA is set to restart Master mode after the bus is free again. 1. Write 0x24 to I2CONSET to set the STA and AA bits. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Set up Slave Receive mode data buffer. 4. Initialize Slave data counter.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
143
Volume 1
UM10120
5. Exit.
11.9.24 State : 0x70

General call has been received, ACK has been returned. Data will be received and ACK returned. 1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Set up Slave Receive mode data buffer. 4. Initialize Slave data counter. 5. Exit
11.9.25 State : 0x78

Arbitration has been lost in Slave Address + R/W bit as bus Master. General call has been received and ACK has been returned. Data will be received and ACK returned. STA is set to restart Master mode after the bus is free again. 1. Write 0x24 to I2CONSET to set the STA and AA bits. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Set up Slave Receive mode data buffer. 4. Initialize Slave data counter. 5. Exit
11.9.26 State : 0x80

Previously addressed with own Slave Address. Data has been received and ACK has been returned. Additional data will be read. 1. Read data byte from I2DAT into the Slave Receive buffer. 2. Decrement the Slave data counter, skip to step 5 if not the last data byte. 3. Write 0x0C to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag and the AA bit. 4. Exit. 5. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 6. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 7. Increment Slave Receive buffer pointer. 8. Exit
11.9.27 State : 0x88

Previously addressed with own Slave Address . Data has been received and NOT ACK has been returned. Received data will not be saved. Not addressed Slave mode is entered. 1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Exit
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
144
Volume 1
UM10120
11.9.28 State : 0x90

Previously addressed with general call. Data has been received, ACK has been returned. Received data will be saved. Only the first data byte will be received with ACK. Additional data will be received with NOT ACK. 1. Read data byte from I2DAT into the Slave Receive buffer. 2. Write 0x0C to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag and the AA bit. 3. Exit
11.9.29 State : 0x98

Previously addressed with general call. Data has been received, NOT ACK has been returned. Received data will not be saved. Not addressed Slave mode is entered. 1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Exit
11.9.30 State : 0xA0

A Stop condition or repeated Start has been received, while still addressed as a Slave. Data will not be saved. Not addressed Slave mode is entered. 1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Exit
11.9.31 Slave Transmitter States 11.9.32 State : 0xA8

Own Slave Address + Read has been received, ACK has been returned. Data will be transmitted, ACK bit will be received. 1. Load I2DAT from Slave Transmit buffer with first data byte. 2. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 4. Set up Slave Transmit mode data buffer. 5. Increment Slave Transmit buffer pointer. 6. Exit
11.9.33 State : 0xB0

Arbitration lost in Slave Address and R/W bit as bus Master. Own Slave Address + Read has been received, ACK has been returned. Data will be transmitted, ACK bit will be received. STA is set to restart Master mode after the bus is free again. 1. Load I2DAT from Slave Transmit buffer with first data byte. 2. Write 0x24 to I2CONSET to set the STA and AA bits.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
145
Volume 1
UM10120
3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 4. Set up Slave Transmit mode data buffer. 5. Increment Slave Transmit buffer pointer. 6. Exit
11.9.34 State : 0xB8

Data has been transmitted, ACK has been received. Data will be transmitted, ACK bit will be received. 1. Load I2DAT from Slave Transmit buffer with data byte. 2. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 3. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 4. Increment Slave Transmit buffer pointer. 5. Exit
11.9.35 State : 0xC0

Data has been transmitted, NOT ACK has been received. Not addressed Slave mode is entered. 1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Exit.
11.9.36 State : 0xC8

The last data byte has been transmitted, ACK has been received. Not addressed Slave mode is entered. 1. Write 0x04 to I2CONSET to set the AA bit. 2. Write 0x08 to I2CONCLR to clear the SI flag. 3. Exit
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
146
UM10120
Chapter 12: SPI Interface (SPI0)
12.1 Features

Single complete and independent SPI controller. Compliant with Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) specification. Synchronous, Serial, Full Duplex Communication. Combined SPI master and slave. Maximum data bit rate of one eighth of the input clock rate. 8 to 16 bits per transfer
12.2 Description
12.2.1 SPI overview
SPI is a full duplex serial interfaces. It can handle multiple masters and slaves being connected to a given bus. Only a single master and a single slave can communicate on the interface during a given data transfer. During a data transfer the master always sends 8 to 16 bits of data to the slave, and the slave always sends a byte of data to the master.
12.2.2 SPI data transfers

Figure 36 is a timing diagram that illustrates the four different data transfer formats that are available with the SPI. This timing diagram illustrates a single 8 bit data transfer. The first thing you should notice in this timing diagram is that it is divided into three horizontal parts. The first part describes the SCK and SSEL signals. The second part describes the MOSI and MISO signals when the CPHA variable is 0. The third part describes the MOSI and MISO signals when the CPHA variable is 1. In the first part of the timing diagram, note two points. First, the SPI is illustrated with CPOL set to both 0 and 1. The second point to note is the activation and de-activation of the SSEL signal. When CPHA = 1, the SSEL signal will always go inactive between data transfers. This is not guaranteed when CPHA = 0 (the signal can remain active).
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
147
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 12: SPI
SCK (CPOL = 0)
SCK (CPOL = 1)
SSEL
CPHA = 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Cycle # CPHA = 0
MOSI (CPHA = 0)
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
MISO (CPHA = 0)
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
CPHA = 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Cycle # CPHA = 1
MOSI (CPHA = 1)
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
MISO (CPHA = 1)
BIT 1
BIT 2
BIT 3
BIT 4
BIT 5
BIT 6
BIT 7
BIT 8
Fig 36. SPI data transfer format (CPHA = 0 and CPHA = 1)
The data and clock phase relationships are summarized in Table 125. This table summarizes the following for each setting of CPOL and CPHA.
When the first data bit is driven When all other data bits are driven When data is sampled
Table 125: SPI data to clock phase relationship CPOL and CPHA settings CPOL = 0, CPHA = 0 CPOL = 0, CPHA = 1 CPOL = 1, CPHA = 0 CPOL = 1, CPHA = 1 Firsta data driven Prior to first SCK rising edge First SCK rising edge First SCK falling edge Other data driven SCK falling edge SCK rising edge SCK falling edge Data sampled SCK rising edge SCK falling edge SCK falling edge SCK rising edge
Prior to first SCK falling edge SCK rising edge
The definition of when an 8 bit transfer starts and stops is dependent on whether a device is a master or a slave, and the setting of the CPHA variable. When a device is a master, the start of a transfer is indicated by the master having a byte of data that is ready to be transmitted. At this point, the master can activate the clock, and begin the transfer. The transfer ends when the last clock cycle of the transfer is complete.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
148
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 12: SPI
When a device is a slave, and CPHA is set to 0, the transfer starts when the SSEL signal goes active, and ends when SSEL goes inactive. When a device is a slave, and CPHA is set to 1, the transfer starts on the first clock edge when the slave is selected, and ends on the last clock edge where data is sampled.
12.2.3 General information

There are four registers that control the SPI peripheral. They are described in detail in Section 12.4 Register description on page 151. The SPI control register contains a number of programmable bits used to control the function of the SPI block. The settings for this register must be set up prior to a given data transfer taking place. The SPI status register contains read only bits that are used to monitor the status of the SPI interface, including normal functions, and exception conditions. The primary purpose of this register is to detect completion of a data transfer. This is indicated by the SPIF bit. The remaining bits in the register are exception condition indicators. These exceptions will be described later in this section. The SPI data register is used to provide the transmit and receive data bytes. An internal shift register in the SPI block logic is used for the actual transmission and reception of the serial data. Data is written to the SPI data register for the transmit case. There is no buffer between the data register and the internal shift register. A write to the data register goes directly into the internal shift register. Therefore, data should only be written to this register when a transmit is not currently in progress. Read data is buffered. When a transfer is complete, the receive data is transferred to a single byte data buffer, where it is later read. A read of the SPI data register returns the value of the read data buffer. The SPI clock counter register controls the clock rate when the SPI block is in master mode. This needs to be set prior to a transfer taking place, when the SPI block is a master. This register has no function when the SPI block is a slave. The I/Os for this implementation of SPI are standard CMOS I/Os. The open drain SPI option is not implemented in this design. When a device is set up to be a slave, its I/Os are only active when it is selected by the SSEL signal being active.
12.2.4 Master operation

The following sequence describes how one should process a data transfer with the SPI block when it is set up to be the master. This process assumes that any prior data transfer has already completed. 1. Set the SPI clock counter register to the desired clock rate. 2. Set the SPI control register to the desired settings. 3. Write the data to transmitted to the SPI data register. This write starts the SPI data transfer. 4. Wait for the SPIF bit in the SPI status register to be set to 1. The SPIF bit will be set after the last cycle of the SPI data transfer. 5. Read the SPI status register. 6. Read the received data from the SPI data register (optional). 7. Go to step 3 if more data is required to transmit.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
149
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 12: SPI
Note that a read or write of the SPI data register is required in order to clear the SPIF status bit. Therefore, if the optional read of the SPI data register does not take place, a write to this register is required in order to clear the SPIF status bit.
12.2.5 Slave operation

The following sequence describes how one should process a data transfer with the SPI block when it is set up to be a slave. This process assumes that any prior data transfer has already completed. It is required that the system clock driving the SPI logic be at least 8X faster than the SPI. 1. Set the SPI control register to the desired settings. 2. Write the data to transmitted to the SPI data register (optional). Note that this can only be done when a slave SPI transfer is not in progress. 3. Wait for the SPIF bit in the SPI status register to be set to 1. The SPIF bit will be set after the last sampling clock edge of the SPI data transfer. 4. Read the SPI status register. 5. Read the received data from the SPI data register (optional). 6. Go to step 2 if more data is required to transmit. Note that a read or write of the SPI data register is required in order to clear the SPIF status bit. Therefore, at least one of the optional reads or writes of the SPI data register must take place, in order to clear the SPIF status bit.
12.2.6 Exception conditions 12.2.7 Read Overrun

A read overrun occurs when the SPI block internal read buffer contains data that has not been read by the processor, and a new transfer has completed. The read buffer containing valid data is indicated by the SPIF bit in the status register being active. When a transfer completes, the SPI block needs to move the received data to the read buffer. If the SPIF bit is active (the read buffer is full), the new receive data will be lost, and the read overrun (ROVR) bit in the status register will be activated.
12.2.8 Write Collision

As stated previously, there is no write buffer between the SPI block bus interface, and the internal shift register. As a result, data must not be written to the SPI data register when a SPI data transfer is currently in progress. The time frame where data cannot be written to the SPI data register is from when the transfer starts, until after the status register has been read when the SPIF status is active. If the SPI data register is written in this time frame, the write data will be lost, and the write collision (WCOL) bit in the status register will be activated.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
150
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 12: SPI
12.2.9 Mode Fault

The SSEL signal must always be inactive when the SPI block is a master. If the SSEL signal goes active, when the SPI block is a master, this indicates another master has selected the device to be a slave. This condition is known as a mode fault. When a mode fault is detected, the mode fault (MODF) bit in the status register will be activated, the SPI signal drivers will be de-activated, and the SPI mode will be changed to be a slave.
12.2.10 Slave Abort

A slave transfer is considered to be aborted, if the SSEL signal goes inactive before the transfer is complete. In the event of a slave abort, the transmit and receive data for the transfer that was in progress are lost, and the slave abort (ABRT) bit in the status register will be activated.

Table 126: SPI pin description Pin Name SCK0 Type Input/Output Pin Description Serial Clock. The SPI is a clock signal used to synchronize the transfer of data across the SPI interface. The SPI is always driven by the master and received by the slave. The clock is programmable to be active high or active low. The SPI is only active during a data transfer. Any other time, it is either in its inactive state, or tri-stated. Slave Select. The SPI slave select signal is an active low signal that indicates which slave is currently selected to participate in a data transfer. Each slave has its own unique slave select signal input. The SSEL must be low before data transactions begin and normally stays low for the duration of the transaction. If the SSEL signal goes high any time during a data transfer, the transfer is considered to be aborted. In this event, the slave returns to idle, and any data that was received is thrown away. There are no other indications of this exception. This signal is not directly driven by the master. It could be driven by a simple general purpose I/O under software control. On the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 (unlike earlier Philips ARM devices) the SSEL0 pin can be used for a different function when the SPI0 interface is only used in Master mode. For example, pin hosting the SSEL0 function can be configured as an output digital GPIO pin and used to select one of the SPI0 slaves. MISO0 Input/Output Master In Slave Out. The MISO signal is a unidirectional signal used to transfer serial data from the slave to the master. When a device is a slave, serial data is output on this signal. When a device is a master, serial data is input on this signal. When a slave device is not selected, the slave drives the signal high impedance. Master Out Slave In. The MOSI signal is a unidirectional signal used to transfer serial data from the master to the slave. When a device is a master, serial data is output on this signal. When a device is a slave, serial data is input on this signal.
SSEL0
Input
MOSI0
Input/Output

The SPI contains 5 registers as shown in Table 127. All registers are byte, half word and word accessible.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
151
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 12: SPI
Table 127: SPI register map Name S0SPCR S0SPSR S0SPDR Description SPI Control Register. This register controls the operation of the SPI. SPI Status Register. This register shows the status of the SPI. Access R/W RO Reset value[1] 0x00 0x00 0x00 Address 0xE002 0000 0xE002 0004 0xE002 0008
SPI Data Register. This bi-directional register R/W provides the transmit and receive data for the SPI. Transmit data is provided to the SPI0 by writing to this register. Data received by the SPI0 can be read from this register. R/W R/W
S0SPCCR SPI Clock Counter Register. This register controls the frequency of a masters SCK0. S0SPINT
[1]
0x00 0x00
0xE002 000C 0xE002 001C
SPI Interrupt Flag. This register contains the interrupt flag for the SPI interface.
12.4.1 SPI Control Register (S0SPCR - 0xE002 0000)

The S0SPCR register controls the operation of the SPI0 as per the configuration bits setting.
Table 128: SPI Control Register (S0SPCR - address 0xE002 0000) bit description Bit 1:0 Symbol Value Description Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. 0 1 3 CPHA The SPI controller sends and receives 8 bits of data per transfer. The SPI controllert sends and receives the number of bits selected by bits 11:8. Clock phase control determines the relationship between 0 the data and the clock on SPI transfers, and controls when a slave transfer is defined as starting and ending. 0 1 Data is sampled on the first clock edge of SCK. A transfer starts and ends with activation and deactivation of the SSEL signal. Data is sampled on the second clock edge of the SCK. A transfer starts with the first clock edge, and ends with the last sampling edge when the SSEL signal is active. Clock polarity control. 0 1 5 MSTR 0 1 SCK is active high. SCK is active low. Master mode select. The SPI operates in Slave mode. The SPI operates in Master mode. 0 0 Reset value NA
BitEnable
CPOL
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
152
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 12: SPI
Table 128: SPI Control Register (S0SPCR - address 0xE002 0000) bit description Bit 6 Symbol LSBF 0 1 7 SPIE 0 1 11:8 BITS 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 0000 15:12 Value Description LSB First controls which direction each byte is shifted when transferred. SPI data is transferred MSB (bit 7) first. SPI data is transferred LSB (bit 0) first. Serial peripheral interrupt enable. SPI interrupts are inhibited. A hardware interrupt is generated each time the SPIF or MODF bits are activated. When bit 2 of this register is 1, this field controls the number of bits per transfer: 8 bits per transfer 9 bits per transfer 10 bits per transfer 11 bits per transfer 12 bits per transfer 13 bits per transfer 14 bits per transfer 15 bits per transfer 16 bits per transfer Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA 0000 0 Reset value 0
12.4.2 SPI Status Register (S0SPSR - 0xE002 0004)

The S0SPSR register controls the operation of the SPI0 as per the configuration bits setting.
Table 129: SPI Status Register (S0SPSR - address 0xE002 0004) bit description Bit 2:0 3 4 Symbol ABRT MODF Description Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Slave abort. When 1, this bit indicates that a slave abort has occurred. This bit is cleared by reading this register. Reset value NA 0
Mode fault. when 1, this bit indicates that a Mode fault error has 0 occurred. This bit is cleared by reading this register, then writing the SPI0 control register.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
153
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 12: SPI
Table 129: SPI Status Register (S0SPSR - address 0xE002 0004) bit description Bit 5 6 Symbol ROVR WCOL Description Reset value Read overrun. When 1, this bit indicates that a read overrun has 0 occurred. This bit is cleared by reading this register. Write collision. When 1, this bit indicates that a write collision has occurred. This bit is cleared by reading this register, then accessing the SPI data register. 0
SPIF
SPI transfer complete flag. When 1, this bit indicates when a SPI 0 data transfer is complete. When a master, this bit is set at the end of the last cycle of the transfer. When a slave, this bit is set on the last data sampling edge of the SCK. This bit is cleared by first reading this register, then accessing the SPI data register. Note: this is not the SPI interrupt flag. This flag is found in the SPINT register.
12.4.3 SPI Data Register (S0SPDR - 0xE002 0008)

This bi-directional data register provides the transmit and receive data for the SPI. Transmit data is provided to the SPI by writing to this register. Data received by the SPI can be read from this register. When a master, a write to this register will start a SPI data transfer. Writes to this register will be blocked from when a data transfer starts to when the SPIF status bit is set, and the status register has not been read.
Table 130: SPI Data Register (S0SPDR - address 0xE002 0008) bit description Bit 7:0 Symbol DataLow Description SPI Bi-directional data port. Reset value 0x00
15:8 DataHigh
If bit 2 of the SPCR is 1 and bits 11:8 are other than 1000, some 0x00 or all of these bits contain the additional transmit and receive bits. When less than 16 bits are selected, the more significant among these bits read as zeroes.
12.4.4 SPI Clock Counter Register (S0SPCCR - 0xE002 000C)

This register controls the frequency of a masters SCK. The register indicates the number of PCLK cycles that make up an SPI clock. The value of this register must always be an even number. As a result, bit 0 must always be 0. The value of the register must also always be greater than or equal to 8. Violations of this can result in unpredictable behavior.
Table 131: SPI Clock Counter Register (S0SPCCR - address 0xE002 000C) bit description Bit 7:0 Symbol Counter Description SPI0 Clock counter setting. Reset value 0x00
The SPI0 rate may be calculated as: PCLK / SPCCR0 value. The PCLK rate is CCLK /VPB divider rate as determined by the VPBDIV register contents.
12.4.5 SPI Interrupt register (S0SPINT - 0xE002 001C)

This register contains the interrupt flag for the SPI0 interface.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
154
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 12: SPI
Table 132: SPI Interrupt register (S0SPINT - address 0xE002 001C) bit description Bit 0 Symbol SPI Interrupt Flag Description SPI interrupt flag. Set by the SPI interface to generate an interrupt. Cleared by writing a 1 to this bit. Note: this bit will be set once when SPIE = 1 and at least one of SPIF and WCOL bits is 1. However, only when the SPI Interrupt bit is set and SPI0 Interrupt is enabled in the VIC, SPI based interrupt can be processed by interrupt handling software. 7:1 Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA Reset value 0
12.5 Architecture
The block diagram of the SPI solution implemented in SPI0 interface is shown in the Figure 37.
SPI SHIFT REGISTER
MOSI_IN MOSI_OUT MISO_IN MISO_OUT
SPI Interrupt SPI REGISTER INTERFACE
SPI CLOCK GENERATOR & DETECTOR
SCK_IN SCK_OUT SS_IN
VPB Bus
SPI STATE CONTROL
OUTPUT ENABLE LOGIC
SCK_OUT_EN MOSI_OUT_EN MISO_OUT_EN
Fig 37. SPI block diagram
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
155
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP Controller (SPI1)
13.1 Features
Compatible with Motorola SPI, 4-wire TI SSI, and National Semiconductor Microwire
buses.
Synchronous Serial Communication Master or slave operation 8-frame FIFOs for both transmit and receive. 4 to 16 bits frame
13.2 Description
The SSP is a Synchronous Serial Port (SSP) controller capable of operation on a SPI, 4-wire SSI, or Microwire bus. It can interact with multiple masters and slaves on the bus. Only a single master and a single slave can communicate on the bus during a given data transfer. Data transfers are in principle full duplex, with frames of 4 to 16 bits of data flowing from the master to the slave and from the slave to the master. In practice it is often the case that only one of these data flows carries meaningful data.
Table 133: SSP pin descriptions Pin Name SCK1 Type I/O Interface pin name/function SPI SCK SSI CLK Microwire SK Pin Description Serial Clock. SCK/CLK/SK is a clock signal used to synchronize the transfer of data. It is driven by the master and received by the slave. When SPI interface is used the clock is programmable to be active high or active low, otherwise it is always active high. SCK1 only switches during a data transfer. Any other time, the SSP either holds it in its inactive state, or does not drive it (leaves it in high impedance state).
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
156
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
Table 133: SSP pin descriptions Pin Name SSEL1 Type I/O Interface pin name/function SPI SSEL SSI FS Microwire CS Pin Description Slave Select/Frame Sync/Chip Select. When the SSP is a bus master, it drives this signal from shortly before the start of serial data, to shortly after the end of serial data, to signify a data transfer as appropriate for the selected bus and mode. When the SSP is a bus slave, this signal qualifies the presence of data from the Master, according to the protocol in use. When there is just one bus master and one bus slave, the Frame Sync or Slave Select signal from the Master can be connected directly to the slaves corresponding input. When there is more than one slave on the bus, further qualification of their Frame Select/Slave Select inputs will typically be necessary to prevent more than one slave from responding to a transfer. Master In Slave Out. The MISO signal transfers serial data from the slave to the master. When the SSP is a slave, serial data is output on this signal. When the SSP is a master, it clocks in serial data from this signal. When the SSP is a slave and is not selected by SSEL, it does not drive this signal (leaves it in high impedance state). Master Out Slave In. The MOSI signal transfers serial data from the master to the slave. When the SSP is a master, it outputs serial data on this signal. When the SSP is a slave, it clocks in serial data from this signal.
MISO1
I/O
MISO
DR(M) DX(S)
SI(M) SO(S)
MOSI1
I/O
MOSI
DX(M) DR(S)
SO(M) SI(S)
13.3 Bus description

13.3.1 Texas Instruments Synchronous Serial (SSI) frame format
Figure 38 shows the 4-wire Texas Instruments synchronous serial frame format supported by the SSP module.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
157
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
CLK FS DX/DR MSB 4 to 16 bits a) Single frame transfer LSB
CLK FS DX/DR MSB 4 to 16 bits b) Continuous/back-to-back frames transfer LSB MSB 4 to 16 bits LSB
Fig 38. Texas Instruments synchronous serial frame format: a) single and b) continuous/back-to-back two frames transfer
For device configured as a master in this mode, CLK and FS are forced LOW, and the transmit data line DX is tristated whenever the SSP is idle. Once the bottom entry of the transmit FIFO contains data, FS is pulsed HIGH for one CLK period. The value to be transmitted is also transferred from the transmit FIFO to the serial shift register of the transmit logic. On the next rising edge of CLK, the MSB of the 4 to 16-bit data frame is shifted out on the DX pin. Likewise, the MSB of the received data is shifted onto the DR pin by the off-chip serial slave device. Both the SSP and the off-chip serial slave device then clock each data bit into their serial shifter on the falling edge of each CLK. The received data is transferred from the serial shifter to the receive FIFO on the first rising edge of CLK after the LSB has been latched.
13.3.2 SPI frame format

The SPI interface is a four-wire interface where the SSEL signal behaves as a slave select. The main feature of the SPI format is that the inactive state and phase of the SCK signal are programmable through the CPOL and CPHA bits within the SSPCR0 control register.
13.3.3 Clock Polarity (CPOL) and Clock Phase (CPHA) control

When the CPOL clock polarity control bit is LOW, it produces a steady state low value on the SCK pin. If the CPOL clock polarity control bit is HIGH, a steady state high value is placed on the CLK pin when data is not being transferred.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
158
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
The CPHA control bit selects the clock edge that captures data and allows it to change state. It has the most impact on the first bit transmitted by either allowing or not allowing a clock transition before the first data capture edge. When the CPHA phase control bit is LOW, data is captured on the first clock edge transition. If the CPHA clock phase control bit is HIGH, data is captured on the second clock edge transition.
13.3.4 SPI format with CPOL=0,CPHA=0

Single and continuous transmission signal sequences for SPI format with CPOL = 0, CPHA = 0 are shown in Figure 39.
SCK SSEL MOSI MISO MSB MSB 4 to 16 bits a) Motorola SPI frame format (single transfer) with CPOL=0 and CPHA=0 LSB LSB Q
SCK SSEL MOSI MISO MSB MSB 4 to 16 bits LSB LSB Q MSB MSB 4 to 16 bits LSB LSB Q
b) Motorola SPI frame format (continuous transfer) with CPOL=0 and CPHA=0
Fig 39. SPI frame format with CPOL=0 and CPHA=0 (a) single and b) continuous transfer)
In this configuration, during idle periods:
The CLK signal is forced LOW SSEL is forced HIGH The transmit MOSI/MISO pad is in high impedance
If the SSP is enabled and there is valid data within the transmit FIFO, the start of transmission is signified by the SSEL master signal being driven LOW. This causes slave data to be enabled onto the MISO input line of the master. Masters MOSI is enabled. One half SCK period later, valid master data is transferred to the MOSI pin. Now that both the master and slave data have been set, the SCK master clock pin goes HIGH after one further half SCK period. The data is now captured on the rising and propagated on the falling edges of the SCK signal.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
159
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
In the case of a single word transmission, after all bits of the data word have been transferred, the SSEL line is returned to its idle HIGH state one SCK period after the last bit has been captured. However, in the case of continuous back-to-back transmissions, the SSEL signal must be pulsed HIGH between each data word transfer. This is because the slave select pin freezes the data in its serial peripheral register and does not allow it to be altered if the CPHA bit is logic zero. Therefore the master device must raise the SSEL pin of the slave device between each data transfer to enable the serial peripheral data write. On completion of the continuous transfer, the SSEL pin is returned to its idle state one SCK period after the last bit has been captured.
13.3.5 SPI format with CPOL=0,CPHA=1

The transfer signal sequence for SPI format with CPOL = 0, CPHA = 1 is shown in Figure 40, which covers both single and continuous transfers.
SCK SSEL MOSI MISO Q MSB MSB 4 to 16 bits a) Motorola SPI frame format (single transfer) with CPOL=0 and CPHA=1 LSB LSB Q
Fig 40. SPI frame format with CPOL=0 and CPHA=1
The CLK signal is forced LOW SSEL is forced HIGH The transmit MOSI/MISO pad is in high impedance
If the SSP is enabled and there is valid data within the transmit FIFO, the start of transmission is signified by the SSEL master signal being driven LOW. Masters MOSI pin is enabled. After a further one half SCK period, both master and slave valid data is enabled onto their respective transmission lines. At the same time, the SCK is enabled with a rising edge transition. Data is then captured on the falling edges and propagated on the rising edges of the SCK signal. In the case of a single word transfer, after all bits have been transferred, the SSEL line is returned to its idle HIGH state one SCK period after the last bit has been captured. For continuous back-to-back transfers, the SSEL pin is held LOW between successive data words and termination is the same as that of the single word transfer.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
160
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
13.3.6 SPI format with CPOL = 1,CPHA = 0

Single and continuous transmission signal sequences for SPI format with CPOL=1, CPHA=0 are shown in Figure 41.
SCK SSEL MOSI MISO MSB MSB 4 to 16 bits a) Motorola SPI frame format (single transfer) with CPOL=1 and CPHA=0 LSB LSB Q
SCK SSEL MOSI MISO MSB MSB 4 to 16 bits LSB LSB Q MSB MSB 4 to 16 bits LSB LSB Q
b) Motorola SPI frame format (continuous transfer) with CPOL=1 and CPHA=0
Fig 41. SPI frame format with CPOL = 1 and CPHA = 0 (a) single and b) continuous transfer)
The CLK signal is forced HIGH SSEL is forced HIGH The transmit MOSI/MISO pad is in high impedance
If the SSP is enabled and there is valid data within the transmit FIFO, the start of transmission is signified by the SSEL master signal being driven LOW, which causes slave data to be immediately transferred onto the MISO line of the master. Masters MOSI pin is enabled. One half period later, valid master data is transferred to the MOSI line. Now that both the master and slave data have been set, the SCK master clock pin becomes LOW after one further half SCK period. This means that data is captured on the falling edges and be propagated on the rising edges of the SCK signal. In the case of a single word transmission, after all bits of the data word are transferred, the SSEL line is returned to its idle HIGH state one SCK period after the last bit has been captured. However, in the case of continuous back-to-back transmissions, the SSEL signal must be pulsed HIGH between each data word transfer. This is because the slave select pin freezes the data in its serial peripheral register and does not allow it to be altered if the CPHA bit is logic zero. Therefore the master device must raise the SSEL pin of the slave
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
161
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
device between each data transfer to enable the serial peripheral data write. On completion of the continuous transfer, the SSEL pin is returned to its idle state one SCK period after the last bit has been captured.
13.3.7 SPI format with CPOL = 1,CPHA = 1

The transfer signal sequence for SPI format with CPOL = 1, CPHA = 1 is shown in Figure 42, which covers both single and continuous transfers.
SCK SSEL MOSI MISO Q MSB MSB 4 to 16 bits a) Motorola SPI frame format (single transfer) with CPOL=1 and CPHA=1 LSB LSB Q
Fig 42. SPI frame format with CPOL = 1 and CPHA = 1
The CLK signal is forced HIGH SSEL is forced HIGH The transmit MOSI/MISO pad is in high impedance
If the SSP is enabled and there is valid data within the transmit FIFO, the start of transmission is signified by the SSEL master signal being driven LOW. Masters MOSI is enabled. After a further one half SCK period, both master and slave data are enabled onto their respective transmission lines. At the same time, the SCK is enabled with a falling edge transition. Data is then captured on the rising edges and propagated on the falling edges of the SCK signal. After all bits have been transferred, in the case of a single word transmission, the SSEL line is returned to its idle HIGH state one SCK period after the last bit has been captured. For continuous back-to-back transmissions, the SSEL pins remains in its active LOW state, until the final bit of the last word has been captured, and then returns to its idle state as described above. In general, for continuous back-to-back transfers the SSEL pin is held LOW between successive data words and termination is the same as that of the single word transfer.
13.3.8 Semiconductor Microwire frame format

Figure 43 shows the Microwire frame format for a single frame. Figure 44 shows the same format when back-to-back frames are transmitted.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
162
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
SK
CS
SO
MSB 8 bit control
LSB
SI
MSB 4 to 16 bits output data
LSB
Fig 43. Microwire frame format (single transfer)
Microwire format is very similar to SPI format, except that transmission is half-duplex instead of full-duplex, using a master-slave message passing technique. Each serial transmission begins with an 8-bit control word that is transmitted from the SSP to the off-chip slave device. During this transmission, no incoming data is received by the SSP. After the message has been sent, the off-chip slave decodes it and, after waiting one serial clock after the last bit of the 8-bit control message has been sent, responds with the required data. The returned data is 4 to 16 bits in length, making the total frame length anywhere from 13 to 25 bits. In this configuration, during idle periods:
The SK signal is forced LOW CS is forced HIGH The transmit data line SO is arbitrarily forced LOW
A transmission is triggered by writing a control byte to the transmit FIFO.The falling edge of CS causes the value contained in the bottom entry of the transmit FIFO to be transferred to the serial shift register of the transmit logic, and the MSB of the 8-bit control frame to be shifted out onto the SO pin. CS remains LOW for the duration of the frame transmission. The SI pin remains tristated during this transmission. The off-chip serial slave device latches each control bit into its serial shifter on the rising edge of each SK. After the last bit is latched by the slave device, the control byte is decoded during a one clock wait-state, and the slave responds by transmitting data back to the SSP. Each bit is driven onto SI line on the falling edge of SK. The SSP in turn latches each bit on the rising edge of SK. At the end of the frame, for single transfers, the CS signal is pulled HIGH one clock period after the last bit has been latched in the receive serial shifter, that causes the data to be transferred to the receive FIFO. Note: The off-chip slave device can tristate the receive line either on the falling edge of SK after the LSB has been latched by the receive shiftier, or when the CS pin goes HIGH. For continuous transfers, data transmission begins and ends in the same manner as a single transfer. However, the CS line is continuously asserted (held LOW) and transmission of data occurs back to back. The control byte of the next frame follows directly after the LSB of the received data from the current frame. Each of the received values is transferred from the receive shifter on the falling edge SK, after the LSB of the frame has been latched into the SSP.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
163
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
SK
CS
SO
LSB
MSB 8 bit control
LSB
SI
LSB
LSB
Fig 44. Microwire frame format (continuos transfers)
13.3.9 Setup and hold time requirements on CS with respect to SK in Microwire mode
In the Microwire mode, the SSP slave samples the first bit of receive data on the rising edge of SK after CS has gone LOW. Masters that drive a free-running SK must ensure that the CS signal has sufficient setup and hold margins with respect to the rising edge of SK. Figure 45 illustrates these setup and hold time requirements. With respect to the SK rising edge on which the first bit of receive data is to be sampled by the SSP slave, CS must have a setup of at least two times the period of SK on which the SSP operates. With respect to the SK rising edge previous to this edge, CS must have a hold of at least one SK period.
t t HOLD =t SK
=2t SETUP SK
SK CS SI
Fig 45. Microwire frame format (continuos transfers)

The SSP contains 9 registers as shown in Table 134. All registers are byte, half word and word accessible.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
164
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
Table 134: SSP register map Name SSPCR0 SSPCR1 SSPDR SSPSR SSPIMSC SSPRIS SSPMIS SSPICR
[1]
Description
Access
Reset value[1] Address 0x0000 0x00 0x0000 0x03 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x00 NA 0xE006 8000 0xE006 8004 0xE006 8008 0xE006 800C 0xE006 8010 0xE006 8014 0xE006 8018 0xE006 801C 0xE006 8020
Control Register 0. Selects the serial clock R/W rate, bus type, and data size. Control Register 1. Selects master/slave and other modes. R/W
Data Register. Writes fill the transmit FIFO, R/W and reads empty the receive FIFO. Status Register Interrupt Mask Set and Clear Register Raw Interrupt Status Register Masked Interrupt Status Register SSPICR Interrupt Clear Register RO R/W R/W R/W RO WO
SSPCPSR Clock Prescale Register
13.4.1 SSP Control Register 0 (SSPCR0 - 0xE006 8000)

This register controls the basic operation of the SSP controller.
Table 135: SSP Control Register 0 (SSPCR0 - address 0xE006 8000) bit description Bit 3:0 Symbol DSS Value Description Data Size Select. This field controls the number of bits transferred in each frame. Values 0000-0010 are not supported and should not be used. 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 5:4 FRF 00 01 10 11 4 bit transfer 5 bit transfer 6 bit transfer 7 bit transfer 8 bit transfer 9 bit transfer 10 bit transfer 11 bit transfer 12 bit transfer 13 bit transfer 14 bit transfer 15 bit transfer 16 bit transfer Frame Format. SPI SSI Microwire This combinationion is not supported and should not be used. 00 Reset value 0000
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
165
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
Table 135: SSP Control Register 0 (SSPCR0 - address 0xE006 8000) bit description Bit 6 Symbol CPOL 0 1 Value Description Clock Out Polarity. This bit is only used in SPI mode. SSP controller captures serial data on the first clock transition of the frame, that is, the transition away from the inter-frame state of the clock line. SSP controller captures serial data on the second clock transition of the frame, that is, the transition back to the inter-frame state of the clock line. Clock Out Phase. This bit is only used in SPI mode. 0 1 15:8 SCR SSP controller maintains the bus clock low between frames. SSP controller maintains the bus clock high between frames. Serial Clock Rate. The number of prescaler-output clocks per 0x00 bit on the bus, minus one. Given that CPSDVR is the prescale divider, and the VPB clock PCLK clocks the prescaler, the bit frequency is PCLK / (CPSDVSR * [SCR+1]). 0 Reset value 0
CPHA
13.4.2 SSP Control Register 1 (SSPCR1 - 0xE006 8004)

This register controls certain aspects of the operation of the SSP controller.
Table 136: SSP Control Register 1 (SSPCR1 - address 0xE006 8004) bit description Bit 0 Symbol LBM 0 1 Value Description Loop Back Mode. During normal operation. Serial input is taken from the serial output (MOSI or MISO) rather than the serial input pin (MISO or MOSI respectively). SSP Enable. 0 1 The SSP controller is disabled. The SSP controller will interact with other devices on the serial bus. Software should write the appropriate control information to the other SSP registers and interrupt controller registers, before setting this bit. Master/Slave Mode.This bit can only be written when the SSE bit is 0. 0 1 3 SOD The SSP controller acts as a master on the bus, driving the SCLK, MOSI, and SSEL lines and receiving the MISO line. The SSP controller acts as a slave on the bus, driving MISO line and receiving SCLK, MOSI, and SSEL lines. Slave Output Disable. This bit is relevant only in slave mode (MS = 1). If it is 1, this blocks this SSP controller from driving the transmit data line (MISO). 0 0 0 Reset value 0
SSE
MS
7:4
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved NA bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
166
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
13.4.3 SSP Data Register (SSPDR - 0xE006 8008)

Software can write data to be transmitted to this register, and read data that has been received.
Table 137: SSP Data Register (SSPDR - address 0xE006 8008) bit description Bit 15:0 Symbol DATA Description Reset value Write: software can write data to be sent in a future frame to this 0x0000 register whenever the TNF bit in the Status register is 1, indicating that the Tx FIFO is not full. If the Tx FIFO was previously empty and the SSP controller is not busy on the bus, transmission of the data will begin immediately. Otherwise the data written to this register will be sent as soon as all previous data has been sent (and received). If the data length is less than 16 bits, software must right-justify the data written to this register. Read: software can read data from this register whenever the RNE bit in the Status register is 1, indicating that the Rx FIFO is not empty. When software reads this register, the SSP controller returns data from the least recent frame in the Rx FIFO. If the data length is less than 16 bits, the data is right-justified in this field with higher order bits filled with 0s.
13.4.4 SSP Status Register (SSPSR - 0xE006 800C)

This read-only register reflects the current status of the SSP controller.
Table 138: SSP Status Register (SSPDR - address 0xE006 800C) bit description Bit 0 1 2 3 4 Symbol TFE TNF RNE RFF BSY Description Reset value Transmit FIFO Empty. This bit is 1 is the Transmit FIFO is empty, 1 0 if not. Transmit FIFO Not Full. This bit is 0 if the Tx FIFO is full, 1 if not. 1 Receive FIFO Not Empty. This bit is 0 if the Receive FIFO is empty, 1 if not. Receive FIFO Full. This bit is 1 if the Receive FIFO is full, 0 if not. Busy. This bit is 0 if the SSP controller is idle, or 1 if it is currently sending/receiving a frame and/or the Tx FIFO is not empty. 0 0 0
7:5
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. NA The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
13.4.5 SSP Clock Prescale Register (SSPCPSR - 0xE006 8010)

This register controls the factor by which the Prescaler divides the VPB clock PCLK to yield the prescaler clock that is, in turn, divided by the SCR factor in SSPCR0, to determine the bit clock.
Table 139: SSP Clock Prescale Register (SSPCPSR - address 0xE006 8010) bit description Bit 7:0 Symbol Description Reset value CPSDVSR This even value between 2 and 254, by which PCLK is divided 0 to yield the prescaler output clock. Bit 0 always reads as 0.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
167
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
Important: the SSPCPSR value must be properly initialized or the SSP controller will not be able to transmit data corectly. In case of an SSP operating in the master mode, the CPSDVSRmin = 2, while in case of the slave mode CPSDVSRmin = 12.
13.4.6 SSP Interrupt Mask Set/Clear register (SSPIMSC - 0xE006 8014)

This register controls whether each of the four possible interrupt conditions in the SSP controller are enabled. Note that ARM uses the word masked in the opposite sense from classic computer terminology, in which masked meant disabled. ARM uses the word masked to mean enabled. To avoid confusion we will not use the word masked.
Table 140: SSP Interrupt Mask Set/Clear register (SSPIMSC - address 0xE006 8014) bit description Bit 0 Symbol RORIM Description Reset value Software should set this bit to enable interrupt when a Receive 0 Overrun occurs, that is, when the Rx FIFO is full and another frame is completely received. The ARM spec implies that the preceding frame data is overwritten by the new frame data when this occurs. Software should set this bit to enable interrupt when a Receive 0 Timeout condition occurs. A Receive Timeout occurs when the Rx FIFO is not empty, and no new data has been received, nor has data been read from the FIFO, for 32 bit times. Software should set this bit to enable interrupt when the Rx FIFO is at least half full. Software should set this bit to enable interrupt when the Tx FIFO is at least half empty. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. 0 0 NA
RTIM
2 3 7:4
RXIM TXIM -
13.4.7 SSP Raw Interrupt Status register (SSPRIS - 0xE006 8018)

This read-only register contains a 1 for each interrupt condition that is asserted, regardless of whether or not the interrupt is enabled in the SSPIMSC.
Table 141: SSP Raw Interrupt Status register (SSPRIS - address 0xE006 8018) bit description Bit 0 Symbol RORRIS Description Reset value This bit is 1 if another frame was completely received while the 0 RxFIFO was full. The ARM spec implies that the preceding frame data is overwritten by the new frame data when this occurs. This bit is 1 if when there is a Receive Timeout condition. Note 0 that a Receive Timeout can be negated if further data is received. This bit is 1 if the Rx FIFO is at least half full. This bit is 1 if the Tx FIFO is at least half empty. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. 0 1 NA
RTRIS
2 3 7:4
RXRIS TXRIS -
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
168
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 13: SSP
13.4.8 SSP Masked Interrupt register (SSPMIS - 0xE006 801C)

This read-only register contains a 1 for each interrupt condition that is asserted and enabled in the SSPIMSC. When an SSP interrupt occurs, the interrupt service routine should read this register to determine the cause(s) of the interrupt.
Table 142: SSP Masked Interrupt Status register (SSPMIS -address 0xE006 801C) bit description Bit 0 1 Symbol RORMIS RTMIS Description Reset value This bit is 1 if another frame was completely received while the 0 RxFIFO was full, and this interrupt is enabled. This bit is 1 when there is a Receive Timeout condition and this interrupt is enabled. Note that a Receive Timeout can be negated if further data is received. 0
2 3 7:5
RXMIS TXMIS -
This bit is 1 if the Rx FIFO is at least half full, and this interrupt 0 is enabled. This bit is 1 if the Tx FIFO is at least half empty, and this interrupt is enabled. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. 0 NA
13.4.9 SSP Interrupt Clear Register (SSPICR - 0xE006 8020)

Software can write one or more one(s) to this write-only register, to clear the corresponding interrupt condition(s) in the SSP controller. Note that the other two interrupt conditions can be cleared by writing or reading the appropriate FIFO, or disabled by clearing the corresponding bit in SSPIMSC.
Table 143: SSP interrupt Clear Register (SSPICR - address 0xE006 8020) bit description Bit 0 1 7:2 Symbol RORIC RTIC Description Writing a 1 to this bit clears the frame was received when RxFIFO was full interrupt. Writing a 1 to this bit clears the Receive Timeout interrupt. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value NA NA NA
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
169
UM10120
Chapter 14: Timer/Counter TIMER0 and TIMER1
Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 are functionally identical except for the peripheral base address.
14.1 Features
A 32-bit Timer/Counter with a programmable 32-bit Prescaler. Counter or Timer operation Up to four 32-bit capture channels per timer, that can take a snapshot of the timer
value when an input signal transitions. A capture event may also optionally generate an interrupt.
Four 32-bit match registers that allow:

Continuous operation with optional interrupt generation on match. Stop timer on match with optional interrupt generation. Reset timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
Up to four external outputs corresponding to match registers, with the following

capabilities: Set low on match. Set high on match. Toggle on match. Do nothing on match.
14.2 Applications
Interval Timer for counting internal events. Pulse Width Demodulator via Capture inputs. Free running timer.
14.3 Description
The Timer/Counter is designed to count cycles of the peripheral clock (PCLK) or an externally-supplied clock, and can optionally generate interrupts or perform other actions at specified timer values, based on four match registers. It also includes four capture inputs to trap the timer value when an input signal transitions, optionally generating an interrupt.

Table 144 gives a brief summary of each of the Timer/Counter related pins.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
170
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 14: TIMER0 and TIMER1
Table 144: Timer/Counter pin description Pin CAP0.3..0 CAP1.3..0 Type Input Description Capture Signals- A transition on a capture pin can be configured to load one of the Capture Registers with the value in the Timer Counter and optionally generate an interrupt. Capture functionality can be selected from a number of pins. When more than one pin is selected for a Capture input on a single TIMER0/1 channel, the pin with the lowest Port number is used. If for example pins 30 (P0.6) and 46 (P0.16) are selected for CAP0.2, only pin 30 will be used by TIMER0 to perform CAP0.2 function. Here is the list of all CAPTURE signals, together with pins on where they can be selected:
CAP0.0 (3 pins) : P0.2, P0.22 and P0.30 CAP0.1 (2 pins) : P0.4 and P0.27 CAP0.2 (3 pin) : P0.6, P0.16 and P0.28 CAP0.3 (1 pin) : P0.29 CAP1.0 (1 pin) : P0.10 CAP1.1 (1 pin) : P0.11 CAP1.2 (2 pins) : P0.17 and P0.19 CAP1.3 (2 pins) : P0.18 and P0.21
Timer/Counter block can select a capture signal as a clock source instead of the PCLK derived clock. For more details see Section 14.5.3 Count Control Register (CTCR, TIMER0: T0CTCR - 0xE000 4070 and TIMER1: T1TCR - 0xE000 8070) on page 174. MAT0.3..0 MAT1.3..0 Output External Match Output 0/1- When a match register 0/1 (MR3:0) equals the timer counter (TC) this output can either toggle, go low, go high, or do nothing. The External Match Register (EMR) controls the functionality of this output. Match Output functionality can be selected on a number of pins in parallel. It is also possible for example, to have 2 pins selected at the same time so that they provide MAT1.3 function in parallel. Here is the list of all MATCH signals, together with pins on where they can be selected:
MAT0.0 (2 pins) : P0.3 and P0.22 MAT0.1 (2 pins) : P0.5 and P0.27 MAT0.2 (2 pin) : P0.16 and P0.28 MAT0.3 (1 pin) : P0.29 MAT1.0 (1 pin) : P0.12 MAT1.1 (1 pin) : P0.13 MAT1.2 (2 pins) : P0.17 and P0.19 MAT1.3 (2 pins) : P0.18 and P0.20

Each Timer/Counter contains the registers shown in Table 145. More detailed descriptions follow.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
171
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 145: TIMER/COUNTER0 and TIMER/COUNTER1 register map Generic Description Name IR Interrupt Register. The IR can be written to clear interrupts. The IR can be read to identify which of eight possible interrupt sources are pending. Access Reset value[1] 0 TIMER/ TIMER/ COUNTER0 COUNTER1 Address & Name Address & Name 0xE000 4000 T0IR 0xE000 4004 T0TCR 0xE000 4008 T0TC 0xE000 400C T0PR 0xE000 4010 T0PC 0xE000 8000 T1IR 0xE000 8004 T1TCR 0xE000 8008 T1TC 0xE000 800C T1PR 0xE000 8010 T1PC
R/W
TCR
Timer Control Register. The TCR is used to control R/W the Timer Counter functions. The Timer Counter can be disabled or reset through the TCR. Timer Counter. The 32-bit TC is incremented every PR+1 cycles of PCLK. The TC is controlled through the TCR. R/W
TC
PR
Prescale Register. The Prescale Counter (below) is R/W equal to this value, the next clock increments the TC and clears the PC. Prescale Counter. The 32-bit PC is a counter which is incremented to the value stored in PR. When the value in PR is reached, the TC is incremented and the PC is cleared. The PC is observable and controllable through the bus interface. Match Control Register. The MCR is used to control if an interrupt is generated and if the TC is reset when a Match occurs. Match Register 0. MR0 can be enabled through the MCR to reset the TC, stop both the TC and PC, and/or generate an interrupt every time MR0 matches the TC. Match Register 1. See MR0 description. Match Register 2. See MR0 description. Match Register 3. See MR0 description. R/W
PC
MCR
R/W
0xE0004014 T0MCR 0xE000 4018 T0MR0
0xE000 8014 T1MCR 0xE000 8018 T1MR0
MR0
R/W
MR1 MR2 MR3 CCR
R/W R/W R/W
0 0 0 0
0xE000 401C T0MR1 0xE000 4020 T0MR2 0xE000 4024 T0MR3 0xE000 4028 T0CCR
0xE000 801C T1MR1 0xE000 8020 T1MR2 0xE000 8024 T1MR3 0xE000 8028 T1CCR
Capture Control Register. The CCR controls which R/W edges of the capture inputs are used to load the Capture Registers and whether or not an interrupt is generated when a capture takes place. Capture Register 0. CR0 is loaded with the value of RO TC when there is an event on the CAPn.0(CAP0.0 or CAP1.0 respectively) input. Capture Register 1. See CR0 description. Capture Register 2. See CR0 description. RO RO
CR0
0xE000 402C T0CR0 0xE000 4030 T0CR1 0xE000 4034 T0CR2
0xE000 802C T1CR0 0xE000 8030 T1CR1 0xE000 8034 T1CR2
CR1 CR2
0 0
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
172
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 145: TIMER/COUNTER0 and TIMER/COUNTER1 register map Generic Description Name CR3 EMR Capture Register 3. See CR0 description. External Match Register. The EMR controls the external match pins MATn.0-3 (MAT0.0-3 and MAT1.0-3 respectively). Access Reset value[1] 0 0 TIMER/ TIMER/ COUNTER0 COUNTER1 Address & Name Address & Name 0xE000 4038 T0CR3 0xE000 403C T0EMR 0xE000 4070 T0CTCR 0xE000 8038 T1CR3 0xE000 803C T1EMR 0xE000 8070 T1CTCR
RO R/W
CTCR
Count Control Register. The CTCR selects between R/W Timer and Counter mode, and in Counter mode selects the signal and edge(s) for counting.
[1]
14.5.1 Interrupt Register (IR, TIMER0: T0IR - 0xE000 4000 and TIMER1: T1IR - 0xE000 8000)
The Interrupt Register consists of four bits for the match interrupts and four bits for the capture interrupts. If an interrupt is generated then the corresponding bit in the IR will be high. Otherwise, the bit will be low. Writing a logic one to the corresponding IR bit will reset the interrupt. Writing a zero has no effect.
Table 146: Interrupt Register (IR, TIMER0: T0IR - address 0xE000 4000 and TIMER1: T1IR - address 0xE000 8000) bit description Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Symbol MR0 Interrupt MR1 Interrupt MR2 Interrupt MR3 Interrupt CR0 Interrupt CR1 Interrupt CR2 Interrupt CR3 Interrupt Description Interrupt flag for match channel 0. Interrupt flag for match channel 1. Interrupt flag for match channel 2. Interrupt flag for match channel 3. Interrupt flag for capture channel 0 event. Interrupt flag for capture channel 1 event. Interrupt flag for capture channel 2 event. Interrupt flag for capture channel 3 event. Reset value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
14.5.2 Timer Control Register (TCR, TIMER0: T0TCR - 0xE000 4004 and TIMER1: T1TCR - 0xE000 8004)
The Timer Control Register (TCR) is used to control the operation of the Timer/Counter.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
173
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 147: Timer Control Register (TCR, TIMER0: T0TCR - address 0xE000 4004 and TIMER1: T1TCR - address 0xE000 8004) bit description Bit 0 Symbol Description Reset value Counter Enable When one, the Timer Counter and Prescale Counter are 0 enabled for counting. When zero, the counters are disabled. Counter Reset When one, the Timer Counter and the Prescale Counter 0 are synchronously reset on the next positive edge of PCLK. The counters remain reset until TCR[1] is returned to zero. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA
7:2
14.5.3 Count Control Register (CTCR, TIMER0: T0CTCR - 0xE000 4070 and TIMER1: T1TCR - 0xE000 8070)
The Count Control Register (CTCR) is used to select between Timer and Counter mode, and in Counter mode to select the pin and edge(s) for counting. When Counter Mode is chosen as a mode of operation, the CAP input (selected by the CTCR bits 3:2) is sampled on every rising edge of the PCLK clock. After comparing two consecutive samples of this CAP input, one of the following four events is recognized: rising edge, falling edge, either of edges or no changes in the level of the selected CAP input. Only if the identified event corresponds to the one selected by bits 1:0 in the CTCR register, the Timer Counter register will be incremented. Effective processing of the externaly supplied clock to the counter has some limitations. Since two successive rising edges of the PCLK clock are used to identify only one edge on the CAP selected input, the frequency of the CAP input can not exceed one half of the PCLK clock. Consequently, duration of the high/low levels on the same CAP input in this case can not be shorter than 1/PCLK.
Table 148: Count Control Register (CTCR, TIMER0: T0CTCR - address 0xE000 4070 and TIMER1: T1TCR - address 0xE000 8070) bit description Bit 1:0 Symbol Counter/ Timer Mode 00 01 10 11 Value Description This field selects which rising PCLK edges can increment Timers Prescale Counter (PC), or clear PC and increment Timer Counter (TC). Timer Mode: every rising PCLK edge Counter Mode: TC is incremented on rising edges on the CAP input selected by bits 3:2. Counter Mode: TC is incremented on falling edges on the CAP input selected by bits 3:2. Counter Mode: TC is incremented on both edges on the CAP input selected by bits 3:2. Reset value 00
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
174
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 148: Count Control Register (CTCR, TIMER0: T0CTCR - address 0xE000 4070 and TIMER1: T1TCR - address 0xE000 8070) bit description Bit 3:2 Symbol Count Input Select Value Description When bits 1:0 in this register are not 00, these bits select which CAP pin is sampled for clocking: 00 01 10 11 CAPn.0 (CAP0.0 for TIMER0 and CAP1.0 for TIMER1) CAPn.1 (CAP0.1 for TIMER0 and CAP1.1 for TIMER1) CAPn.2 (CAP0.2 for TIMER0 and CAP1.2 for TIMER1) CAPn.3 (CAP0.3 for TIMER0 and CAP1.3 for TIMER1) Note: If Counter mode is selected for a particular CAPn input in the TnCTCR, the 3 bits for that input in the Capture Control Register (TnCCR) must be programmed as 000. However, capture and/or interrupt can be selected for the other 3 CAPn inputs in the same timer. 7:4 Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA Reset value 00
14.5.4 Timer Counter (TC, TIMER0: T0TC - 0xE000 4008 and TIMER1: T1TC - 0xE000 8008)
The 32-bit Timer Counter is incremented when the Prescale Counter reaches its terminal count. Unless it is reset before reaching its upper limit, the TC will count up through the value 0xFFFF FFFF and then wrap back to the value 0x0000 0000. This event does not cause an interrupt, but a Match register can be used to detect an overflow if needed.
14.5.5 Prescale Register (PR, TIMER0: T0PR - 0xE000 400C and TIMER1: T1PR - 0xE000 800C)
The 32-bit Prescale Register specifies the maximum value for the Prescale Counter.
14.5.6 Prescale Counter Register (PC, TIMER0: T0PC - 0xE000 4010 and TIMER1: T1PC - 0xE000 8010)
The 32-bit Prescale Counter controls division of PCLK by some constant value before it is applied to the Timer Counter. This allows control of the relationship of the resolution of the timer versus the maximum time before the timer overflows. The Prescale Counter is incremented on every PCLK. When it reaches the value stored in the Prescale Register, the Timer Counter is incremented and the Prescale Counter is reset on the next PCLK. This causes the TC to increment on every PCLK when PR = 0, every 2 PCLKs when PR = 1, etc.
14.5.7 Match Registers (MR0 - MR3)

The Match register values are continuously compared to the Timer Counter value. When the two values are equal, actions can be triggered automatically. The action possibilities are to generate an interrupt, reset the Timer Counter, or stop the timer. Actions are controlled by the settings in the MCR register.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
175
Volume 1
UM10120
14.5.8 Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR - 0xE000 4014 and TIMER1: T1MCR - 0xE000 8014)
The Match Control Register is used to control what operations are performed when one of the Match Registers matches the Timer Counter. The function of each of the bits is shown in Table 149.
Table 149: Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR - address 0xE000 4014 and TIMER1: T1MCR - address 0xE000 8014) bit description Bit 15:12 11 Symbol MR3S 1 0 10 9 8 MR3R MR3I MR2S 1 0 1 0 1 0 7 6 5 MR2R MR2I MR1S 1 0 1 0 1 0 4 3 2 MR1R MR1I MR0S 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 MR0R MR0I 1 0 1 0 Value Description Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value NA
Stop on MR3: the TC and PC will be stopped and TCR[0] will be set to 0 if MR3 matches 0 the TC. Feature disabled. Reset on MR3: the TC will be reset if MR3 matches it. Feature disabled. Interrupt on MR3: an interrupt is generated when MR3 matches the value in the TC. This interrupt is disabled Stop on MR2: the TC and PC will be stopped and TCR[0] will be set to 0 if MR2 matches 0 the TC. Feature disabled. Reset on MR2: the TC will be reset if MR2 matches it. Feature disabled. Interrupt on MR2: an interrupt is generated when MR2 matches the value in the TC. This interrupt is disabled Stop on MR1: the TC and PC will be stopped and TCR[0] will be set to 0 if MR1 matches 0 the TC. Feature disabled. Reset on MR1: the TC will be reset if MR1 matches it. Feature disabled. Interrupt on MR1: an interrupt is generated when MR1 matches the value in the TC. This interrupt is disabled Stop on MR0: the TC and PC will be stopped and TCR[0] will be set to 0 if MR0 matches 0 the TC. Feature disabled. Reset on MR0: the TC will be reset if MR0 matches it. Feature disabled. Interrupt on MR0: an interrupt is generated when MR0 matches the value in the TC. This interrupt is disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
176
Volume 1
UM10120
14.5.9 Capture Registers (CR0 - CR3)

Each Capture register is associated with a device pin and may be loaded with the Timer Counter value when a specified event occurs on that pin. The settings in the Capture Control Register register determine whether the capture function is enabled, and whether a capture event happens on the rising edge of the associated pin, the falling edge, or on both edges.
14.5.10 Capture Control Register (CCR, TIMER0: T0CCR - 0xE000 4028 and TIMER1: T1CCR - 0xE000 8028)
The Capture Control Register is used to control whether one of the four Capture Registers is loaded with the value in the Timer Counter when the capture event occurs, and whether an interrupt is generated by the capture event. Setting both the rising and falling bits at the same time is a valid configuration, resulting in a capture event for both edges. In the description below, "n" represents the Timer number, 0 or 1.
Table 150: Capture Control Register (CCR, TIMER0: T0CCR - address 0xE000 4028 and TIMER1: T1CCR - address 0xE000 8028) bit description Bit 0 Symbol CAP0RE Value Description 1 0 1 CAP0FE 1 0 2 3 CAP0I CAP1RE 1 0 1 0 4 CAP1FE 1 0 5 6 CAP1I CAP2RE 1 0 1 0 7 CAP2FE 1 0 8 9 CAP2I CAP3RE 1 0 1 0 Capture on CAPn.0 rising edge: a sequence of 0 then 1 on CAPn.0 will cause CR0 to be loaded with the contents of TC. This feature is disabled. Capture on CAPn.0 falling edge: a sequence of 1 then 0 on CAPn.0 will cause CR0 to be loaded with the contents of TC. This feature is disabled. Interrupt on CAPn.0 event: a CR0 load due to a CAPn.0 event will generate an interrupt. 0 This feature is disabled. Capture on CAPn.1 rising edge: a sequence of 0 then 1 on CAPn.1 will cause CR1 to be loaded with the contents of TC. This feature is disabled. Capture on CAPn.1 falling edge: a sequence of 1 then 0 on CAPn.1 will cause CR1 to be loaded with the contents of TC. This feature is disabled. Interrupt on CAPn.1 event: a CR1 load due to a CAPn.1 event will generate an interrupt. 0 This feature is disabled. Capture on CAPn.2 rising edge: A sequence of 0 then 1 on CAPn.2 will cause CR2 to be loaded with the contents of TC. This feature is disabled. Capture on CAPn.2 falling edge: a sequence of 1 then 0 on CAPn.2 will cause CR2 to be loaded with the contents of TC. This feature is disabled. Interrupt on CAPn.2 event: a CR2 load due to a CAPn.2 event will generate an interrupt. 0 This feature is disabled. Capture on CAPn.3 rising edge: a sequence of 0 then 1 on CAPn.3 will cause CR3 to be loaded with the contents of TC. This feature is disabled. 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reset value 0
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
177
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 150: Capture Control Register (CCR, TIMER0: T0CCR - address 0xE000 4028 and TIMER1: T1CCR - address 0xE000 8028) bit description Bit 10 Symbol CAP3FE Value Description 1 0 11 CAP3I 1 0 15:12 Capture on CAPn.3 falling edge: a sequence of 1 then 0 on CAPn.3 will cause CR3 to be loaded with the contents of TC This feature is disabled. Interrupt on CAPn.3 event: a CR3 load due to a CAPn.3 event will generate an interrupt. 0 This feature is disabled. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA Reset value 0
14.5.11 External Match Register (EMR, TIMER0: T0EMR - 0xE000 403C; and TIMER1: T1EMR - 0xE000 803C)
The External Match Register provides both control and status of the external match pins MAT(0-3).
Table 151: External Match Register (EMR, TIMER0: T0EMR - address 0xE000 403C and TIMER1: T1EMR address0xE000 803C) bit description Bit 0 Symbol EM0 Description Reset value
External Match 0. This bit reflects the state of output MAT0.0/MAT1.0, whether or not this 0 output is connected to its pin. When a match occurs between the TC and MR0, this output of the timer can either toggle, go low, go high, or do nothing. Bits EMR[5:4] control the functionality of this output. External Match 1. This bit reflects the state of output MAT0.1/MAT1.1, whether or not this 0 output is connected to its pin. When a match occurs between the TC and MR1, this output of the timer can either toggle, go low, go high, or do nothing. Bits EMR[7:6] control the functionality of this output. External Match 2. This bit reflects the state of output MAT0.2/MAT1.2, whether or not this 0 output is connected to its pin. When a match occurs between the TC and MR2, this output of the timer can either toggle, go low, go high, or do nothing. Bits EMR[9:8] control the functionality of this output. External Match 3. This bit reflects the state of output MAT0.3/MAT1.3, whether or not this 0 output is connected to its pin. When a match occurs between the TC and MR3, this output of the timer can either toggle, go low, go high, or do nothing. Bits EMR[11:10] control the functionality of this output. External Match Control 0. Determines the functionality of External Match 0. Table 152 shows the encoding of these bits. External Match Control 1. Determines the functionality of External Match 1. Table 152 shows the encoding of these bits. External Match Control 2. Determines the functionality of External Match 2. Table 152 shows the encoding of these bits. External Match Control 3. Determines the functionality of External Match 3. Table 152 shows the encoding of these bits. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. 00 00 00 00 NA
EM1
EM2
EM3
5:4 7:6 9:8 11:10 15:12
EMC0 EMC1 EMC2 EMC3 -
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
178
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 152: External match control EMR[11:10], EMR[9:8], EMR[7:6], or EMR[5:4] 00 01 10 11 Function Do Nothing. Clear the corresponding External Match bit/output to 0 (MATn.m pin is LOW if pinned out). Set the corresponding External Match bit/output to 1 (MATn.m pin is HIGH if pinned out). Toggle the corresponding External Match bit/output.
14.6 Example timer operation

Figure 46 shows a timer configured to reset the count and generate an interrupt on match. The prescaler is set to 2 and the match register set to 6. At the end of the timer cycle where the match occurs, the timer count is reset. This gives a full length cycle to the match value. The interrupt indicating that a match occurred is generated in the next clock after the timer reached the match value. Figure 47 shows a timer configured to stop and generate an interrupt on match. The prescaler is again set to 2 and the match register set to 6. In the next clock after the timer reaches the match value, the timer enable bit in TCR is cleared, and the interrupt indicating that a match occurred is generated.
PCLK Prescale counter Timer counter Timer counter reset Iterrupt 2 4 0 1 5 2 0 1 6 2 0 1 0 2 0 1 1
Fig 46. A timer cycle in which PR=2, MRx=6, and both interrupt and reset on match are enabled
PCLK Prescale counter Timer counter TCR[0] (counter enable) Iterrupt 2 4 0 1 5 1 2 0 6 0
Fig 47. A timer cycle in which PR=2, MRx=6, and both interrupt and stop on match are enabled
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
179
Volume 1
UM10120
14.7 Architecture
The block diagram for TIMER/COUNTER0 and TIMER/COUNTER1 is shown in Figure 48.
MATCH REGISTER 0 MATCH REGISTER 1
MATCH REGISTER 2 MATCH REGISTER 3 MATCH CONTROL REGISTER EXTERNAL MATCH REGISTER INTRRUPT REGISTER
CONTROL
MAT[3:0] INTERRUPT CAP[3:0] STOP ON MATCH RESET ON MATCH LOAD[3:0]
= = = =
CAPTURE CONTROL REGISTER
CAPTURE REGISTER 0 CAPTURE REGISTER 1 CAPTURE REGISTER 2 CAPTURE REGISTER 3*
CSN
TIMER COUNTER CE
TCI PRESCALE COUNTER RESET ENABLE MAXVAL PRESCALE REGISTER PCLK
TIMER CONTROL REGISTER * Note: that the capture register 3 cannot be used on TIMER0
Fig 48. Timer block diagram

User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
180
UM10120
Chapter 15: Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
LPC2131/2/4/6/8 Pulse Width Modulator is based on standard Timer/Counter 0/1 described in the previous chapter. Application can choose among PWM and match functions available.
15.1 Features
Seven match registers allow up to 6 single edge controlled or 3 double edge
controlled PWM outputs, or a mix of both types. The match registers also allow: Continuous operation with optional interrupt generation on match. Stop timer on match with optional interrupt generation. Reset timer on match with optional interrupt generation.
An external output for each match register with the following capabilities:
Set low on match. Set high on match. Toggle on match. Do nothing on match.
Supports single edge controlled and/or double edge controlled PWM outputs. Single
edge controlled PWM outputs all go high at the beginning of each cycle unless the output is a constant low. Double edge controlled PWM outputs can have either edge occur at any position within a cycle. This allows for both positive going and negative going pulses.
Pulse period and width can be any number of timer counts. This allows complete
flexibility in the trade-off between resolution and repetition rate. All PWM outputs will occur at the same repetition rate.
Double edge controlled PWM outputs can be programmed to be either positive going
or negative going pulses.
Match register updates are synchronized with pulse outputs to prevent generation of
erroneous pulses. Software must "release" new match values before they can become effective.
May be used as a standard timer if the PWM mode is not enabled. A 32-bit Timer/Counter with a programmable 32-bit Prescaler. Four 32-bit capture channels take a snapshot of the timer value when an input signal
transitions. A capture event may also optionally generate an interrupt.
15.2 Description
The PWM is based on the standard Timer block and inherits all of its features, although only the PWM function is pinned out on the LPC2131/2/4/6/8. The Timer is designed to count cycles of the peripheral clock (PCLK) and optionally generate interrupts or perform other actions when specified timer values occur, based on seven match registers. It also
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
181
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 15: PWM
includes four capture inputs to save the timer value when an input signal transitions, and optionally generate an interrupt when those events occur. The PWM function is in addition to these features, and is based on match register events. The ability to separately control rising and falling edge locations allows the PWM to be used for more applications. For instance, multi-phase motor control typically requires three non-overlapping PWM outputs with individual control of all three pulse widths and positions. Two match registers can be used to provide a single edge controlled PWM output. One match register (PWMMR0) controls the PWM cycle rate, by resetting the count upon match. The other match register controls the PWM edge position. Additional single edge controlled PWM outputs require only one match register each, since the repetition rate is the same for all PWM outputs. Multiple single edge controlled PWM outputs will all have a rising edge at the beginning of each PWM cycle, when an PWMMR0 match occurs. Three match registers can be used to provide a PWM output with both edges controlled. Again, the PWMMR0 match register controls the PWM cycle rate. The other match registers control the two PWM edge positions. Additional double edge controlled PWM outputs require only two match registers each, since the repetition rate is the same for all PWM outputs. With double edge controlled PWM outputs, specific match registers control the rising and falling edge of the output. This allows both positive going PWM pulses (when the rising edge occurs prior to the falling edge), and negative going PWM pulses (when the falling edge occurs prior to the rising edge). Figure 49 shows the block diagram of the PWM. The portions that have been added to the standard timer block are on the right hand side and at the top of the diagram.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
182
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 15: PWM
MATCH REGISTER 0 MATCH REGISTER 1 MATCH REGISTER 2 MATCH REGISTER 3 MATCH REGISTER 4 MATCH REGISTER 5 MATCH REGISTER 6
SHADOW REGISTER 0 LOAD ENABLE SHADOW REGISTER 1 LOAD ENABLE SHADOW REGISTER 2 LOAD ENABLE SHADOW REGISTER 3 LOAD ENABLE SHADOW REGISTER 4 LOAD ENABLE SHADOW REGISTER 5 LOAD ENABLE SHADOW REGISTER 6 LOAD ENABLE Match 0 S Match 1 R MATCH 0 PWMSEL2 LATCH ENABLE REGISTER CLEAR Match 2 R EN = PWMSEL3 = CONTROL MUX = Match 3 R = PWMSEL4 EN S Q PWMENA3 PWM3 PWM2 MUX S Q PWMENA2 EN Q PWMENA1 PWM1
MATCH CONTROL REGISTER
Interrupt Register
M[6.0] INTERRUPT
STOP ON MATCH RESET ON MATCH = = CSN PWM4 MUX Match 4 R = EN S Q PWMENA4
PWMSEL5 PWM5 MUX Match 5 R TIMER COUNTER CE MUX TCI Match 6 PRESCALE COUNTER R PWMENA1..6 MAXVAL PRESCALE REGISTER PWM CONTROL REGISTER EN PWMENA6 PWMSEL2..6 S Q EN S Q PWMENA5
PWMSEL6 PWM6
ENABLE RESET TIMER CONTROL REGISTER
Note: this diagram is intended to clarify the function of the PWM rather than to suggest a specific design implementation.
Fig 49. PWM block diagram
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
183
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 15: PWM
A sample of how PWM values relate to waveform outputs is shown in Figure 50. PWM output logic is shown in Figure 49 that allows selection of either single or double edge controlled PWM outputs via the muxes controlled by the PWMSELn bits. The match register selections for various PWM outputs is shown in Table 153. This implementation supports up to N-1 single edge PWM outputs or (N-1)/2 double edge PWM outputs, where N is the number of match registers that are implemented. PWM types can be mixed if desired.
The waveforms below show a single PWM cycle and demonstrate PWM outputs under the following conditions: The timer is configured for PWM mode. Match 0 is configured to reset the timer/counter when a match event occurs. Control bits PWMSEL2 and PWMSEL4 are set. The match register values are as follows: MRO = 100 (PWM rate) MR1 = 41, MR2 = 78 (PWM2 output) MR3 = 53, MR4 = 27 (PWM4 output) MR5 = 65 (PWM5 output)
PWM2
PWM4 PWM5
27
41
53
65
78
100
(counter is reset)
Fig 50. Sample PWM waveforms Table 153: Set and reset inputs for PWM Flip-Flops PWM Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6
[1] [2]
Single Edge PWM (PWMSELn = 0) Set by Match 0 Match 0 Match 0 Match 0 Match 0 Match 0 Reset by Match 1 Match 2 Match 3 Match 4 Match 5 Match 6
Double Edge PWM (PWMSELn = 1) Set by Match Match Match 0[1] 2[2] 4[2] Match 1 Match 3 Match 5 Reset by Match 1[1] Match 2 Match 3[2] Match 4 Match 5[2] Match 6
Identical to single edge mode in this case since Match 0 is the neighboring match register. Essentially, PWM1 cannot be a double edged output. It is generally not advantageous to use PWM channels 3 and 5 for double edge PWM outputs because it would reduce the number of double edge PWM outputs that are possible. Using PWM 2, PWM4, and PWM6 for double edge PWM outputs provides the most pairings.
15.2.1 Rules for single edge controlled PWM outputs

1. All single edge controlled PWM outputs go high at the beginning of a PWM cycle unless their match value is equal to 0.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
184
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 15: PWM
2. Each PWM output will go low when its match value is reached. If no match occurs (i.e. the match value is greater than the PWM rate), the PWM output remains continuously high.
15.2.2 Rules for double edge controlled PWM outputs

Five rules are used to determine the next value of a PWM output when a new cycle is about to begin: 1. The match values for the next PWM cycle are used at the end of a PWM cycle (a time point which is coincident with the beginning of the next PWM cycle), except as noted in rule 3. 2. A match value equal to 0 or the current PWM rate (the same as the Match channel 0 value) have the same effect, except as noted in rule 3. For example, a request for a falling edge at the beginning of the PWM cycle has the same effect as a request for a falling edge at the end of a PWM cycle. 3. When match values are changing, if one of the "old" match values is equal to the PWM rate, it is used again once if the neither of the new match values are equal to 0 or the PWM rate, and there was no old match value equal to 0. 4. If both a set and a clear of a PWM output are requested at the same time, clear takes precedence. This can occur when the set and clear match values are the same as in, or when the set or clear value equals 0 and the other value equals the PWM rate. 5. If a match value is out of range (i.e. greater than the PWM rate value), no match event occurs and that match channel has no effect on the output. This means that the PWM output will remain always in one state, allowing always low, always high, or "no change" outputs.

Table 154 gives a brief summary of each of PWM related pins.
Table 154: Pin summary Pin PWM1 PWM2 PWM3 PWM4 PWM5 PWM6 Type Output Output Output Output Output Output Description Output from PWM channel 1. Output from PWM channel 2. Output from PWM channel 3. Output from PWM channel 4. Output from PWM channel 5. Output from PWM channel 6.

The PWM function adds new registers and registers bits as shown in Table 155 below.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
185
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 15: PWM
Table 155: Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) register map Name PWMIR Description PWM Interrupt Register. The PWMIR can be written to clear interrupts. The PWMIR can be read to identify which of the possible interrupt sources are pending. Access R/W Reset value[1] 0 Address 0xE001 4000
PWMTCR PWM Timer Control Register. The PWMTCR is used to control the Timer R/W Counter functions. The Timer Counter can be disabled or reset through the PWMTCR. PWMTC PWMPR PWMPC PWM Timer Counter. The 32-bit TC is incremented every PWMPR+1 cycles of PCLK. The PWMTC is controlled through the PWMTCR. PWM Prescale Register. The PWMTC is incremented every PWMPR+1 cycles of PCLK. R/W R/W
0xE001 4004
0 0 0
0xE001 4008 0xE001 400C 0xE001 4010
PWM Prescale Counter. The 32-bit PC is a counter which is incremented R/W to the value stored in PR. When the value in PWMPR is reached, the PWMTC is incremented. The PWMPC is observable and controllable through the bus interface. R/W
PWMMCR PWM Match Control Register. The PWMMCR is used to control if an interrupt is generated and if the PWMTC is reset when a Match occurs.
0 0
0xE001 4014 0xE001 4018
PWMMR0 PWM Match Register 0. PWMMR0 can be enabled through PWMMCR to R/W reset the PWMTC, stop both the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition, a match between PWMMR0 and the PWMTC sets all PWM outputs that are in single-edge mode, and sets PWM1 if it is in double-edge mode. PWMMR1 PWM Match Register 1. PWMMR1 can be enabled through PWMMCR to R/W reset the PWMTC, stop both the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition, a match between PWMMR1 and the PWMTC clears PWM1 in either single-edge mode or double-edge mode, and sets PWM2 if it is in double-edge mode. PWMMR2 PWM Match Register 2. PWMMR2 can be enabled through PWMMCR to R/W reset the PWMTC, stop both the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition, a match between PWMMR2 and the PWMTC clears PWM2 in either single-edge mode or double-edge mode, and sets PWM3 if it is in double-edge mode. PWMMR3 PWM Match Register 3. PWMMR3 can be enabled through PWMMCR to R/W reset the PWMTC, stop both the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition, a match between PWMMR3 and the PWMTC clears PWM3 in either single-edge mode or double-edge mode, and sets PWM4 if it is in double-edge mode. PWMMR4 PWM Match Register 4. PWMMR4 can be enabled through PWMMCR to R/W reset the PWMTC, stop both the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition, a match between PWMMR4 and the PWMTC clears PWM4 in either single-edge mode or double-edge mode, and sets PWM5 if it is in double-edge mode. PWMMR5 PWM Match Register 5. PWMMR5 can be enabled through PWMMCR to R/W reset the PWMTC, stop both the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition, a match between PWMMR5 and the PWMTC clears PWM5 in either single-edge mode or double-edge mode, and sets PWM6 if it is in double-edge mode.
0xE001 401C
0xE001 4020
0xE001 4024
0xE001 4040
0xE001 4044
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
186
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 15: PWM
Table 155: Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) register map Name Description Access Reset value[1] 0 Address 0xE001 4048
PWMMR6 PWM Match Register 6. PWMMR6 can be enabled through PWMMCR to R/W reset the PWMTC, stop both the PWMTC and PWMPC, and/or generate an interrupt when it matches the PWMTC. In addition, a match between PWMMR6 and the PWMTC clears PWM6 in either single-edge mode or double-edge mode. PWMPCR PWM Control Register. Enables PWM outputs and selects PWM channel R/W types as either single edge or double edge controlled. PWMLER PWM Latch Enable Register. Enables use of new PWM match values.
[1]
0 0
0xE001 404C 0xE001 4050
R/W
15.4.1 PWM Interrupt Register (PWMIR - 0xE001 4000)

The PWM Interrupt Register consists of eleven bits (Table 156), seven for the match interrupts and four reserved for the future use. If an interrupt is generated then the corresponding bit in the PWMIR will be high. Otherwise, the bit will be low. Writing a logic one to the corresponding IR bit will reset the interrupt. Writing a zero has no effect.
Table 156: PWM Interrupt Register (PWMIR - address 0xE001 4000) bit description Bit 0 1 2 3 7:4 8 9 10 15:11 Symbol PWMMR0 Interrupt PWMMR1 Interrupt PWMMR2 Interrupt PWMMR3 Interrupt PWMMR4 Interrupt PWMMR5 Interrupt PWMMR6 Interrupt Description Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 0. Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 1. Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 2. Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 3. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 4. Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 5. Interrupt flag for PWM match channel 6. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 NA
15.4.2 PWM Timer Control Register (PWMTCR - 0xE001 4004)

The PWM Timer Control Register (PWMTCR) is used to control the operation of the PWM Timer Counter. The function of each of the bits is shown in Table 157.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
187
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 15: PWM
Table 157: PWM Timer Control Register (PWMTCR - address 0xE001 4004) bit description Bit 0 Symbol Description Reset value Counter Enable When one, the PWM Timer Counter and PWM Prescale 0 Counter are enabled for counting. When zero, the counters are disabled. Counter Reset When one, the PWM Timer Counter and the PWM Prescale Counter are synchronously reset on the next positive edge of PCLK. The counters remain reset until TCR[1] is returned to zero. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. 0
NA
PWM Enable
When one, PWM mode is enabled. PWM mode causes 0 shadow registers to operate in connection with the Match registers. A program write to a Match register will not have an effect on the Match result until the corresponding bit in PWMLER has been set, followed by the occurrence of a PWM Match 0 event. Note that the PWM Match register that determines the PWM rate (PWM Match 0) must be set up prior to the PWM being enabled. Otherwise a Match event will not occur to cause shadow register contents to become effective. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA
7:4
15.4.3 PWM Timer Counter (PWMTC - 0xE001 4008)

The 32-bit PWM Timer Counter is incremented when the Prescale Counter reaches its terminal count. Unless it is reset before reaching its upper limit, the PWMTC will count up through the value 0xFFFF FFFF and then wrap back to the value 0x0000 0000. This event does not cause an interrupt, but a Match register can be used to detect an overflow if needed.
15.4.4 PWM Prescale Register (PWMPR - 0xE001 400C)

The 32-bit PWM Prescale Register specifies the maximum value for the PWM Prescale Counter.
15.4.5 PWM Prescale Counter register (PWMPC - 0xE001 4010)

The 32-bit PWM Prescale Counter controls division of PCLK by some constant value before it is applied to the PWM Timer Counter. This allows control of the relationship of the resolution of the timer versus the maximum time before the timer overflows. The PWM Prescale Counter is incremented on every PCLK. When it reaches the value stored in the PWM Prescale Register, the PWM Timer Counter is incremented and the PWM Prescale Counter is reset on the next PCLK. This causes the PWM TC to increment on every PCLK when PWMPR = 0, every 2 PCLKs when PWMPR = 1, etc.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
188
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 15: PWM
15.4.6 PWM Match Registers (PWMMR0 - PWMMR6)

The 32-bit PWM Match register values are continuously compared to the PWM Timer Counter value. When the two values are equal, actions can be triggered automatically. The action possibilities are to generate an interrupt, reset the PWM Timer Counter, or stop the timer. Actions are controlled by the settings in the PWMMCR register.
15.4.7 PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014)

The PWM Match Control Register is used to control what operations are performed when one of the PWM Match Registers matches the PWM Timer Counter. The function of each of the bits is shown in Table 158.
Table 158: Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR - address 0xE000 4014 and TIMER1: T1MCR - address 0xE000 8014) bit description Bit 0 Symbol PWMMR0I Value 1 0 1 2 PWMMR0R 1 0 PWMMR0S 1 0 3 PWMMR1I 1 0 1 5 PWMMR1R 1 0 PWMMR1S 1 0 6 PWMMR2I 1 0 7 8 PWMMR2R 1 0 PWMMR2S 1 0 9 PWMMR3I 1 0 10 PWMMR3R 1 0 Description Reset value
Interrupt on PWMMR0: an interrupt is generated when PWMMR0 matches the value 0 in the PWMTC. This interrupt is disabled. Reset on PWMMR0: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR0 matches it. This feature is disabled. Stop on PWMMR0: the PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR0 matches the PWMTC. This feature is disabled Interrupt on PWMMR1: an interrupt is generated when PWMMR1 matches the value 0 in the PWMTC. This interrupt is disabled. Reset on PWMMR1: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR1 matches it. This feature is disabled. Stop on PWMMR1: the PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR1 matches the PWMTC. This feature is disabled. Interrupt on PWMMR2: an interrupt is generated when PWMMR2 matches the value 0 in the PWMTC. This interrupt is disabled. Reset on PWMMR2: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR2 matches it. This feature is disabled. Stop on PWMMR2: the PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR2 matches the PWMTC. This feature is disabled Interrupt on PWMMR3: an interrupt is generated when PWMMR3 matches the value 0 in the PWMTC. This interrupt is disabled. Reset on PWMMR3: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR3 matches it. This feature is disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
189
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 15: PWM
Table 158: Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR - address 0xE000 4014 and TIMER1: T1MCR - address 0xE000 8014) bit description Bit 11 Symbol Value Description Stop on PWMMR3: The PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR3 matches the PWMTC. This feature is disabled Interrupt on PWMMR4: An interrupt is generated when PWMMR4 matches the value 0 in the PWMTC. This interrupt is disabled. Reset on PWMMR4: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR4 matches it. This feature is disabled. Stop on PWMMR4: the PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR4 matches the PWMTC. This feature is disabled Interrupt on PWMMR5: An interrupt is generated when PWMMR5 matches the value 0 in the PWMTC. This interrupt is disabled. Reset on PWMMR5: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR5 matches it. This feature is disabled. Stop on PWMMR5: the PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR5 matches the PWMTC. This feature is disabled Interrupt on PWMMR6: an interrupt is generated when PWMMR6 matches the value 0 in the PWMTC. This interrupt is disabled. Reset on PWMMR6: the PWMTC will be reset if PWMMR6 matches it. This feature is disabled. Stop on PWMMR6: the PWMTC and PWMPC will be stopped and PWMTCR[0] will be set to 0 if PWMMR6 matches the PWMTC. This feature is disabled Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA 0 0 0 0 0 0 Reset value 0
PWMMR3S 1 0
12
PWMMR4I
1 0
13 14
PWMMR4R 1 0 PWMMR4S 1 0
15
PWMMR5I
1 0
16 17
18
PWMMR6I
1 0
19 20
31:21 -
15.4.8 PWM Control Register (PWMPCR - 0xE001 404C)

The PWM Control Register is used to enable and select the type of each PWM channel. The function of each of the bits are shown in Table 159.
Table 159: PWM Control Register (PWMPCR - address 0xE001 404C) bit description Bit 1:0 2 3 Symbol PWMSEL2 PWMSEL3 1 0 1 0 Value Description Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Selects double edge controlled mode for the PWM2 output. Selects single edge controlled mode for PWM2. Selects double edge controlled mode for the PWM3 output. Selects single edge controlled mode for PWM3.
Reset value NA 0 0
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
190
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 15: PWM
Table 159: PWM Control Register (PWMPCR - address 0xE001 404C) bit description Bit 4 5 6 8:7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Symbol PWMSEL4 PWMSEL5 PWMSEL6 PWMENA1 PWMENA2 PWMENA3 PWMENA4 PWMENA5 PWMENA6 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Value 1 0 1 0 1 0 Description Selects double edge controlled mode for the PWM4 output. Selects single edge controlled mode for PWM4. Selects double edge controlled mode for the PWM5 output. Selects single edge controlled mode for PWM5. Selects double edge controlled mode for the PWM6 output. Selects single edge controlled mode for PWM6. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. The PWM1 output enabled. The PWM1 output disabled. The PWM2 output enabled. The PWM2 output disabled. The PWM3 output enabled. The PWM3 output disabled. The PWM4 output enabled. The PWM4 output disabled. The PWM5 output enabled. The PWM5 output disabled. The PWM6 output enabled. The PWM6 output disabled. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA 0 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 Reset value 0
15.4.9 PWM Latch Enable Register (PWMLER - 0xE001 4050)

The PWM Latch Enable Register is used to control the update of the PWM Match registers when they are used for PWM generation. When software writes to the location of a PWM Match register while the Timer is in PWM mode, the value is held in a shadow register. When a PWM Match 0 event occurs (normally also resetting the timer in PWM mode), the contents of shadow registers will be transferred to the actual Match registers if the corresponding bit in the Latch Enable Register has been set. At that point, the new values will take effect and determine the course of the next PWM cycle. Once the transfer of new values has taken place, all bits of the LER are automatically cleared. Until the corresponding bit in the PWMLER is set and a PWM Match 0 event occurs, any value written to the PWM Match registers has no effect on PWM operation. For example, if PWM2 is configured for double edge operation and is currently running, a typical sequence of events for changing the timing would be:
Write a new value to the PWM Match1 register. Write a new value to the PWM Match2 register. Write to the PWMLER, setting bits 1 and 2 at the same time. The altered values will become effective at the next reset of the timer (when a PWM Match 0 event occurs).
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
191
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 15: PWM
The order of writing the two PWM Match registers is not important, since neither value will be used until after the write to PWMLER. This insures that both values go into effect at the same time, if that is required. A single value may be altered in the same way if needed. The function of each of the bits in the PWMLER is shown in Table 160.
Table 160: PWM Latch Enable Register (PWMLER - address 0xE001 4050) bit description Bit 0 Symbol Enable PWM Match 0 Latch Description Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the PWM Match 0 register to be become effective when the timer is next reset by a PWM Match event. See Section 15.4.7 PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014). Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the PWM Match 1 register to be become effective when the timer is next reset by a PWM Match event. See Section 15.4.7 PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014). Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the PWM Match 2 register to be become effective when the timer is next reset by a PWM Match event. See Section 15.4.7 PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014). Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the PWM Match 3 register to be become effective when the timer is next reset by a PWM Match event. See Section 15.4.7 PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014). Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the PWM Match 4 register to be become effective when the timer is next reset by a PWM Match event. See Section 15.4.7 PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014). Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the PWM Match 5 register to be become effective when the timer is next reset by a PWM Match event. See Section 15.4.7 PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014). Writing a one to this bit allows the last value written to the PWM Match 6 register to be become effective when the timer is next reset by a PWM Match event. See Section 15.4.7 PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR - 0xE001 4014). Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value 0
Enable PWM Match 1 Latch
NA
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
192
UM10120
Chapter 16: Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
16.1 Features
10 bit successive approximation analog to digital converter (one in LPC2131/2 and
two in LPC2134/6/8).
Input multiplexing among 8 pins. Power-down mode. Measurement range 0 to 3 V. 10 bit conversion time 2.44 s. Burst conversion mode for single or multiple inputs. Optional conversion on transition on input pin or Timer Match signal. Global Start command for both converters (LPC2134/6/8 only).
16.2 Description
Basic clocking for the A/D converters is provided by the VPB clock. A programmable divider is included in each converter, to scale this clock to the 4.5 MHz (max) clock needed by the successive approximation process. A fully accurate conversion requires 11 of these clocks.

Table 161 gives a brief summary of each of ADC related pins.
Table 161: ADC pin description Pin AD0.7:0 & AD1.7:0 (LPC2134/6/8) Type Input Description Analog Inputs. The A/D converter cell can measure the voltage on any of these input signals. Note that these analog inputs are always connected to their pins, even if the Pin Multiplexing Register assigns them to port pins. A simple self-test of the A/D Converter can be done by driving these pins as port outputs. Note: if the A/D converter is used, signal levels on analog input pins must not be above the level of V3A at any time. Otherwise, A/D converter readings will be invalid. If the A/D converter is not used in an application then the pins associated with A/D inputs can be used as 5 V tolerant digital IO pins. Warning: while the ADC pins are specified as 5 V tolerant (see Table 56 Pin description on page 67), the analog multiplexing in the ADC block is not. More than 3.3 V (VDDA) +10 % should not be applied to any pin that is selected as an ADC input, or the ADC reading will be incorrect. If for example AD0.0 and AD0.1 are used as the ADC0 inputs and voltage on AD0.0 = 4.5 V while AD0.1 = 2.5 V, an excessive voltage on the AD0.0 can cause an incorrect reading of the AD0.1, although the AD0.1 input voltage is within the right range. Vref VDDA, VSSA Reference Power Voltage Reference. This pin is provides a voltage reference level for the A/D converter(s). Analog Power and Ground. These should be nominally the same voltages as VDD and VSS, but should be isolated to minimize noise and error.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
193
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 16: A/D Converter

The A/D Converter registers are shown in Table 162.
Table 162: ADC registers Generic Description Name ADCR Access Reset value[1] AD0 Address & Name AD1 Address & Name
A/D Control Register. The ADCR register must be written R/W to select the operating mode before A/D conversion can occur. A/D Data Register. This register contains the ADCs DONE bit and (when DONE is 1) the 10-bit result of the conversion. R/W
0x0000 0001 0xE003 4000 0xE006 0000 AD0CR AD1CR undefined 0xE003 4004 0xE006 0004 AD0DR AD1DR 0xE003 4008 ADGSR
ADDR
ADGSR A/D Global Start Register. This address can be written (in WO the AD0 address range) to start conversions in both A/D converters simultaneously.
[1]
0x00
16.4.1 A/D Control Register (AD0CR - 0xE003 4000 and AD1CR 0xE006 0000)
Table 163: A/D Control Register (AD0CR - address 0xE003 4000 and AD1CR - address 0xE006 0000) bit description Bit 7:0 Symbol SEL Value Description Reset value
Selects which of the AD0.7:0/AD1.7:0 pins is (are) to be sampled and converted. For 0x01 AD0, bit 0 selects Pin AD0.0, and bit 7 selects pin AD0.7. In software-controlled mode, only one of these bits should be 1. In hardware scan mode, any value containing 1 to 8 ones. All zeroes is equivalent to 0x01. The VPB clock (PCLK) is divided by (this value plus one) to produce the clock for the 0 A/D converter, which should be less than or equal to 4.5 MHz. Typically, software should program the smallest value in this field that yields a clock of 4.5 MHz or slightly less, but in certain cases (such as a high-impedance analog source) a slower clock may be desirable. 1 The AD converter does repeated conversions at the rate selected by the CLKS field, 0 scanning (if necessary) through the pins selected by 1s in the SEL field. The first conversion after the start corresponds to the least-significant 1 in the SEL field, then higher numbered 1-bits (pins) if applicable. Repeated conversions can be terminated by clearing this bit, but the conversion thats in progress when this bit is cleared will be completed. Important: START bits must be 000 when BURST = 1 or conversons will not start. 0 Conversions are software controlled and require 11 clocks.
15:8
CLKDIV
16
BURST
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
194
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 163: A/D Control Register (AD0CR - address 0xE003 4000 and AD1CR - address 0xE006 0000) bit description Bit Symbol Value Description Reset value
19:17 CLKS
This field selects the number of clocks used for each conversion in Burst mode, and the 000 number of bits of accuracy of the result in the LS bits of ADDR, between 11 clocks (10 bits) and 4 clocks (3 bits). 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 11 clocks / 10 bits 10 clocks / 9bits 9 clocks / 8 bits 8 clocks / 7 bits 7 clocks / 6 bits 6 clocks / 5 bits 5 clocks / 4 bits 4 clocks / 3 bits Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. 1 0 The A/D converter is operational. The A/D converter is in power-down mode. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. When the BURST bit is 0, these bits control whether and when an A/D conversion is started: 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 No start (this value should be used when clearing PDN to 0). Start conversion now. Start conversion when the edge selected by bit 27 occurs on P0.16/EINT0/MAT0.2/CAP0.2 pin. Start conversion when the edge selected by bit 27 occurs on P0.22/TD3/CAP0.0/MAT0.0 pin. Start conversion when the edge selected by bit 27 occurs on MAT0.1. Start conversion when the edge selected by bit 27 occurs on MAT0.3. Start conversion when the edge selected by bit 27 occurs on MAT1.0. Start conversion when the edge selected by bit 27 occurs on MAT1.1. This bit is significant only when the START field contains 010-111. In these cases: 1 0 Start conversion on a falling edge on the selected CAP/MAT signa. Start conversion on a rising edge on the selected CAP/MAT signal. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA 0 NA 0 NA 0
20 21
PDN
23:22 26:24 START
27
EDGE
31:28 -
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
195
Volume 1
UM10120
16.4.2 A/D Data Register (AD0DR - 0xE003 4004 and AD1DR - 0xE006 0004)
Table 164: A/D Data Register (AD0DR - address 0xE003 4004 and AD1DR - address 0xE006 0004) bit description Bit 5:0 15:6 Symbol V/VREF Description Reset value
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from NA a reserved bit is not defined. When DONE is 1, this field contains a binary fraction representing the voltage on NA the Ain pin selected by the SEL field, divided by the voltage on the VDDA pin. Zero in the field indicates that the voltage on the Ain pin was less than, equal to, or close to that on VSSA, while 0x3FF indicates that the voltage on Ain was close to, equal to, or greater than that on VREF. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from NA a reserved bit is not defined. These bits contain the channel from which the LS bits were converted (e.g. 000 identifies channel 0, 001 channel 1...). NA
23:16 26:24 29:27 30
CHN OVERUN
Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from NA a reserved bit is not defined. This bit is 1 in burst mode if the results of one or more conversions was (were) lost and overwritten before the conversion that produced the result in the LS bits. In non-FIFO operation, this bit is cleared by reading this register. This bit is set to 1 when an A/D conversion completes. It is cleared when this register is read and when the ADCR is written. If the ADCR is written while a conversion is still in progress, this bit is set and a new conversion is started. 0
31
DONE
16.4.3 A/D Global Start Register (ADGSR - 0xE003 4008)

Software can write this register to simultaneously initiate conversions on both A/D controllers. This register is available in LPC2134/6/8 devices only.
Table 165: A/D Global Start Register (ADGSR - address 0xE003 4008) bit description Bit 15:0 16 Symbol BURST 1 Value Description Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value NA
The AD converters do repeated conversions at the rate selected by their CLKS fields, 0 scanning (if necessary) through the pins selected by 1s in their SEL field. The first conversion after the start corresponds to the least-significant 1 in the SEL field, then higher numbered 1-bits (pins) if applicable. Repeated conversions can be terminated by clearing this bit, but the conversion thats in progress when this bit is cleared will be completed. Important: START bits must be 000 when BURST = 1 or conversons will not start. Conversions are software controlled and require 11 clocks. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA
0 23:17 -
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
196
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 165: A/D Global Start Register (ADGSR - address 0xE003 4008) bit description Bit Symbol Value Description When the BURST bit is 0, these bits control whether and when an A/D conversion is started: 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 27 EDGE 1 0 31:28 No start (this value should be used when clearing PDN to 0). Start conversion now. Start conversion when the edge selected by bit 27 occurs on P0.16/EINT0/MAT0.2/CAP0.2 pin. Start conversion when the edge selected by bit 27 occurs on P0.22/TD3/CAP0.0/MAT0.0 pin. Start conversion when the edge selected by bit 27 occurs on MAT0.1. Start conversion when the edge selected by bit 27 occurs on MAT0.3. Start conversion when the edge selected by bit 27 occurs on MAT1.0. Start conversion when the edge selected by bit 27 occurs on MAT1.1. This bit is significant only when the START field contains 010-111. In these cases: Start conversion on a falling edge on the selected CAP/MAT signal. Start conversion on a rising edge on the selected CAP/MAT signal. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA 0 Reset value 0
26:24 START
16.5 Operation
16.5.1 Hardware-triggered conversion
If the BURST bit in the ADCR is 0 and the START field contains 010-111, the A/D converter will start a conversion when a transition occurs on a selected pin or Timer Match signal. The choices include conversion on a specified edge of any of 4 Match signals, or conversion on a specified edge of either of 2 Capture/Match pins. The pin state from the selected pad or the selected Match signal, XORed with ADCR bit 27, is used in the edge detection logic.
16.5.2 Interrupts
An interrupt request is asserted to the Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC) when the DONE bit is 1. Software can use the Interrupt Enable bit for the A/D Converter in the VIC to control whether this assertion results in an interrupt. DONE is negated when the ADDR is read.
16.5.3 Accuracy vs. digital receiver

The AIN function must be selected in corresponding Pin Select register (see "Pin Connect Block" on page 73) in order to get accurate voltage readings on the monitored pin. For pin hosting an ADC input, it is not possible to have a have a digital function selected and yet get valid ADC readings. An inside circuit disconnects ADC hardware from the associated pin whenever a digital function is selected on that pin.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
197
UM10120
Chapter 17: Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC)
This peripheral is available in LPC2132/4/6/8 devices.
17.1 Features

10 bit digital to analog converter Resistor string architecture Buffered output Power-down mode Selectable speed vs. power

Table 166 gives a brief summary of each of DAC related pins.
Table 166: DAC pin description Pin AOUT Type Output Description Analog Output. After the selected settling time after the DACR is written with a new value, the voltage on this pin (with respect to VSSA) is VALUE/1024 * VREF. Voltage Reference. This pin provides a voltage reference level for the D/A converter. Analog Power and Ground. These should be nominally the same voltages as V3 and VSSD, but should be isolated to minimize noise and error.
VREF VDDA, VSSA
Reference Power
17.3 DAC Register (DACR - 0xE006 C000)

This read/write register includes the digital value to be converted to analog, and a bit that trades off performance vs. power. Bits 5:0 are reserved for future, higher-resolution D/A converters.
Table 167: DAC Register (DACR - address 0xE006 C000) bit description Bit 5:0 15:6 Symbol Value VALUE Description Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value NA
After the selected settling time after this field is written with a 0 new VALUE, the voltage on the AOUT pin (with respect to VSSA) is VALUE/1024 * VREF. 0 1 The settling time of the DAC is 1 s max, and the maximum current is 700 A. The settling time of the DAC is 2.5 s and the maximum current is 350 A. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA 0
16
BIAS
31:17 -
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
198
Volume 1
UM10120
17.4 Operation
Bits 19:18 of the PINSEL1 register (Section 7.4.2 Pin function Select register 1 (PINSEL1 - 0xE002 C004) on page 75) control whether the DAC is enabled and controlling the state of pin P0.25/AD0.4/AOUT. When these bits are 10, the DAC is powered on and active. The settling times noted in the description of the BIAS bit are valid for a capacitance load on the AOUT pin not exceeding 100 pF. A load impedance value greather than that value will cause settling time longer than the specified time.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
199
UM10120
Chapter 18: Real Time Clock
18.1 Features
Measures the passage of time to maintain a calendar and clock. Ultra Low Power design to support battery powered systems. Provides Seconds, Minutes, Hours, Day of Month, Month, Year, Day of Week, and Day
of Year.
Dedicated 32 kHz oscillator or programmable prescaler from VPB clock. Dedicated power supply pin can be connected to a battery or to the main 3.3 V.
18.2 Description
The Real Time Clock (RTC) is a set of counters for measuring time when system power is on, and optionally when it is off. It uses little power in Power-down mode. On the LPC2131/2/4/6/8, the RTC can be clocked by a separate 32.768 KHz oscillator, or by a programmable prescale divider based on the VPB clock. Also, the RTC is powered by its own power supply pin, VBAT, which can be connected to a battery or to the same 3.3 V supply used by the rest of the device.
18.3 Architecture
CLK32k
MUX
RTC OSCILLATOR REFERENCE CLOCK DIVIDER (PRESCALER) Strobe
CLOCK GENERATOR
CLK1
CCLK ALARM REGISTERS
TIME COUNTERS
COMPARATORS
COUNTER INCREMENT Counter enables INTERRUPT ENABLE ALARM MASK REGISTER
INTERRUPT GENERATOR
Fig 51. RTC block diagram
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
200
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 18: RTC

The RTC includes a number of registers. The address space is split into four sections by functionality. The first eight addresses are the Miscellaneous Register Group (Section 18.4.2). The second set of eight locations are the Time Counter Group (Section 18.4.12). The third set of eight locations contain the Alarm Register Group (Section 18.4.14). The remaining registers control the Reference Clock Divider. The Real Time Clock includes the register shown in Table 168. Detailed descriptions of the registers follow.
Table 168: Real Time Clock (RTC) register map Name ILR CTC CCR CIIR AMR CTIME0 CTIME1 CTIME2 SEC MIN HOUR DOM DOW DOY MONTH YEAR ALSEC ALMIN ALHOUR ALDOM ALDOW ALDOY ALMON ALYEAR PREINT Size Description 2 15 4 8 8 32 32 32 6 6 5 5 3 9 4 12 6 6 5 5 3 9 4 12 13 Interrupt Location Register Clock Tick Counter Clock Control Register Counter Increment Interrupt Register Alarm Mask Register Consolidated Time Register 0 Consolidated Time Register 1 Consolidated Time Register 2 Seconds Counter Minutes Register Hours Register Day of Month Register Day of Week Register Day of Year Register Months Register Years Register Alarm value for Seconds Alarm value for Minutes Alarm value for Seconds Alarm value for Day of Month Alarm value for Day of Week Alarm value for Day of Year Alarm value for Months Alarm value for Year Prescaler value, integer portion Prescaler value, integer portion Access R/W RO R/W R/W R/W RO RO RO R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset value[1] * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0 0 Address 0xE002 4000 0xE002 4004 0xE002 4008 0xE002 400C 0xE002 4010 0xE002 4014 0xE002 4018 0xE002 401C 0xE002 4020 0xE002 4024 0xE002 4028 0xE002 402C 0xE002 4030 0xE002 4034 0xE002 4038 0xE002 403C 0xE002 4060 0xE002 4064 0xE002 4068 0xE002 406C 0xE002 4070 0xE002 4074 0xE002 4078 0xE002 407C 0xE002 4080 0xE002 4084
PREFRAC 15
[1]
Registers in the RTC other than those that are part of the Prescaler are not affected by chip Reset. These registers must be initialized by software if the RTC is enabled. Reset value relects the data stored in used bits only. It does not include reserved bits content.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
201
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 18: RTC
18.4.1 RTC interrupts

Interrupt generation is controlled through the Interrupt Location Register (ILR), Counter Increment Interrupt Register (CIIR), the alarm registers, and the Alarm Mask Register (AMR). Interrupts are generated only by the transition into the interrupt state. The ILR separately enables CIIR and AMR interrupts. Each bit in CIIR corresponds to one of the time counters. If CIIR is enabled for a particular counter, then every time the counter is incremented an interrupt is generated. The alarm registers allow the user to specify a date and time for an interrupt to be generated. The AMR provides a mechanism to mask alarm compares. If all nonmasked alarm registers match the value in their corresponding time counter, then an interrupt is generated. The RTC interrupt can bring the microcontroller out of power-down mode if the RTC is operating from its own oscillator on the RTCX1-2 pins. When the RTC interrupt is enabled for wakeup and its selected event occurs, XTAL1/2 pins associated oscillator wakeup cycle is started. For details on the RTC based wakeup process see Section 3.5.3 Interrupt Wakeup register (INTWAKE - 0xE01F C144) on page 22 and Section 3.11 Wakeup timer on page 39.
18.4.2 Miscellaneous register group

Table 169 summarizes the registers located from 0 to 7 of A[6:2]. More detailed descriptions follow.
Table 169: Miscellaneous registers Name ILR Size Description 2 Access Address 0xE002 4000 Interrupt Location. Reading this location R/W indicates the source of an interrupt. Writing a one to the appropriate bit at this location clears the associated interrupt. Clock Tick Counter. Value from the clock divider. RO
CTC CCR CIIR
15 4 8
0xE002 4004 0xE002 4008 0xE002 400C
Clock Control Register. Controls the function of R/W the clock divider. Counter Increment Interrupt. Selects which counters will generate an interrupt when they are incremented. Alarm Mask Register. Controls which of the alarm registers are masked. Consolidated Time Register 0 Consolidated Time Register 1 Consolidated Time Register 2 R/W
AMR CTIME0 CTIME1 CTIME2
8 32 32 32
R/W RO RO RO
0xE002 4010 0xE002 4014 0xE002 4018 0xE002 401C
18.4.3 Interrupt Location Register (ILR - 0xE002 4000)

The Interrupt Location Register is a 2-bit register that specifies which blocks are generating an interrupt (see Table 170). Writing a one to the appropriate bit clears the corresponding interrupt. Writing a zero has no effect. This allows the programmer to read this register and write back the same value to clear only the interrupt that is detected by the read.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
202
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 18: RTC
Table 170: Interrupt Location Register (ILR - address 0xE002 4000) bit description Bit 0 1 7:2 Symbol RTCCIF RTCALF Description Reset value
When one, the Counter Increment Interrupt block generated an interrupt. NA Writing a one to this bit location clears the counter increment interrupt. When one, the alarm registers generated an interrupt. Writing a one to this bit location clears the alarm interrupt. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA NA
18.4.4 Clock Tick Counter Register (CTCR - 0xE002 4004)

The Clock Tick Counter is read only. It can be reset to zero through the Clock Control Register (CCR). The CTC consists of the bits of the clock divider counter.
Table 171: Clock Tick Counter Register (CTCR - address 0xE002 4004) bit description Bit 14:0 Symbol Description Reset value
Clock Tick Prior to the Seconds counter, the CTC counts 32,768 clocks per NA Counter second. Due to the RTC Prescaler, these 32,768 time increments may not all be of the same duration. Refer to the Section 18.6 Reference clock divider (prescaler) on page 207 for details. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA
15
18.4.5 Clock Control Register (CCR - 0xE002 4008)

The clock register is a 5-bit register that controls the operation of the clock divide circuit. Each bit of the clock register is described in Table 172.
Table 172: Clock Control Register (CCR - address 0xE002 4008) bit description Bit 0 1 3:2 4 Symbol CLKEN CTCRST CTTEST CLKSRC Description Clock Enable. When this bit is a one the time counters are enabled. When it is a zero, they are disabled so that they may be initialized. CTC Reset. When one, the elements in the Clock Tick Counter are reset. The elements remain reset until CCR[1] is changed to zero. Test Enable. These bits should always be zero during normal operation. Reset value NA NA NA
If this bit is 0, the Clock Tick Counter takes its clock from the Prescaler, NA as on earlier devices in the Philips Embedded ARM family. If this bit is 1, the CTC takes its clock from the 32 kHz oscillator thats connected to the RTCX1 and RTCX2 pins (see Section 18.7 RTC external 32 kHz oscillator component selection for hardware details). Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. NA
7:5
18.4.6 Counter Increment Interrupt Register (CIIR - 0xE002 400C)

The Counter Increment Interrupt Register (CIIR) gives the ability to generate an interrupt every time a counter is incremented. This interrupt remains valid until cleared by writing a one to bit zero of the Interrupt Location Register (ILR[0]).
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
203
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 18: RTC
Table 173: Counter Increment Interrupt Register (CIIR - address 0xE002 400C) bit description Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Symbol IMSEC IMMIN IMHOUR IMDOM IMDOW IMDOY IMMON IMYEAR Description When 1, an increment of the Second value generates an interrupt. When 1, an increment of the Minute value generates an interrupt. When 1, an increment of the Hour value generates an interrupt. Reset value NA NA NA
When 1, an increment of the Day of Month value generates an interrupt. NA When 1, an increment of the Day of Week value generates an interrupt. NA When 1, an increment of the Day of Year value generates an interrupt. When 1, an increment of the Month value generates an interrupt. When 1, an increment of the Year value generates an interrupt. NA NA NA
18.4.7 Alarm Mask Register (AMR - 0xE002 4010)

The Alarm Mask Register (AMR) allows the user to mask any of the alarm registers. Table 174 shows the relationship betweenthe bits in the AMR and the alarms. For the alarm function, every non-masked alarm register must match the corresponding time counter for an interrupt to be generated. The interrupt is generated only when the counter comparison first changes from no match to match. The interrupt is removed when a one is written to the appropriate bit of the Interrupt Location Register (ILR). If all mask bits are set, then the alarm is disabled.
Table 174: Alarm Mask Register (AMR - address 0xE002 4010) bit description Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Symbol AMRSEC AMRMIN AMRDOM AMRDOW AMRDOY AMRMON AMRYEAR Description When 1, the Second value is not compared for the alarm. When 1, the Minutes value is not compared for the alarm. When 1, the Day of Month value is not compared for the alarm. When 1, the Day of Week value is not compared for the alarm. When 1, the Day of Year value is not compared for the alarm. When 1, the Month value is not compared for the alarm. When 1, the Year value is not compared for the alarm. Reset value NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
AMRHOUR When 1, the Hour value is not compared for the alarm.
18.4.8 Consolidated time registers

The values of the Time Counters can optionally be read in a consolidated format which allows the programmer to read all time counters with only three read operations. The various registers are packed into 32-bit values as shown in Table 175, Table 176, and Table 177. The least significant bit of each register is read back at bit 0, 8, 16, or 24. The Consolidated Time Registers are read only. To write new values to the Time Counters, the Time Counter addresses should be used.
18.4.9 Consolidated Time register 0 (CTIME0 - 0xE002 4014)

The Consolidated Time Register 0 contains the low order time values: Seconds, Minutes, Hours, and Day of Week.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
204
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 18: RTC
Table 175: Consolidated Time register 0 (CTIME0 - address 0xE002 4014) bit description Bit 5:0 7:6 13:8 15:14 20:16 23:21 26:24 31:27 Symbol Seconds Minutes Hours Description Seconds value in the range of 0 to 59 Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Minutes value in the range of 0 to 59 Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Hours value in the range of 0 to 23 Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
Day Of Week Day of week value in the range of 0 to 6 -
18.4.10 Consolidated Time register 1 (CTIME1 - 0xE002 4018)

The Consolidate Time register 1 contains the Day of Month, Month, and Year values.
Table 176: Consolidated Time register 1 (CTIME1 - address 0xE002 4018) bit description Bit 4:0 7:5 11:8 15:12 27:16 31:28 Symbol Description Reset value NA NA NA NA NA NA
Day of Month Day of month value in the range of 1 to 28, 29, 30, or 31 (depending on the month and whether it is a leap year). Month Year Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Month value in the range of 1 to 12. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Year value in the range of 0 to 4095. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
18.4.11 Consolidated Time register 2 (CTIME2 - 0xE002 401C)

The Consolidate Time register 2 contains just the Day of Year value.
Table 177: Consolidated Time register 2 (CTIME2 - address 0xE002 401C) bit description Bit 11:0 31:12 Symbol Day of Year Description Day of year value in the range of 1 to 365 (366 for leap years). Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value NA NA
18.4.12 Time counter group

The time value consists of the eight counters shown in Table 178 and Table 179. These counters can be read or written at the locations shown in Table 179.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
205
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 18: RTC
Table 178: Time counter relationships and values Counter Second Minute Hour Day of Month Day of Week Day of Year Month Year Size 6 6 5 5 3 9 4 12 Enabled by Clk1 (see Figure 51) Second Minute Hour Hour Hour Day of Month Month or day of Year Minimum value 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Maximum value 59 59 23 28, 29, 30 or 31 6 365 or 366 (for leap year) 12 4095
Table 179: Time counter registers Name SEC MIN HOUR DOM Size Description 6 6 5 5 Seconds value in the range of 0 to 59 Minutes value in the range of 0 to 59 Hours value in the range of 0 to 23 Access R/W R/W R/W Address 0xE002 4020 0xE002 4024 0xE002 4028 0xE002 402C
Day of month value in the range of 1 to 28, 29, 30, R/W or 31 (depending on the month and whether it is a leap year).[1] Day of week value in the range of 0 to 6[1] R/W Day of year value in the range of 1 to 365 (366 for R/W leap years)[1] Month value in the range of 1 to 12 Year value in the range of 0 to 4095 R/W R/W
DOW DOY MONTH YEAR

[1]
3 9 4 12
0xE002 4030 0xE002 4034 0xE002 4038 0xE002 403C
These values are simply incremented at the appropriate intervals and reset at the defined overflow point. They are not calculated and must be correctly initialized in order to be meaningful.
18.4.13 Leap year calculation

The RTC does a simple bit comparison to see if the two lowest order bits of the year counter are zero. If true, then the RTC considers that year a leap year. The RTC considers all years evenly divisible by 4 as leap years. This algorithm is accurate from the year 1901 through the year 2099, but fails for the year 2100, which is not a leap year. The only effect of leap year on the RTC is to alter the length of the month of February for the month, day of month, and year counters.
18.4.14 Alarm register group

The alarm registers are shown in Table 180. The values in these registers are compared with the time counters. If all the unmasked (See Section 18.4.7 Alarm Mask Register (AMR - 0xE002 4010) on page 204) alarm registers match their corresponding time counters then an interrupt is generated. The interrupt is cleared when a one is written to bit one of the Interrupt Location Register (ILR[1]).
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
206
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 18: RTC
Table 180: Alarm registers Name ALSEC ALMIN ALHOUR ALDOM ALDOW ALDOY ALMON ALYEAR Size 6 6 5 5 3 9 4 12 Description Alarm value for Seconds Alarm value for Minutes Alarm value for Hours Alarm value for Day of Month Alarm value for Day of Week Alarm value for Day of Year Alarm value for Months Alarm value for Years Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Address 0xE002 4060 0xE002 4064 0xE002 4068 0xE002 406C 0xE002 4070 0xE002 4074 0xE002 4078 0xE002 407C
18.5 RTC usage notes

If the RTC is used, VBAT must be connected to either pin V3 or an independent power supply (external battery). Otherwise, VBAT should be tied to the ground (VSS). No provision is made in the LPC2131/2/4/6/8 to retain RTC status upon the VBAT power loss, or to maintain time incrementation if the clock source is lost, interrupted, or altered. Since the RTC operates using one of two available clocks (the VPB clock (PCLK) or the 32 kHz signal coming from the RTCX1-2pins), any interruption of the selected clock will cause the time to drift away from the time value it would have provided otherwise. The variance could be to actual clock time if the RTC was initialized to that, or simply an error in elapsed time since the RTC was activated. While the signal from RTCX1-2 pins can be used to supply the RTC clock at anytime, selecting the PCLK as the RTC clock and entering the Power-down mode will cause a lapse in the time update. Also, feeding the RTC with the PCLK and altering this timebase during system operation (by reconfiguring the PLL, the VPB divider, or the RTC prescaler) will result in some form of accumulated time error. Accumulated time errors may occur in case RTC clock source is switched between the PCLK to the RTCX pins, too. Once the 32 kHz signal from RTCX1-2 pins is selected as a clock source, the RTC can operate completely without the presence of the VPB clock (PCLK). Therefore, power sensitive applications (i.e. battery powered application) utilizing the RTC will reduce the power consumption by using the signal from RTCX1-2 pins, and writing a 0 into the PCRTC bit in the PCONP power control register (see Section 3.8 Power control on page 33).
18.6 Reference clock divider (prescaler)

The reference clock divider (hereafter referred to as the prescaler) allows generation of a 32.768 kHz reference clock from any peripheral clock frequency greater than or equal to 65.536 kHz (2 32.768 kHz). This permits the RTC to always run at the proper rate regardless of the peripheral clock rate. Basically, the Prescaler divides the peripheral clock (PCLK) by a value which contains both an integer portion and a fractional portion. The result is not a continuous output at a constant frequency, some clock periods will be one PCLK longer than others. However, the overall result can always be 32,768 counts per second.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
207
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 18: RTC
The reference clock divider consists of a 13-bit integer counter and a 15-bit fractional counter. The reasons for these counter sizes are as follows: 1. For frequencies that are expected to be supported by the LPC2131/2/4/6/8, a 13-bit integer counter is required. This can be calculated as 160 MHz divided by 32,768 minus 1 = 4881 with a remainder of 26,624. Thirteen bits are needed to hold the value 4881, but actually supports frequencies up to 268.4 MHz (32,768 8192). 2. The remainder value could be as large as 32,767, which requires 15 bits.
Table 181: Reference clock divider registers Name PREINT Size 13 Description Prescale Value, integer portion Prescale Value, fractional portion Access R/W R/W Address 0xE002 4080 0xE002 4084
PREFRAC 15
18.6.1 Prescaler Integer register (PREINT - 0xE002 4080)

This is the integer portion of the prescale value, calculated as: PREINT = int (PCLK / 32768) 1. The value of PREINT must be greater than or equal to 1.
Table 182: Prescaler Integer register (PREINT - address 0xE002 4080) bit description Bit 12:0 15:13 Symbol Description Reset value 0 NA
Prescaler Integer Contains the integer portion of the RTC prescaler value. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
18.6.2 Prescaler Fraction register (PREFRAC - 0xE002 4084)

This is the fractional portion of the prescale value, and may be calculated as: PREFRAC = PCLK ((PREINT + 1) 32768).
Table 183: Prescaler Integer register (PREFRAC - address 0xE002 4084) bit description Bit 14:0 15 Symbol Description Reset value 0 NA
Prescaler Fraction Contains the integer portion of the RTC prescaler value. Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined.
18.6.3 Example of prescaler usage

In a simplistic case, the PCLK frequency is 65.537 kHz. So: PREINT = int (PCLK / 32768) 1 = 1 and PREFRAC = PCLK - ([PREINT + 1] 32768) = 1 With this prescaler setting, exactly 32,768 clocks per second will be provided to the RTC by counting 2 PCLKs 32,767 times, and 3 PCLKs once. In a more realistic case, the PCLK frequency is 10 MHz. Then,
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
208
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 18: RTC
PREINT = int (PCLK / 32768) 1 = 304 and PREFRAC = PCLK ([PREINT + 1] 32768) = 5,760. In this case, 5,760 of the prescaler output clocks will be 306 (305 + 1) PCLKs long, the rest will be 305 PCLKs long. In a similar manner, any PCLK rate greater than 65.536 kHz (as long as it is an even number of cycles per second) may be turned into a 32 kHz reference clock for the RTC. The only caveat is that if PREFRAC does not contain a zero, then not all of the 32,768 per second clocks are of the same length. Some of the clocks are one PCLK longer than others. While the longer pulses are distributed as evenly as possible among the remaining pulses, this "jitter" could possibly be of concern in an application that wishes to observe the contents of the Clock Tick Counter (CTC) directly(Section 18.4.4 Clock Tick Counter Register (CTCR - 0xE002 4004) on page 203).
To clock tick counter clock
PCLK (VPB Clock)

CLK
CLK
UNDERFLOW
15 BIT FRACTION COUNTER
13 BIT INTEGER COUNTER (DOWN COUNTER) RELOAD
15
13
Extend reload
COMBINATORIAL LOGIC
15
13 BIT RELOAD INTEGER REGISTER (PREINT)
15 BIT FRACTION REGISTER (PREFRAC)
13 VPB Bus
15
Fig 52. RTC prescaler block diagram
18.6.4 Prescaler operation

The Prescaler block labelled "Combination Logic" in Figure 52 determines when the decrement of the 13-bit PREINT counter is extended by one PCLK. In order to both insert the correct number of longer cycles, and to distribute them evenly, the ombinatorial Logic associates each bit in PREFRAC with a combination in the 15-bit Fraction Counter. These associations are shown in the following Table 184.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
209
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 18: RTC
For example, if PREFRAC bit 14 is a one (representing the fraction 1/2), then half of the cycles counted by the 13-bit counter need to be longer. When there is a 1 in the LSB of the Fraction Counter, the logic causes every alternate count (whenever the LSB of the Fraction Counter=1) to be extended by one PCLK, evenly distributing the pulse widths. Similarly, a one in PREFRAC bit 13 (representing the fraction 1/4) will cause every fourth cycle (whenever the two LSBs of the Fraction Counter=10) counted by the 13-bit counter to be longer.
Table 184: Prescaler cases where the Integer Counter reload value is incremented Fraction Counter PREFRAC Bit 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -
--- ---- ---- ---1 --- ---- ---- --10 --- ---- ---- -100 --- ---- ---- 1000 --- ---- ---1 0000 --- ---- --10 0000 --- ---- -100 0000 --- ---- 1000 0000 --- ---1 0000 0000 --- --10 0000 0000 --- -100 0000 0000 --- 1000 0000 0000 --1 0000 0000 0000 -10 0000 0000 0000 100 0000 0000 0000
18.7 RTC external 32 kHz oscillator component selection

The RTC external oscillator circuit is shown in Figure 53. Since the feedback resistance is integrated on chip, only a crystal, the capacitances CX1 and CX2 need to be connected externally to the microcontroller.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
210
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 18: RTC
LPC2131/2/4/6/8 RTXC1 RTXC2
32 kHz Xtal CX1 C X2
Fig 53. RTC 32kHz crystal oscillator circuit
Table 185 gives the crystal parameters that should be used. CL is the typical load capacitance of the crystal and is usually specified by the crystal manufacturer. The actual CL influences oscillation frequency. When using a crystal that is manufactured for a different load capacitance, the circuit will oscillate at a slightly different frequency (depending on the quality of the crystal) compared to the specified one. Therefore for an accurate time reference it is advised to use the load capacitors as specified in Table 185 that belong to a specific CL. The value of external capacitances CX1 and CX2 specified in this table are calculated from the internal parasitic capacitances and the CL. Parasitics from PCB and package are not taken into account.
Table 185: Recommended values for the RTC external 32 kHz oscillator CX1/X2 components Crystal load capacitance Maximum crystal series CL resistance RS 11 pF 13 pF 15 pF < 100 k < 100 k < 100 k External load capacitors CX1, CX2 18 pF, 18 pF 22 pF, 22 pF 27 pF, 27 pF
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
211
UM10120
Chapter 19: Watchdog Timer
19.1 Features
Internally resets chip if not periodically reloaded. Debug mode. Enabled by software but requires a hardware reset or a watchdog reset/interrupt to be
disabled.
Incorrect/Incomplete feed sequence causes reset/interrupt if enabled. Flag to indicate Watchdog reset. Programmable 32-bit timer with internal pre-scaler. Selectable time period from (TPCLK x 256 x 4) to (TPCLK x 232 x 4) in multiples of TPCLK x 4.
19.2 Applications
The purpose of the watchdog is to reset the microcontroller within a reasonable amount of time if it enters an erroneous state. When enabled, the watchdog will generate a system reset if the user program fails to "feed" (or reload) the watchdog within a predetermined amount of time. For interaction of the on-chip watchdog and other peripherals, especially the reset and boot-up procedures, please read Section 3.9 Reset on page 35 of this document.
19.3 Description
The watchdog consists of a divide by 4 fixed pre-scaler and a 32-bit counter. The clock is fed to the timer via a pre-scaler. The timer decrements when clocked. The minimum value from which the counter decrements is 0xFF. Setting a value lower than 0xFF causes 0xFF to be loaded in the counter. Hence the minimum watchdog interval is (TPCLK x 256 x 4) and the maximum watchdog interval is (TPCLK x 232 x 4) in multiples of (TPCLK x 4). The watchdog should be used in the following manner:
Set the watchdog timer constant reload value in WDTC register. Setup mode in WDMOD register. Start the watchdog by writing 0xAA followed by 0x55 to the WDFEED register. Watchdog should be fed again before the watchdog counter underflows to prevent reset/interrupt.
When the Watchdog counter underflows, the program counter will start from 0x0000 0000 as in the case of external reset. The Watchdog Time-Out Flag (WDTOF) can be examined to determine if the watchdog has caused the reset condition. The WDTOF flag must be cleared by software.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
212
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 19: WDT

The watchdog contains 4 registers as shown in Table 186 below.
Table 186: Watchdog register map Name WDMOD WDTC Description Access Reset Address value[1] 0 0xFF NA 0xE000 0000 0xE000 0004 0xE000 0008
Watchdog Mode register. This register contains R/W the basic mode and status of the Watchdog Timer. Watchdog Timer Constant register. This register determines the time-out value. R/W WO
WDFEED Watchdog Feed sequence register. Writing 0xAA followed by 0x55 to this register reloads the Watchdog timer to its preset value. WDTV
[1]
Watchdog Timer Value register. This register reads RO out the current value of the Watchdog timer.
0xFF
0xE000 000C
19.4.1 Watchdog Mode register (WDMOD - 0xE000 0000)

The WDMOD register controls the operation of the watchdog as per the combination of WDEN and RESET bits.
Table 187: Watchdog operating modes selection WDEN 0 1 WDRESET X (0 or 1) 0 Mode of Operation Debug/Operate without the watchdog running. Watchdog Interrupt Mode: debug with the Watchdog interrupt but no WDRESET enabled. When this mode is selected, a watchdog counter underflow will set the WDINT flag and the watchdog interrupt request will be generated. 1 1 Watchdog Reset Mode: operate with the watchdog interrupt and WDRESET enabled. When this mode is selected, a watchdog counter underflow will reset the microcontroller. While the watchdog interrupt is also enabled in this case (WDEN = 1) it will not be recognized since the watchdog reset will clear the WDINT flag.
Once the WDEN and/or WDRESET bits are set they can not be cleared by software. Both flags are cleared by an external reset or a watchdog timer underflow. WDTOF The Watchdog Time-Out Flag is set when the watchdog times out. This flag is cleared by software. WDINT The Watchdog Interrupt Flag is set when the watchdog times out. This flag is cleared when any reset occurs. Once the watchdog interrupt is serviced, it can be disabled in the VIC or the watchdog interrupt request will be generated indefinitely.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
213
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 19: WDT
Table 188: Watchdog Mode register (WDMOD - address 0xE000 0000) bit description Bit 0 1 2 3 7:4 Symbol WDEN WDTOF WDINT Description WDEN Watchdog interrupt Enable bit (Set Only). WDTOF Watchdog Time-Out Flag. WDINT Watchdog interrupt Flag (Read Only). Reserved, user software should not write ones to reserved bits. The value read from a reserved bit is not defined. Reset value 0 0 0 (Only after external reset) 0 NA
WDRESET WDRESET Watchdog Reset Enable bit (Set Only).
19.4.2 Watchdog Timer Constant register (WDTC - 0xE000 0004)

The WDTC register determines the time-out value. Every time a feed sequence occurs the WDTC content is reloaded in to the watchdog timer. Its a 32-bit register with 8 LSB set to 1 on reset. Writing values below 0xFF will cause 0xFF to be loaded to the WDTC. Thus the minimum time-out interval is TPCLK 256 4.
Table 189: Watchdog Timer Constatnt register (WDTC - address 0xE000 0004) bit description Bit 31:0 Symbol Count Description Watchdog time-out interval. Reset value 0x0000 00FF
19.4.3 Watchdog Feed register (WDFEED - 0xE000 0008)

Writing 0xAA followed by 0x55 to this register will reload the watchdog timer to the WDTC value. This operation will also start the watchdog if it is enabled via the WDMOD register. Setting the WDEN bit in the WDMOD register is not sufficient to enable the watchdog. A valid feed sequence must first be completed before the Watchdog is capable of generating an interrupt/reset. Until then, the watchdog will ignore feed errors. Once 0xAA is written to the WDFEED register the next operation in the Watchdog register space should be a WRITE (0x55) to the WDFFED register otherwise the watchdog is triggered. The interrupt/reset will be generated during the second PCLK following an incorrect access to a watchdog timer register during a feed sequence.
Table 190: Watchdog Feed register (WDFEED - address 0xE000 0008) bit description Bit 7:0 Symbol Feed Description Feed value should be 0xAA followed by 0x55. Reset value NA
19.4.4 Watchdog Timer Value register (WDTV - 0xE000 000C)

The WDTV register is used to read the current value of watchdog timer.
Table 191: Watchdog Timer Value register (WDTV - address 0xE000 000C) bit description Bit 31:0 Symbol Count Description Counter timer value. Reset value 0x0000 00FF
19.5 Block diagram

The block diagram of the Watchdog is shown below in the Figure 54.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
214
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 19: WDT
Feed sequence
Feed error WDTC
Feed OK WDFEED Under flow
PLCK
/4
32 BIT DOWN COUNTER
Enable count 1 WDTV register CURRENT WD TIMER COUNT
SHADOW BIT
WDMOD Register
WDEN
WDTOF
WDINT
WDRESET
1. Counter is enabled only when the WDEN bit is set and a valid feed sequence is done. 2. WDEN and WDRESET are sticky bits. Once set they cant be cleared until the watchdog underflows or an external reset occurs.
Fig 54. Watchdog block diagram
Reset Interrupt
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
215
UM10120
Chapter 20: Flash Memory System and Programming
20.1 Flash Boot Loader

The Boot Loader controls initial operation after reset, and also provides the means to accomplish programming of the Flash memory. This could be initial programming of a blank device, erasure and re-programming of a previously programmed device, or programming of the Flash memory by the application program in a running system.
20.2 Features
In-System Programming: In-System programming (ISP) is programming or
reprogramming the on-chip flash memory, using the boot loader software and a serial port. This can be done when the part resides in the end-user board.
In Application Programming: In-Application (IAP) programming is performing erase

and write operation on the on-chip flash memory, as directed by the end-user application code.
20.3 Applications
The flash boot loader provides both In-System and In-Application programming interfaces for programming the on-chip flash memory.
20.4 Description
The flash boot loader code is executed every time the part is powered on or reset. The loader can execute the ISP command handler or the user application code. A a LOW level after reset at the P0.14 pin is considered as an external hardware equest to start the ISP command handler. Assuming that proper signal is present on X1 pin when the rising edge on RESET pin is generated, it may take up to 3 ms before P0.14 is sampled and the decision on whether to continue with user code or ISP handler is made. If P0.14 is sampled low and the watchdog overflow flag is set, the external hardware request to start the ISP command handler is ignored. If there is no request for the ISP command handler execution (P0.14 is sampled HIGH after reset), a search is made for a valid user program. If a valid user program is found then the execution control is transferred to it. If a valid user program is not found, the auto-baud routine is invoked. Pin P0.14 that is used as hardware request for ISP requires special attention. Since P0.14 is in high impedance mode after reset, it is important that the user provides external hardware (a pull-up resistor or other device) to put the pin in a defined state. Otherwise unintended entry into ISP mode may occur.
20.4.1 Memory map after any reset

The boot block is 12 kB in size and resides in the top portion (starting from 0x0007 D000) of the on-chip flash memory. After any reset the entire boot block is also mapped to the top of the on-chip memory space i.e. the boot block is also visible in the memory region starting from the address 0x7FFF D000. The flash boot loader is designed to run from this
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
216
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 20: Flash Memory
memory area but both the ISP and IAP software use parts of the on-chip RAM. The RAM usage is described later in this chapter. The interrupt vectors residing in the boot block of the on-chip flash memory also become active after reset, i.e., the bottom 64 bytes of the boot block are also visible in the memory region starting from the address 0x0000 0000. The reset vector contains a jump instruction to the entry point of the flash boot loader software.
2.0 GB
12 kB BOOT BLOCK
(RE-MAPPED FROM TOP OF FLASH MEMORY) (BOOT BLOCK INTERRUPT VECTORS)
0x7FFF FFFF
2.0 GB - 12kB
0x7FFF D000
12 kB BOOT BLOCK RE-MAPPED TO HIGHER ADDRESS RANGE
0x0007 FFFF 0x0007 D000
ON-CHIP FLASH MEMORY
0.0 GB
ACTIVE INTERRUPT VECTORS FROM THE BOOT BLOCK
0x0000 0000
Note: Memory regions are not drawn to scale.

Fig 55. Map of lower memory after reset
20.4.2 Criterion for valid user code

Criterion for valid user code: The reserved ARM interrupt vector location (0x0000 0014) should contain the 2s complement of the check-sum of the remaining interrupt vectors. This causes the checksum of all of the vectors together to be 0. The boot loader code disables the overlaying of the interrupt vectors from the boot block, then checksums the interrupt vectors in sector 0 of the flash. If the signatures match then the execution control is transferred to the user code by loading the program counter with 0x0000 0000. Hence the user flash reset vector should contain a jump instruction to the entry point of the user application code. If the signature is not valid, the auto-baud routine synchronizes with the host via serial port 0. The host should send a ? (0x3F) as a synchronization character and wait for a response. The host side serial port settings should be 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and no parity. The auto-baud routine measures the bit time of the received synchronization character in terms of its own frequency and programs the baud rate generator of the serial port. It also sends an ASCII string ("Synchronized<CR><LF>") to the Host. In response to this host should send the same string ("Synchronized<CR><LF>"). The auto-baud routine looks at
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
217
Volume 1
UM10120
the received characters to verify synchronization. If synchronization is verified then "OK<CR><LF>" string is sent to the host. Host should respond by sending the crystal frequency (in kHz) at which the part is running. For example, if the part is running at 10 MHz , the response from the host should be "10000<CR><LF>". "OK<CR><LF>" string is sent to the host after receiving the crystal frequency. If synchronization is not verified then the auto-baud routine waits again for a synchronization character. For auto-baud to work correctly, the crystal frequency should be greater than or equal to 10 MHz. The on-chip PLL is not used by the boot code. Once the crystal frequency is received the part is initialized and the ISP command handler is invoked. For safety reasons an "Unlock" command is required before executing the commands resulting in flash erase/write operations and the "Go" command. The rest of the commands can be executed without the unlock command. The Unlock command is required to be executed once per ISP session. The Unlock command is explained in Section 20.8 ISP commands on page 222.
20.4.3 Communication protocol

All ISP commands should be sent as single ASCII strings. Strings should be terminated with Carriage Return (CR) and/or Line Feed (LF) control characters. Extra <CR> and <LF> characters are ignored. All ISP responses are sent as <CR><LF> terminated ASCII strings. Data is sent and received in UU-encoded format.
20.4.4 ISP command format

"Command Parameter_0 Parameter_1 ... Parameter_n<CR><LF>" "Data" (Data only for Write commands)
20.4.5 ISP response format

"Return_Code<CR><LF>Response_0<CR><LF>Response_1<CR><LF> ... Response_n<CR><LF>" "Data" (Data only for Read commands)
20.4.6 ISP data format

The data stream is in UU-encode format. The UU-encode algorithm converts 3 bytes of binary data in to 4 bytes of printable ASCII character set. It is more efficient than Hex format which converts 1 byte of binary data in to 2 bytes of ASCII hex. The sender should send the check-sum after transmitting 20 UU-encoded lines. The length of any UU-encoded line should not exceed 61 characters(bytes) i.e. it can hold 45 data bytes. The receiver should compare it with the check-sum of the received bytes. If the check-sum matches then the receiver should respond with "OK<CR><LF>" to continue further transmission. If the check-sum does not match the receiver should respond with "RESEND<CR><LF>". In response the sender should retransmit the bytes. A description of UU-encode is available at http://www.wotsit.org.
20.4.7 ISP flow control

A software XON/XOFF flow control scheme is used to prevent data loss due to buffer overrun. When the data arrives rapidly, the ASCII control character DC3 (stop) is sent to stop the flow of data. Data flow is resumed by sending the ASCII control character DC1 (start). The host should also support the same flow control scheme.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
218
Volume 1
UM10120
20.4.8 ISP command sbort

Commands can be aborted by sending the ASCII control character "ESC". This feature is not documented as a command under "ISP Commands" section. Once the escape code is received the ISP command handler waits for a new command.
20.4.9 Interrupts during ISP

The boot block interrupt vectors located in the boot block of the flash are active after any reset.
20.4.10 Interrupts during IAP

The on-chip flash memory is not accessible during erase/write operations. When the user application code starts executing the interrupt vectors from the user flash area are active. The user should either disable interrupts, or ensure that user interrupt vectors are active in RAM and that the interrupt handlers reside in RAM, before making a flash erase/write IAP call. The IAP code does not use or disable interrupts.
20.4.11 RAM used by ISP command handler

ISP commands use on-chip RAM from 0x4000 0120 to 0x4000 01FF. The user could use this area, but the contents may be lost upon reset. Flash programming commands use the top 32 bytes of on-chip RAM. The stack is located at RAM top 32. The maximum stack usage is 256 bytes and it grows downwards.
20.4.12 RAM used by IAP command handler

Flash programming commands use the top 32 bytes of on-chip RAM. The maximum stack usage in the user allocated stack space is 128 bytes and it grows downwards.
20.4.13 RAM used by RealMonitor

The RealMonitor uses on-chip RAM from 0x4000 0040 to 0x4000 011F. he user could use this area if RealMonitor based debug is not required. The Flash boot loader does not initialize the stack for RealMonitor.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
219
Volume 1
UM10120
20.4.14 Boot process flowchart
RESET
INITIALIZE
CRP * ENABLED?
No
Yes
ENABLE DEBUG
WATCHDOG FLAG SET?
Yes
No USER CODE VALID? Yes
ENTER ISP MODE?

(PO.14 LOW?)
No
Yes
No
EXECUTE INTERNAL USER CODE
RUN AUTO-BAUD
No
AUTO-BAUD SUCCESSFUL?
Yes RECEIVE CRYSTAL FREQUENCY
RUN ISP COMMAND HANDLER
* Code read protection

Fig 56. Boot process flowchart
20.5 Sector numbers

Some IAP and ISP commands operate on "sectors" and specify sector numbers. The following table indicate the correspondence between sector numbers and memory addresses for LPC2131/2/4/6/8 devices containing 32, 64, 128, 256 and 512K bytes of Flash respectively. IAP, ISP, and RealMonitor routines are located in the boot block. The
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
220
Volume 1
UM10120
boot block is present at addresses 0x0007 D000 to 0x0007 FFFF in all devices. ISP and IAP commands do not allow write/erase/go operation on the boot block. Because of the boot block, the amount of Flash available for user code and data is 500 K bytes in "512K" devices. On the other hand, in case of the LPC2131/2/4/6 microcontroller all 32/64/128/256 K of Flash are available for users application.
Table 192: Flash sectors in LPC2131, LPC2132, LPC2134, LPC2136 and LPC2138 LPC2131 (32kB) LPC2132 (64kB) LPC2134 (128kB) LPC2136 (256kB) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + LPC2138 (512kB) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
221
Sector Number
Sector Size [kB]
Address Range
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (0x0A) 11 (0x0B) 12 (0x0C) 13 (0x0D) 14 (0X0E) 15 (0x0F) 16 (0x10) 17 (0x11) 18 (0x12) 19 (0x13) 20 (0x14) 21 (0x15) 22 (0x16) 23 (0x17) 24 (0x18) 25 (0x19) 26 (0x1A)
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 4 4 4 4 4
0X0000 0000 - 0X0000 0FFF 0X0000 1000 - 0X0000 1FFF 0X0000 2000 - 0X0000 2FFF 0X0000 3000 - 0X0000 3FFF 0X0000 4000 - 0X0000 4FFF 0X0000 5000 - 0X0000 5FFF 0X0000 6000 - 0X0000 6FFF 0X0000 7000 - 0X0000 7FFF 0x0000 8000 - 0X0000 FFFF 0x0001 0000 - 0X0001 7FFF 0x0001 8000 - 0X0001 FFFF 0x0002 0000 - 0X0002 7FFF 0x0002 8000 - 0X0002 FFFF 0x0003 0000 - 0X0003 7FFF 0x0003 8000 - 0X0003 FFFF 0x0004 0000 - 0X0004 7FFF 0x0004 8000 - 0X0004 FFFF 0x0005 0000 - 0X0005 7FFF 0x0005 8000 - 0X0005 FFFF 0x0006 0000 - 0X0006 7FFF 0x0006 8000 - 0X0006 FFFF 0x0007 0000 - 0X0007 7FFF 0x0007 8000 - 0X0007 8FFF 0x0007 9000 - 0X0007 9FFF 0x0007 A000 - 0X0007 AFFF 0x0007 B000 - 0X0007 BFFF 0x0007 C000 - 0X0007 CFFF
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + +
20.6 Flash content protection mechanism

The LPC2131/2/4/6/8 is equipped with the Error Correction Code (ECC) capable Flash memory. The purpose of an error correction module is twofold. Firstly, it decodes data words read from the memory into output data words. Secondly, it encodes data words to be written to the memory. The error correction capability consists of single bit error correction with Hamming code.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
Volume 1
UM10120
The operation of ECC is transparent to the running application. The ECC content itself is stored in a flash memory not accessible by users code to either read from it or write into it on its own. A byte of ECC corresponds to every consecutive 128 bits of the user accessible Flash. Consequently, Flash bytes from 0x0000 0000 to 0x0000 0003 are protected by the first ECC byte, Flash bytes from 0x0000 0004 to 0x0000 0007 are protected by the second ECC byte, etc. Whenever the CPU requests a read from users Flash, both 128 bits of raw data containing the specified memory location and the matching ECC byte are evaluated. If the ECC mechanism detects a single error in the fetched data, a correction will be applied before data are provided to the CPU. When a write request into the users Flash is made, write of user specified content is accompanied by a matching ECC value calculated and stored in the ECC memory. When a sector of users Flash memory is erased, corresponding ECC bytes are also erased. Once an ECC byte is written, it can not be updated unless it is erased first. Therefore, for the implemented ECC mechanism to perform properly, data must be written into the Flash memory in groups of 4 bytes (or multiples of 4), aligned as described above.
20.7 Code Read Protection (CRP)

Code read protection is enabled by programming the flash address location 0x1FC (User flash sector 0) with value 0x8765 4321 (2271560481 Decimal). Address 0x1FC is used to allow some room for the fiq exception handler. When the code read protection is enabled the JTAG debug port, external memory boot and the following ISP commands are disabled:
Read Memory Write to RAM Go Copy RAM to Flash
The ISP commands mentioned above terminate with return code CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ENABLED. The ISP erase command only allows erasure of all user sectors when the code read protection is enabled. This limitation does not exist if the code read protection is not enabled. IAP commands are not affected by the code read protection. Important: CRP is active/inactive once the device has gone through a power cycle.
20.8 ISP commands

The following commands are accepted by the ISP command handler. Detailed status codes are supported for each command. The command handler sends the return code INVALID_COMMAND when an undefined command is received. Commands and return codes are in ASCII format. CMD_SUCCESS is sent by ISP command handler only when received ISP command has been completely executed and the new ISP command can be given by the host. Exceptions from this rule are "Set Baud Rate", "Write to RAM", "Read Memory", and "Go" commands.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
222
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 193: ISP command summary ISP Command Unlock Set Baud Rate Echo Write to RAM Read Memory Prepare sector(s) for write operation Copy RAM to Flash Go Erase sector(s) Blank check sector(s) Read Part ID Read Boot code version Compare Usage U <Unlock Code> B <Baud Rate> <stop bit> A <setting> W <start address> <number of bytes> R <address> <number of bytes> P <start sector number> <end sector number> Descibed in Table 194 Table 195 Table 197 Table 198 Table 199 Table 200
C <Flash address> <RAM address> <number of bytes> Table 201 G <address> <Mode> E <start sector number> <end sector number> I <start sector number> <end sector number> J K M <address1> <address2> <number of bytes> Table 202 Table 203 Table 204 Table 205 Table 207 Table 208
20.8.1 Unlock <unlock code>

Table 194: ISP Unlock command Command Input Return Code U Unlock code: 2313010 CMD_SUCCESS | INVALID_CODE | PARAM_ERROR Description Example This command is used to unlock flash Write, Erase, and Go commands. "U 23130<CR><LF>" unlocks the flash Write/Erase & Go commands.
20.8.2 Set Baud Rate <baud rate> <stop bit>

Table 195: ISP Set Baud Rate command Command Input Return Code B Baud Rate: 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 | 230400 Stop bit: 1 | 2 CMD_SUCCESS | INVALID_BAUD_RATE | INVALID_STOP_BIT | PARAM_ERROR Description Example This command is used to change the baud rate. The new baud rate is effective after the command handler sends the CMD_SUCCESS return code. "B 57600 1<CR><LF>" sets the serial port to baud rate 57600 bps and 1 stop bit.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
223
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 196: Correlation between possible ISP baudrates and external crystal frequency (in MHz) ISP Baudrate .vs. External Crystal Frequency 10.0000 11.0592 12.2880 14.7456 15.3600 18.4320 19.6608 24.5760 25.0000 9600 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 19200 + + + + + + + + + 38400 + + 57600 115200 230400
20.8.3 Echo <setting>

Table 197: ISP Echo command Command Input Return Code Description Example A Setting: ON = 1 | OFF = 0 CMD_SUCCESS | PARAM_ERROR The default setting for echo command is ON. When ON the ISP command handler sends the received serial data back to the host. "A 0<CR><LF>" turns echo off.
20.8.4 Write to RAM <start address> <number of bytes>

The host should send the data only after receiving the CMD_SUCCESS return code. The host should send the check-sum after transmitting 20 UU-encoded lines. The checksum is generated by adding raw data (before UU-encoding) bytes and is reset after transmitting 20 UU-encoded lines. The length of any UU-encoded line should not exceed 61 characters(bytes) i.e. it can hold 45 data bytes. When the data fits in less then 20 UU-encoded lines then the check-sum should be of the actual number of bytes sent. The ISP command handler compares it with the check-sum of the received bytes. If the check-sum matches, the ISP command handler responds with "OK<CR><LF>" to continue further transmission. If the check-sum does not match, the ISP command handler responds with "RESEND<CR><LF>". In response the host should retransmit the bytes.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
224
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 198: ISP Write to RAM command Command Input W Start Address: RAM address where data bytes are to be written. This address should be a word boundary. Number of Bytes: Number of bytes to be written. Count should be a multiple of 4 Return Code CMD_SUCCESS | ADDR_ERROR (Address not on word boundary) | ADDR_NOT_MAPPED | COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not multiple of 4) | PARAM_ERROR | CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ENABLED Description Example This command is used to download data to RAM. Data should be in UU-encoded format. This command is blocked when code read protection is enabled. "W 1073742336 4<CR><LF>" writes 4 bytes of data to address 0x4000 0200.
20.8.5 Read memory <address> <no. of bytes>

The data stream is followed by the command success return code. The check-sum is sent after transmitting 20 UU-encoded lines. The checksum is generated by adding raw data (before UU-encoding) bytes and is reset after transmitting 20 UU-encoded lines. The length of any UU-encoded line should not exceed 61 characters(bytes) i.e. it can hold 45 data bytes. When the data fits in less then 20 UU-encoded lines then the check-sum is of actual number of bytes sent. The host should compare it with the checksum of the received bytes. If the check-sum matches then the host should respond with "OK<CR><LF>" to continue further transmission. If the check-sum does not match then the host should respond with "RESEND<CR><LF>". In response the ISP command handler sends the data again.
Table 199: ISP Read memory command Command Input R Start Address: Address from where data bytes are to be read. This address should be a word boundary. Number of Bytes: Number of bytes to be read. Count should be a multiple of 4. Return Code CMD_SUCCESS followed by <actual data (UU-encoded)> | ADDR_ERROR (Address not on word boundary) | ADDR_NOT_MAPPED | COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not a multiple of 4) | PARAM_ERROR | CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ENABLED Description Example This command is used to read data from RAM or Flash memory. This command is blocked when code read protection is enabled. "R 1073741824 4<CR><LF>" reads 4 bytes of data from address 0x4000 0000.
20.8.6 Prepare sector(s) for write operation <start sector number> <end sector number>
This command makes flash write/erase operation a two step process.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
225
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 200: ISP Prepare sector(s) for write operation command Command Input Return Code P Start Sector Number End Sector Number: Should be greater than or equal to start sector number. CMD_SUCCESS | BUSY | INVALID_SECTOR | PARAM_ERROR Description This command must be executed before executing "Copy RAM to Flash" or "Erase Sector(s)" command. Successful execution of the "Copy RAM to Flash" or "Erase Sector(s)" command causes relevant sectors to be protected again. The boot block can not be prepared by this command. To prepare a single sector use the same "Start" and "End" sector numbers. "P 0 0<CR><LF>" prepares the flash sector 0.
Example
20.8.7 Copy RAM to Flash <Flash address> <RAM address> <no of bytes>
Table 201: ISP Copy command Command Input C Flash Address(DST): Destination Flash address where data bytes are to be written. The destination address should be a 256 byte boundary. RAM Address(SRC): Source RAM address from where data bytes are to be read. Number of Bytes: Number of bytes to be written. Should be 256 | 512 | 1024 | 4096. Return Code CMD_SUCCESS | SRC_ADDR_ERROR (Address not on word boundary) | DST_ADDR_ERROR (Address not on correct boundary) | SRC_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED | DST_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED | COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not 256 | 512 | 1024 | 4096) | SECTOR_NOT_PREPARED_FOR WRITE_OPERATION | BUSY | CMD_LOCKED | PARAM_ERROR | CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ENABLED Description This command is used to program the flash memory. The "Prepare Sector(s) for Write Operation" command should precede this command. The affected sectors are automatically protected again once the copy command is successfully executed. The boot block cannot be written by this command. This command is blocked when code read protection is enabled. "C 0 1073774592 512<CR><LF>" copies 512 bytes from the RAM address 0x4000 8000 to the flash address 0.
Example
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
226
Volume 1
UM10120
20.8.8 Go <address> <mode>

Table 202: ISP Go command Command Input G Address: Flash or RAM address from which the code execution is to be started. This address should be on a word boundary. Instead of address if string "tEsT" is entered the program residing in reserved test area will be executed. Mode: T (Execute program in Thumb Mode) | A (Execute program in ARM mode). Return Code CMD_SUCCESS | ADDR_ERROR | ADDR_NOT_MAPPED | CMD_LOCKED | PARAM_ERROR | CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ENABLED Description This command is used to execute a program residing in RAM or Flash memory. It may not be possible to return to the ISP command handler once this command is successfully executed. This command is blocked when code read protection is enabled. "G 0 A<CR><LF>" branches to address 0x0000 0000 in ARM mode.
Example
20.8.9 Erase sector(s) <start sector number> <end sector number>

Table 203: ISP Erase sector command Command Input E Start Sector Number End Sector Number: Should be greater than or equal to start sector number. Return Code CMD_SUCCESS | BUSY | INVALID_SECTOR | SECTOR_NOT_PREPARED_FOR_WRITE_OPERATION | CMD_LOCKED | PARAM_ERROR | CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ENABLED Description This command is used to erase one or more sector(s) of on-chip Flash memory. The boot block can not be erased using this command. This command only allows erasure of all user sectors when the code read protection is enabled. "E 2 3<CR><LF>" erases the flash sectors 2 and 3.
Example
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
227
Volume 1
UM10120
20.8.10 Blank check sector(s) <sector number> <end sector number>

Table 204: ISP Blank check sector command Command Input I Start Sector Number: End Sector Number: Should be greater than or equal to start sector number. Return Code CMD_SUCCESS | SECTOR_NOT_BLANK (followed by <Offset of the first non blank word location> <Contents of non blank word location>) | INVALID_SECTOR | PARAM_ERROR | Description This command is used to blank check one or more sectors of on-chip Flash memory. Blank check on sector 0 always fails as first 64 bytes are re-mapped to flash boot block. Example "I 2 3<CR><LF>" blank checks the flash sectors 2 and 3.
20.8.11 Read Part Identification number

Table 205: ISP Read Part Identification number command Command Input Description J None. This command is used to read the part identification number.
Return Code CMD_SUCCESS followed by part identification number in ASCII (see Table 206).
Table 206: LPC213x Part Identification numbers Device LPC2131 LPC2132 LPC2134 LPC2136 LPC2138 ASCII/dec coding 196353 196369 196370 196387 196389 Hex coding 0x0002 FF01 0x0002 FF11 0x0002 FF12 0x0002 FF23 0x0002 FF25
20.8.12 Read Boot code version number

Table 207: ISP Read Boot code version number command Command Input K None
Return Code CMD_SUCCESS followed by 2 bytes of boot code version number in ASCII format. It is to be interpreted as <byte1(Major)>.<byte0(Minor)>. Description This command is used to read the boot code version number.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
228
Volume 1
UM10120
20.8.13 Compare <address1> <address2> <no of bytes>

Table 208: ISP Compare command Command Input M Address1 (DST): Starting Flash or RAM address of data bytes to be compared. This address should be a word boundary. Address2 (SRC): Starting Flash or RAM address of data bytes to be compared. This address should be a word boundary. Number of Bytes: Number of bytes to be compared; should be a multiple of 4. Return Code CMD_SUCCESS | (Source and destination data are equal) COMPARE_ERROR | (Followed by the offset of first mismatch) COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not a multiple of 4) | ADDR_ERROR | ADDR_NOT_MAPPED | PARAM_ERROR | Description This command is used to compare the memory contents at two locations. Compare result may not be correct when source or destination address contains any of the first 64 bytes starting from address zero. First 64 bytes are re-mapped to flash boot sector Example "M 8192 1073741824 4<CR><LF>" compares 4 bytes from the RAM address 0x4000 0000 to the 4 bytes from the flash address 0x2000.
20.8.14 ISP Return codes

Table 209: ISP Return codes Summary Return Mnemonic Code 0 CMD_SUCCESS Description Command is executed successfully. Sent by ISP handler only when command given by the host has been completely and successfully executed. Invalid command. Source address is not on word boundary. Destination address is not on a correct boundary. Source address is not mapped in the memory map. Count value is taken in to consideration where applicable. Destination address is not mapped in the memory map. Count value is taken in to consideration where applicable. Byte count is not multiple of 4 or is not a permitted value. Sector number is invalid or end sector number is greater than start sector number. Sector is not blank.
1 2 3 4
INVALID_COMMAND SRC_ADDR_ERROR DST_ADDR_ERROR SRC_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
DST_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED
6 7 8 9 10 11
COUNT_ERROR INVALID_SECTOR SECTOR_NOT_BLANK
SECTOR_NOT_PREPARED_FOR_ Command to prepare sector for write operation was WRITE_OPERATION not executed. COMPARE_ERROR BUSY Source and destination data not equal. Flash programming hardware interface is busy.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
229
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 209: ISP Return codes Summary Return Mnemonic Code 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 PARAM_ERROR ADDR_ERROR ADDR_NOT_MAPPED CMD_LOCKED INVALID_CODE INVALID_BAUD_RATE INVALID_STOP_BIT CODE_READ_PROTECTION_ ENABLED Description Insufficient number of parameters or invalid parameter. Address is not on word boundary. Address is not mapped in the memory map. Count value is taken in to consideration where applicable. Command is locked. Unlock code is invalid. Invalid baud rate setting. Invalid stop bit setting. Code read protection enabled.
20.9 IAP Commands

For in application programming the IAP routine should be called with a word pointer in register r0 pointing to memory (RAM) containing command code and parameters. Result of the IAP command is returned in the result table pointed to by register r1. The user can reuse the command table for result by passing the same pointer in registers r0 and r1. The parameter table should be big enough to hold all the results in case if number of results are more than number of parameters. Parameter passing is illustrated in the Figure 57. The number of parameters and results vary according to the IAP command. The maximum number of parameters is 5, passed to the "Copy RAM to FLASH" command. The maximum number of results is 2, returned by the "Blankcheck sector(s)" command. The command handler sends the status code INVALID_COMMAND when an undefined command is received. The IAP routine resides at 0x7FFF FFF0 location and it is thumb code. The IAP function could be called in the following way using C. Define the IAP location entry point. Since the 0th bit of the IAP location is set there will be a change to Thumb instruction set when the program counter branches to this address. #define IAP_LOCATION 0x7ffffff1 Define data structure or pointers to pass IAP command table and result table to the IAP function: unsigned long command[5]; unsigned long result[2]; or unsigned long * command; unsigned long * result; command=(unsigned long *) 0x result= (unsigned long *) 0x Define pointer to function type, which takes two parameters and returns void. Note the IAP returns the result with the base address of the table residing in R1.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
230
Volume 1
UM10120
typedef void (*IAP)(unsigned int [],unsigned int[]); IAP iap_entry; Setting function pointer: iap_entry=(IAP) IAP_LOCATION; Whenever you wish to call IAP you could use the following statement. iap_entry (command, result); The IAP call could be simplified further by using the symbol definition file feature supported by ARM Linker in ADS (ARM Developer Suite). You could also call the IAP routine using assembly code. The following symbol definitions can be used to link IAP routine and user application: #<SYMDEFS># ARM Linker, ADS1.2 [Build 826]: Last Updated: Wed May 08 16:12:23 2002 0x7fffff90 T rm_init_entry 0x7fffffa0 A rm_undef_handler 0x7fffffb0 A rm_prefetchabort_handler 0x7fffffc0 A rm_dataabort_handler 0x7fffffd0 A rm_irqhandler 0x7fffffe0 A rm_irqhandler2 0x7ffffff0 T iap_entry As per the ARM specification (The ARM Thumb Procedure Call Standard SWS ESPC 0002 A-05) up to 4 parameters can be passed in the r0, r1, r2 and r3 registers respectively. Additional parameters are passed on the stack. Up to 4 parameters can be returned in the r0, r1, r2 and r3 registers respectively. Additional parameters are returned indirectly via memory. Some of the IAP calls require more than 4 parameters. If the ARM suggested scheme is used for the parameter passing/returning then it might create problems due to difference in the C compiler implementation from different vendors. The suggested parameter passing scheme reduces such risk. The flash memory is not accessible during a write or erase operation. IAP commands, which results in a flash write/erase operation, use 32 bytes of space in the top portion of the on-chip RAM for execution. The user program should not be use this space if IAP flash programming is permitted in the application.
Table 210: IAP Command Summary IAP Command Prepare sector(s) for write operation Copy RAM to Flash Erase sector(s) Blank check sector(s) Read Part ID Read Boot code version Compare Reinvoke ISP Command Code 5010 5110 5210 5310 5410 5510 5610 5710 Described in Table 211 Table 212 Table 213 Table 214 Table 215 Table 216 Table 217 Table 218
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
231
Volume 1
UM10120
COMMAND CODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 ARM REGISTER r0 PARAMETER n
Command parameter table
ARM REGISTER r1
STATUS CODE RESULT 1 RESULT 2 Command result table
RESULT n
Fig 57. IAP Parameter passing
20.9.1 Prepare sector(s) for write operation

This command makes flash write/erase operation a two step process.
Table 211: IAP Prepare sector(s) for write operation command Command Input Prepare sector(s) for write operation Command code: 5010 Param0: Start Sector Number Param1: End Sector Number (should be greater than or equal to start sector number). Return Code CMD_SUCCESS | BUSY | INVALID_SECTOR Result Description None This command must be executed before executing "Copy RAM to Flash" or "Erase Sector(s)" command. Successful execution of the "Copy RAM to Flash" or "Erase Sector(s)" command causes relevant sectors to be protected again. The boot sector can not be prepared by this command. To prepare a single sector use the same "Start" and "End" sector numbers.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
232
Volume 1
UM10120
20.9.2 Copy RAM to Flash

Table 212: IAP Copy RAM to Flash command Command Input Copy RAM to Flash Command code: 5110 Param0(DST): Destination Flash address where data bytes are to be written. This address should be a 256 byte boundary. Param1(SRC): Source RAM address from which data bytes are to be read. This address should be a word boundary. Param2: Number of bytes to be written. Should be 256 | 512 | 1024 | 4096. Param3: System Clock Frequency (CCLK) in kHz. Return Code CMD_SUCCESS | SRC_ADDR_ERROR (Address not a word boundary) | DST_ADDR_ERROR (Address not on correct boundary) | SRC_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED | DST_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED | COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not 256 | 512 | 1024 | 4096) | SECTOR_NOT_PREPARED_FOR_WRITE_OPERATION | BUSY | Result Description None This command is used to program the flash memory. The affected sectors should be prepared first by calling "Prepare Sector for Write Operation" command. The affected sectors are automatically protected again once the copy command is successfully executed. The boot sector can not be written by this command.
20.9.3 Erase sector(s)

Table 213: IAP Erase sector(s) command Command Input Erase Sector(s) Command code: 5210 Param0: Start Sector Number Param1: End Sector Number (should be greater than or equal to start sector number). Param2: System Clock Frequency (CCLK) in kHz. Return Code CMD_SUCCESS | BUSY | SECTOR_NOT_PREPARED_FOR_WRITE_OPERATION | INVALID_SECTOR Result Description None This command is used to erase a sector or multiple sectors of on-chip Flash memory. The boot sector can not be erased by this command. To erase a single sector use the same "Start" and "End" sector numbers.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
233
Volume 1
UM10120
20.9.4 Blank check sector(s)

Table 214: IAP Blank check sector(s) command Command Input Blank check sector(s) Command code: 5310 Param0: Start Sector Number Param1: End Sector Number (should be greater than or equal to start sector number). Return Code CMD_SUCCESS | BUSY | SECTOR_NOT_BLANK | INVALID_SECTOR Result Result0: Offset of the first non blank word location if the Status Code is SECTOR_NOT_BLANK. Result1: Contents of non blank word location. Description This command is used to blank check a sector or multiple sectors of on-chip Flash memory. To blank check a single sector use the same "Start" and "End" sector numbers.
20.9.5 Read Part Identification number

Table 215: IAP Read Part Identification command Command Input Return Code Result Description Read part identification number Command code: 5410 Parameters: None CMD_SUCCESS | Result0: Part Identification Number (see Table 206 LPC213x Part Identification numbers on page 228 for details) This command is used to read the part identification number.
20.9.6 Read Boot code version number

Table 216: IAP Read Boot code version number command Command Input Return Code Result Description Read boot code version number Command code: 5510 Parameters: None CMD_SUCCESS | Result0: 2 bytes of boot code version number in ASCII format. It is to be interpreted as <byte1(Major)>.<byte0(Minor)> This command is used to read the boot code version number.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
234
Volume 1
UM10120
20.9.7 Compare <address1> <address2> <no of bytes>

Table 217: IAP Compare command Command Input Compare Command code: 5610 Param0(DST): Starting Flash or RAM address of data bytes to be compared. This address should be a word boundary. Param1(SRC): Starting Flash or RAM address of data bytes to be compared. This address should be a word boundary. Param2: Number of bytes to be compared; should be a multiple of 4. Return Code CMD_SUCCESS | COMPARE_ERROR | COUNT_ERROR (Byte count is not a multiple of 4) | ADDR_ERROR | ADDR_NOT_MAPPED Result Description Result0: Offset of the first mismatch if the Status Code is COMPARE_ERROR. This command is used to compare the memory contents at two locations. The result may not be correct when the source or destination includes any of the first 64 bytes starting from address zero. The first 64 bytes can be re-mapped to RAM.
20.9.8 Reinvoke ISP

Table 218: Reinvoke ISP Command Input Return Code Result Description Compare Command code: 5710 None None. This command is used to invoke the bootloader in ISP mode. This command maps boot vectors, configures P0.1 as an input and sets the vpb divider register to 0 before entering the ISP mode. This command may be used when a valid user program is present in the internal flash memory and the P0.14 pin is not accessible to force the ISP mode. This command does not disable the PLL hence it is possible to invoke the bootloader when the part is running off the PLL. In such case the ISP utility should pass the PLL frequency after autobaud handshake. Another option is to disable the PLL before making this IAP call.
20.9.9 IAP Status codes

Table 219: IAP Status codes Summary Status Mnemonic Code 0 1 2 3 4 CMD_SUCCESS INVALID_COMMAND SRC_ADDR_ERROR DST_ADDR_ERROR SRC_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED Description Command is executed successfully. Invalid command. Source address is not on a word boundary. Destination address is not on a correct boundary. Source address is not mapped in the memory map. Count value is taken in to consideration where applicable.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
235
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 219: IAP Status codes Summary Status Mnemonic Code 5 DST_ADDR_NOT_MAPPED Description Destination address is not mapped in the memory map. Count value is taken in to consideration where applicable. Byte count is not multiple of 4 or is not a permitted value. Sector number is invalid. Sector is not blank. Command to prepare sector for write operation was not executed. Source and destination data is not same. Flash programming hardware interface is busy.
6 7 8 9 10 11
COUNT_ERROR INVALID_SECTOR SECTOR_NOT_BLANK SECTOR_NOT_PREPARED_ FOR_WRITE_OPERATION COMPARE_ERROR BUSY
20.10 JTAG Flash programming interface

Debug tools can write parts of the flash image to the RAM and then execute the IAP call "Copy RAM to Flash" repeatedly with proper offset.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
236
UM10120
Chapter 21: EmbeddedICE logic
21.1 Features
No target resources are required by the software debugger in order to start the
debugging session.
Allows the software debugger to talk via a JTAG (Joint Test Action Group) port directly
to the core.
Inserts instructions directly in to the ARM7TDMI-S core. The ARM7TDMI-S core or the System state can be examined, saved or changed
depending on the type of instruction inserted.
Allows instructions to execute at a slow debug speed or at a fast system speed.
21.2 Applications
The EmbeddedICE logic provides on-chip debug support. The debugging of the target system requires a host computer running the debugger software and an EmbeddedICE protocol convertor. EmbeddedICE protocol convertor converts the Remote Debug Protocol commands to the JTAG data needed to access the ARM7TDMI-S core present on the target system.
21.3 Description
The ARM7TDMI-S Debug Architecture uses the existing JTAG1 port as a method of accessing the core. The scan chains that are around the core for production test are reused in the debug state to capture information from the databus and to insert new information into the core or the memory. There are two JTAG-style scan chains within the ARM7TDMI-S. A JTAG-style Test Access Port Controller controls the scan chains. In addition to the scan chains, the debug architecture uses EmbeddedICE logic which resides on chip with the ARM7TDMI-S core. The EmbeddedICE has its own scan chain that is used to insert watchpoints and breakpoints for the ARM7TDMI-S core. The EmbeddedICE logic consists of two real time watchpoint registers, together with a control and status register. One or both of the watchpoint registers can be programmed to halt the ARM7TDMI-S core. Execution is halted when a match occurs between the values programmed into the EmbeddedICE logic and the values currently appearing on the address bus, databus and some control signals. Any bit can be masked so that its value does not affect the comparison. Either watchpoint register can be configured as a watchpoint (i.e. on a data access) or a break point (i.e. on an instruction fetch). The watchpoints and breakpoints can be combined such that:
The conditions on both watchpoints must be satisfied before the ARM7TDMI core is
stopped. The CHAIN functionality requires two consecutive conditions to be satisfied before the core is halted. An example of this would be to set the first breakpoint to
1.For more details refer to IEEE Standard 1149.1 - 1990 Standard Test Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
237
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 21: EmbeddedICE
trigger on an access to a peripheral and the second to trigger on the code segment that performs the task switching. Therefore when the breakpoints trigger the information regarding which task has switched out will be ready for examination.
The watchpoints can be configured such that a range of addresses are enabled for
the watchpoints to be active. The RANGE function allows the breakpoints to be combined such that a breakpoint is to occur if an access occurs in the bottom 256 bytes of memory but not in the bottom 32 bytes. The ARM7TDMI-S core has a Debug Communication Channel function in-built. The debug communication channel allows a program running on the target to communicate with the host debugger or another separate host without stopping the program flow or even entering the debug state. The debug communication channel is accessed as a co-processor 14 by the program running on the ARM7TDMI-S core. The debug communication channel allows the JTAG port to be used for sending and receiving data without affecting the normal program flow. The debug communication channel data and control registers are mapped in to addresses in the EmbeddedICE logic.

Table 220: EmbeddedICE pin description Pin Name TMS TCK Type Input Input Description Test Mode Select. The TMS pin selects the next state in the TAP state machine. Test Clock. This allows shifting of the data in, on the TMS and TDI pins. It is a positive edgetriggered clock with the TMS and TCK signals that define the internal state of the device. Test Data In. This is the serial data input for the shift register. Test Data Output. This is the serial data output from the shift register. Data is shifted out of the device on the negative edge of the TCK signal. Test Reset. The nTRST pin can be used to reset the test logic within the EmbeddedICE logic. Returned Test Clock. Extra signal added to the JTAG port. Required for designs based on ARM7TDMI-S processor core. Multi-ICE (Development system from ARM) uses this signal to maintain synchronization with targets having slow or widely varying clock frequency. For details refer to "Multi-ICE System Design considerations Application Note 72 (ARM DAI 0072A)".
TDI TDO nTRST RTCK
Input Output Input Output
21.5 Reset state of multiplexed pins

On the LPC2131/2/4/6/8, the pins above are multiplexed with P1.31-26. To have them come up as a Debug port, connect a weak bias resistor (4.7-10 k depending on the external JTAG circuitry) between VSS and the P1.26/RTCK pin. To have them come up as GPIO pins, do not connect a bias resistor, and ensure that any external driver connected to P1.26/RTCK is either driving high, or is in high-impedance state, during Reset.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
238
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 21: EmbeddedICE

The EmbeddedICE logic contains 16 registers as shown in Table 221 below. The ARM7TDMI-S debug architecture is described in detail in "ARM7TDMI-S (rev 4) Technical Reference Manual" (ARM DDI 0234A) published by ARM Limited and is available via Internet at http://www.arm.com.
Table 221: EmbeddedICE logic registers Name Debug Control Debug Status Debug Comms Control Register Debug Comms Data Register Watchpoint 0 Address Value Watchpoint 0 Address Mask Watchpoint 0 Data Value Watchpoint 0 Data Mask Watchpoint 0 Control Value Watchpoint 0 Control Mask Watchpoint 1 Address Value Watchpoint 1 Address Mask Watchpoint 1 Data Value Watchpoint 1 Data Mask Watchpoint 1 Control Value Watchpoint 1 Control Mask Width 6 5 32 32 32 32 32 32 9 8 32 32 32 32 9 8 Description Force debug state, disable interrupts Status of debug Debug communication control register Debug communication data register Holds watchpoint 0 address value Holds watchpoint 0 address mask Holds watchpoint 0 data value Holds watchpoint 0 data mask Holds watchpoint 0 control value Holds watchpoint 0 control mask Holds watchpoint 1 address value Holds watchpoint 1 address mask Holds watchpoint 1 data value Holds watchpoint 1 data mask Holds watchpoint 1 control value Holds watchpoint 1 control mask Address 00000 00001 00100 00101 01000 01001 01010 01011 01100 01101 10000 10001 10010 10011 10100 10101
21.7 Block diagram

The block diagram of the debug environment is shown below in Figure 58.
JTAG PORT Serial parallel interface EMBEDDEDICE INTERFACE PROTOCOL CONVERTER
EMBEDDED ICE
Host running debugger
ARM7TDMI-S
TARGET BOARD
Fig 58. EmbeddedICE debug environment block diagram
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
239
UM10120
Chapter 22: Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM)
22.1 Features

Closely track the instructions that the ARM core is executing. 1 External trigger input 10 pin interface All registers are programmed through JTAG interface. Does not consume power when trace is not being used. THUMB instruction set support
22.2 Applications
As the microcontroller has significant amounts of on-chip memories, it is not possible to determine how the processor core is operating simply by observing the external pins. The ETM provides real-time trace capability for deeply embedded processor cores. It outputs information about processor execution to a trace port. A software debugger allows configuration of the ETM using a JTAG interface and displays the trace information that has been captured, in a format that a user can easily understand.
22.3 Description
The ETM is connected directly to the ARM core and not to the main AMBA system bus. It compresses the trace information and exports it through a narrow trace port. An external Trace Port Analyzer captures the trace information under software debugger control. Trace port can broadcast the Instruction trace information. Instruction trace (or PC trace) shows the flow of execution of the processor and provides a list of all the instructions that were executed. Instruction trace is significantly compressed by only broadcasting branch addresses as well as a set of status signals that indicate the pipeline status on a cycle by cycle basis. Trace information generation can be controlled by selecting the trigger resource. Trigger resources include address comparators, counters and sequencers. Since trace information is compressed the software debugger requires a static image of the code being executed. Self-modifying code can not be traced because of this restriction.
22.3.1 ETM configuration

The following standard configuration is selected for the ETM macrocell.
Table 222: ETM configuration Resource number/type Pairs of address comparators Data Comparators Memory Map Decoders Counters Sequencer Present Small[1] 1 0 (Data tracing is not supported) 4 1 No
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
240
Volume 1
UM10120
Chapter 22: Embedded Trace
Table 222: ETM configuration Resource number/type External Inputs External Outputs FIFOFULL Present FIFO depth Trace Packet Width
[1]
Small[1] 2 0 Yes (Not wired) 10 bytes 4/8
For details refer to ARM documentation "Embedded Trace Macrocell Specification (ARM IHI 0014E)".

Table 223: ETM pin description Pin Name TRACECLK Type Description Output Trace Clock. The trace clock signal provides the clock for the trace port. PIPESTAT[2:0], TRACESYNC, and TRACEPKT[3:0] signals are referenced to the rising edge of the trace clock. This clock is not generated by the ETM block. It is to be derived from the system clock. The clock should be balanced to provide sufficient hold time for the trace data signals. Half rate clocking mode is supported. Trace data signals should be shifted by a clock phase from TRACECLK. Refer to Figure 3.14 page 3.26 and figure 3.15 page 3.27 in "ETM7 Technical Reference Manual" (ARM DDI 0158B), for example circuits that implements both half-rateclocking and shifting of the trace data with respect to the clock. For TRACECLK timings refer to section 5.2 on page 5-13 in "Embedded Trace Macrocell Specification" (ARM IHI 0014E). Output Pipe Line status. The pipeline status signals provide a cycle-by-cycle indication of what is happening in the execution stage of the processor pipeline. Output Trace synchronization. The trace sync signal is used to indicate the first packet of a group of trace packets and is asserted HIGH only for the first packet of any branch address.
PIPESTAT[2:0]
TRACESYNC
TRACEPKT[3:0] Output Trace Packet. The trace packet signals are used to output packaged address and data information related to the pipeline status. All packets are eight bits in length. A packet is output over two cycles. In the first cycle, Packet[3:0] is output and in the second cycle, Packet[7:4] is output. EXTIN[0] Input External Trigger Input
22.5 Reset state of multiplexed pins

On the LPC2131/2/4/6/8, the ETM pin functions are multiplexed with P1.25-16. To have these pins come as a Trace port, connect a weak bias resistor (4.7 k) between the P1.20/TRACESYNC pin and VSS. To have them come up as port pins, do not connect a bias resistor to P1.20/TRACESYNC, and ensure that any external driver connected to P1.20/TRACESYNC is either driving high, or is in high-impedance state, during Reset.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
241
Volume 1
UM10120

The ETM contains 29 registers as shown in Table 224 below. They are described in detail in the ARM IHI 0014E document published by ARM Limited, which is available via the Internet at http://www.arm.com.
Table 224: ETM registers Name ETM Control ETM Configuration Code Trigger Event Description Controls the general operation of the ETM. Allows a debugger to read the number of each type of resource. Holds the controlling event. Access Register encoding R/W RO WO 000 0000 000 0001 000 0010 000 0011 000 0100 000 0101 000 0110 000 0111 000 1000 000 1001 000 1010 000 1011 000 1100 000 1101 000 1110 000 1111 001 xxxx 010 xxxx 000 xxxx 100 xxxx 101 00xx 101 01xx 101 10xx 101 11xx 110 00xx 110 10xx 110 11xx 111 0xxx 111 1xxx
Memory Map Decode Control Eight-bit register, used to statically configure WO the memory map decoder. ETM Status System Configuration Trace Enable Control 3 Trace Enable Control 2 Trace Enable Event Trace Enable Control 1 FIFOFULL Region FIFOFULL Level ViewData event ViewData Control 1 ViewData Control 2 ViewData Control 3 Address Comparator 1 to 16 Address Access Type 1 to 16 Reserved Reserved Initial Counter Value 1 to 4 Counter Enable 1 to 4 Counter reload 1 to 4 Counter Value 1 to 4 Sequencer State and Control External Output 1 to 4 Reserved Reserved Reserved Holds the pending overflow status bit. RO Holds the configuration information using the RO SYSOPT bus. Holds the trace on/off addresses. Holds the address of the comparison. Holds the enabling event. Holds the include and exclude regions. Holds the include and exclude regions. Holds the level below which the FIFO is considered full. Holds the enabling event. Holds the include/exclude regions. Holds the include/exclude regions. Holds the include/exclude regions. Holds the address of the comparison. Holds the type of access and the size. Holds the initial value of the counter. Holds the counter clock enable control and event. Holds the counter reload event. Holds the current counter value. Holds the next state triggering events. WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO WO RO -
Holds the controlling events for each output. WO
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
242
Volume 1
UM10120
22.7 Block diagram

The block diagram of the ETM debug environment is shown below in Figure 59.
APPLICATION PCB
CONNECTOR TRACE PORT ANALYZER TRACE ETM TRIGGER PERIPHERAL
10
PERIPHERAL CONNECTOR Host running debugger RAM JTAG INTERFACE UNIT 5 ARM ROM EMBEDDEDICE
LAN
Fig 59. ETM debug environment block diagram
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
243
UM10120
Chapter 23: RealMonitor
RealMonitor is a configurable software module which enables real time debug. RealMonitor is developed by ARM Inc. Information presented in this chapter is taken from the ARM document RealMonitor Target Integration Guide (ARM DUI 0142A). It applies to a specific configuration of RealMonitor software programmed in the on-chip ROM boot memory of this device. Refer to the white paper "Real Time Debug for System-on-Chip" available at http://www.arm.com/support/White_Papers?OpenDocument for background information.
23.1 Features
Allows user to establish a debug session to a currently running system without halting
or resetting the system.
Allows user time-critical interrupt code to continue executing while other user
application code is being debugged.
23.2 Applications
Real time debugging.
23.3 Description
RealMonitor is a lightweight debug monitor that allows interrupts to be serviced while user debug their foreground application. It communicates with the host using the DCC (Debug Communications Channel), which is present in the EmbeddedICE logic. RealMonitor provides advantages over the traditional methods for debugging applications in ARM systems. The traditional methods include:
Angel (a target-based debug monitor) Multi-ICE or other JTAG unit and EmbeddedICE logic (a hardware-based debug
solution). Although both of these methods provide robust debugging environments, neither is suitable as a lightweight real-time monitor. Angel is designed to load and debug independent applications that can run in a variety of modes, and communicate with the debug host using a variety of connections (such as a serial port or ethernet). Angel is required to save and restore full processor context, and the occurrence of interrupts can be delayed as a result. Angel, as a fully functional target-based debugger, is therefore too heavyweight to perform as a real-time monitor. Multi-ICE is a hardware debug solution that operates using the EmbeddedICE unit that is built into most ARM processors. To perform debug tasks such as accessing memory or the processor registers, Multi-ICE must place the core into a debug state. While the processor is in this state, which can be millions of cycles, normal program execution is suspended, and interrupts cannot be serviced.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
244
Volume 1
UM10120
RealMonitor combines features and mechanisms from both Angel and Multi-ICE to provide the services and functions that are required. In particular, it contains both the Multi-ICE communication mechanisms (the DCC using JTAG), and Angel-like support for processor context saving and restoring. RealMonitor is pre-programmed in the on-chip ROM memory (boot sector). When enabled It allows user to observe and debug while parts of application continue to run. Refer to Section 23.4 How to enable Realmonitor on page 247 for details.
23.3.1 RealMonitor components

As shown in Figure 60, RealMonitor is split in to two functional components:
DEBUGGER Host REALMONITOR.DLL RDI 1.5.1 RMHOST RDI 1.5.1 RT
JTAG Unit DCC transmissions over the JTAG link RMTARGET APPLICATION
RealMonitor protocol
Target
TARGET BOARD AND PROCESSOR
Fig 60. RealMonitor components
23.3.2 RMHost
This is located between a debugger and a JTAG unit. The RMHost controller, RealMonitor.dll, converts generic Remote Debug Interface (RDI) requests from the debugger into DCC-only RDI messages for the JTAG unit. For complete details on debugging a RealMonitor-integrated application from the host, see the ARM RMHost User Guide (ARM DUI 0137A).
23.3.3 RMTarget
This is pre-programmed in the on-chip ROM memory (boot sector), and runs on the target hardware. It uses the EmbeddedICE logic, and communicates with the host using the DCC. For more details on RMTarget functionality, see the RealMonitor Target Integration Guide (ARM DUI 0142A).
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
245
Volume 1
UM10120
23.3.4 How RealMonitor works

In general terms, the RealMonitor operates as a state machine, as shown in Figure 61. RealMonitor switches between running and stopped states, in response to packets received by the host, or due to asynchronous events on the target. RMTarget supports the triggering of only one breakpoint, watchpoint, stop, or semihosting SWI at a time. There is no provision to allow nested events to be saved and restored. So, for example, if user application has stopped at one breakpoint, and another breakpoint occurs in an IRQ handler, RealMonitor enters a panic state. No debugging can be performed after RealMonitor enters this state.
SWI Abort undef Stop SWI Abort undef
RUNNING
STOPPED
PANIC
Go
Fig 61. RealMonitor as a state machine
A debugger such as the ARM eXtended Debugger (AXD) or other RealMonitor aware debugger, that runs on a host computer, can connect to the target to send commands and receive data. This communication between host and target is illustrated in Figure 60. The target component of RealMonitor, RMTarget, communicates with the host component, RMHost, using the Debug Communications Channel (DCC), which is a reliable link whose data is carried over the JTAG connection. While user application is running, RMTarget typically uses IRQs generated by the DCC. This means that if user application also wants to use IRQs, it must pass any DCC-generated interrupts to RealMonitor. To allow nonstop debugging, the EmbeddedICE-RT logic in the processor generates a Prefetch Abort exception when a breakpoint is reached, or a Data Abort exception when a watchpoint is hit. These exceptions are handled by the RealMonitor exception handlers that inform the user, by way of the debugger, of the event. This allows user application to continue running without stopping the processor. RealMonitor considers user application to consist of two parts:
a foreground application running continuously, typically in User, System, or SVC mode a background application containing interrupt and exception handlers that are
triggered by certain events in user system, including: IRQs or FIQs Data and Prefetch aborts caused by user foreground application. This indicates an error in the application being debugged. In both cases the host is notified and the user application is stopped.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
246
Volume 1
UM10120
Undef exception caused by the undefined instructions in user foreground application. This indicates an error in the application being debugged. RealMonitor stops the user application until a "Go" packet is received from the host. When one of these exceptions occur that is not handled by user application, the following happens:
RealMonitor enters a loop, polling the DCC. If the DCC read buffer is full, control is
passed to rm_ReceiveData() (RealMonitor internal function). If the DCC write buffer is free, control is passed to rm_TransmitData() (RealMonitor internal function). If there is nothing else to do, the function returns to the caller. The ordering of the above comparisons gives reads from the DCC a higher priority than writes to the communications link.
RealMonitor stops the foreground application. Both IRQs and FIQs continue to be
serviced if they were enabled by the application at the time the foreground application was stopped.
23.4 How to enable Realmonitor

The following steps must be performed to enable RealMonitor. A code example which implements all the steps can be found at the end of this section.
23.4.1 Adding stacks

User must ensure that stacks are set up within application for each of the processor modes used by RealMonitor. For each mode, RealMonitor requires a fixed number of words of stack space. User must therefore allow sufficient stack space for both RealMonitor and application. RealMonitor has the following stack requirements:
Table 225: RealMonitor stack requirement Processor Mode Undef Prefetch Abort Data Abort IRQ RealMonitor Stack Usage (Bytes) 48 16 16 8
23.4.2 IRQ mode

A stack for this mode is always required. RealMonitor uses two words on entry to its interrupt handler. These are freed before nested interrupts are enabled.
23.4.3 Undef mode

A stack for this mode is always required. RealMonitor uses 12 words while processing an undefined instruction exception.
23.4.4 SVC mode

RealMonitor makes no use of this stack.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
247
Volume 1
UM10120
23.4.5 Prefetch Abort mode

RealMonitor uses four words on entry to its Prefetch abort interrupt handler.
23.4.6 Data Abort mode

RealMonitor uses four words on entry to its data abort interrupt handler.
23.4.7 User/System mode

23.4.8 FIQ mode

23.4.9 Handling exceptions

This section describes the importance of sharing exception handlers between RealMonitor and user application.
23.4.10 RealMonitor exception handling

To function properly, RealMonitor must be able to intercept certain interrupts and exceptions. Figure 62 illustrates how exceptions can be claimed by RealMonitor itself, or shared between RealMonitor and application. If user application requires the exception sharing, they must provide function (such as app_IRQDispatch ()). Depending on the nature of the exception, this handler can either:
Pass control to the RealMonitor processing routine, such as rm_irqhandler2(). Claim the exception for the application itself, such as app_IRQHandler ().
In a simple case where an application has no exception handlers of its own, the application can install the RealMonitor low-level exception handlers directly into the vector table of the processor. Although the irq handler must get the address of the Vectored Interrupt Controller. The easiest way to do this is to write a branch instruction (<address>) into the vector table, where the target of the branch is the start address of the relevant RealMonitor exception handler.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
248
Volume 1
UM10120
Real monitor supplied exception vector handlers RM_UNDEF_HANDLER() RM_PREFETCHABORT_HANDLER() RM_DATAABORT_HANDLER() RM_IRQHANDLER()
RESET UNDEF SWI
Sharing IRQs between ReaMonitor and User IRQ handler PREFETCH ABORT DATA ABORT RESERVED OR IRQ FIQ APP_IRQDISPATCH APP_IRQHANDLER2() RM_IRQHANDLER2()
Fig 62. Exception handlers
23.4.11 RMTarget initialization

While the processor is in a privileged mode, and IRQs are disabled, user must include a line of code within the start-up sequence of application to call rm_init_entry().
23.4.12 Code example

The following example shows how to setup stack, VIC, initialize RealMonitor and share non vectored interrupts: IMPORT rm_init_entry IMPORT rm_prefetchabort_handler IMPORT rm_dataabort_handler IMPORT rm_irqhandler2 IMPORT rm_undef_handler IMPORT User_Entry ;Entry point of user application. CODE32 ENTRY ;Define exception table. Instruct linker to place code at address 0x0000 0000
AREA exception_table, CODE
LDR LDR LDR LDR LDR NOP
pc, Reset_Address pc, Undefined_Address pc, SWI_Address pc, Prefetch_Address pc, Abort_Address ; Insert User code valid signature here.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
249
Volume 1
UM10120
LDR pc, [pc, #-0xFF0] ;Load IRQ vector from VIC LDR PC, FIQ_Address Reset_Address Undefined_Address SWI_Address Prefetch_Address Abort_Address FIQ_Address AREA init_code, CODE ram_end EQU 0x4000xxxx ; Top of on-chip RAM. __init ; /********************************************************************* ; * Set up the stack pointers for various processor modes. Stack grows ; * downwards. ; *********************************************************************/ LDR r2, =ram_end ;Get top of RAM MRS r0, CPSR ;Save current processor mode ; Initialize the Undef mode stack for RealMonitor use BIC r1, r0, #0x1f ORR r1, r1, #0x1b MSR CPSR_c, r1 ;Keep top 32 bytes for flash programming routines. ;Refer to Flash Memory System and Programming chapter SUB sp,r2,#0x1F ; Initialize the Abort mode stack for RealMonitor BIC r1, r0, #0x1f ORR r1, r1, #0x17 MSR CPSR_c, r1 ;Keep 64 bytes for Undef mode stack SUB sp,r2,#0x5F ; Initialize the IRQ mode stack for RealMonitor and User BIC r1, r0, #0x1f ORR r1, r1, #0x12 MSR CPSR_c, r1 ;Keep 32 bytes for Abort mode stack SUB sp,r2,#0x7F ; Return to the original mode. MSR CPSR_c, r0 ; Initialize the stack for user application ; Keep 256 bytes for IRQ mode stack SUB sp,r2,#0x17F ; /*********************************************************************
DCD DCD DCD DCD DCD DCD
__init ;Reset Entry point rm_undef_handler ;Provided by RealMonitor 0 ;User can put address of SWI handler here rm_prefetchabort_handler ;Provided by RealMonitor rm_dataabort_handler ;Provided by RealMonitor 0 ;User can put address of FIQ handler here
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
250
Volume 1
UM10120
; ; ; ; ; ; ;
* Setup Vectored Interrupt controller. DCC Rx and Tx interrupts * generate Non Vectored IRQ request. rm_init_entry is aware * of the VIC and it enables the DBGCommRX and DBGCommTx interrupts. * Default vector address register is programmed with the address of * Non vectored app_irqDispatch mentioned in this example. User can setup * Vectored IRQs or FIQs here. *********************************************************************/ VICBaseAddr EQU 0xFFFFF000 ; VIC Base address VICDefVectAddrOffset EQU 0x34 LDR LDR STR r0, =VICBaseAddr r1, =app_irqDispatch r1, [r0,#VICDefVectAddrOffset]
; ; ;
; ; ;
BL rm_init_entry ;Initialize RealMonitor ;enable FIQ and IRQ in ARM Processor MRS r1, CPSR ; get the CPSR BIC r1, r1, #0xC0 ; enable IRQs and FIQs MSR CPSR_c, r1 ; update the CPSR /********************************************************************* * Get the address of the User entry point. *********************************************************************/ LDR lr, =User_Entry MOV pc, lr /********************************************************************* * Non vectored irq handler (app_irqDispatch) *********************************************************************/
AREA app_irqDispatch, CODE VICVectAddrOffset EQU 0x30 app_irqDispatch ;enable interrupt nesting STMFD sp!, {r12,r14} MRS r12, spsr MSR cpsr_c,0x1F
;Save SPSR in to r12 ;Re-enable IRQ, go to system mode
;User should insert code here if non vectored Interrupt sharing is ;required. Each non vectored shared irq handler must return to ;the interrupted instruction by using the following code. ; MSR cpsr_c, #0x52 ;Disable irq, move to IRQ mode ; MSR spsr, r12 ;Restore SPSR from r12 ; STMFD sp!, {r0} ; LDR r0, =VICBaseAddr ; STR r1, [r0,#VICVectAddrOffset] ;Acknowledge Non Vectored irq has finished ; LDMFD sp!, {r12,r14,r0} ;Restore registers ; SUBS pc, r14, #4 ;Return to the interrupted instruction ;user interrupt did not happen so call rm_irqhandler2. This handler ;is not aware of the VIC interrupt priority hardware so trick
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
251
Volume 1
UM10120
;rm_irqhandler2 to return here STMFD sp!, {ip,pc} LDR pc, rm_irqhandler2 ;rm_irqhandler2 returns here MSR cpsr_c, #0x52 MSR spsr, r12 STMFD sp!, {r0} LDR r0, =VICBaseAddr STR r1, [r0,#VICVectAddrOffset] LDMFD sp!, {r12,r14,r0} SUBS pc, r14, #4 END
;Disable irq, move to IRQ mode ;Restore SPSR from r12
;Acknowledge Non Vectored irq has finished ;Restore registers ;Return to the interrupted instruction
23.5 RealMonitor build options

RealMonitor was built with the following options: RM_OPT_DATALOGGING=FALSE This option enables or disables support for any target-to-host packets sent on a non RealMonitor (third-party) channel. RM_OPT_STOPSTART=TRUE This option enables or disables support for all stop and start debugging features. RM_OPT_SOFTBREAKPOINT=TRUE This option enables or disables support for software breakpoints. RM_OPT_HARDBREAKPOINT=TRUE Enabled for cores with EmbeddedICE-RT. This device uses ARM-7TDMI-S Rev 4 with EmbeddedICE-RT. RM_OPT_HARDWATCHPOINT=TRUE Enabled for cores with EmbeddedICE-RT. This device uses ARM-7TDMI-S Rev 4 with EmbeddedICE-RT. RM_OPT_SEMIHOSTING=FALSE This option enables or disables support for SWI semi-hosting. Semi-hosting provides code running on an ARM target use of facilities on a host computer that is running an ARM debugger. Examples of such facilities include the keyboard input, screen output, and disk I/O. RM_OPT_SAVE_FIQ_REGISTERS=TRUE This option determines whether the FIQ-mode registers are saved into the registers block when RealMonitor stops. RM_OPT_READBYTES=TRUE
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
252
Volume 1
UM10120
RM_OPT_WRITEBYTES=TRUE RM_OPT_READHALFWORDS=TRUE RM_OPT_WRITEHALFWORDS=TRUE RM_OPT_READWORDS=TRUE RM_OPT_WRITEWORDS=TRUE Enables/Disables support for 8/16/32 bit read/write. RM_OPT_EXECUTECODE=FALSE Enables/Disables support for executing code from "execute code" buffer. The code must be downloaded first. RM_OPT_GETPC=TRUE This option enables or disables support for the RealMonitor GetPC packet. Useful in code profiling when real monitor is used in interrupt mode. RM_EXECUTECODE_SIZE=NA "execute code" buffer size. Also refer to RM_OPT_EXECUTECODE option. RM_OPT_GATHER_STATISTICS=FALSE This option enables or disables the code for gathering statistics about the internal operation of RealMonitor. RM_DEBUG=FALSE This option enables or disables additional debugging and error-checking code in RealMonitor. RM_OPT_BUILDIDENTIFIER=FALSE This option determines whether a build identifier is built into the capabilities table of RMTarget. Capabilities table is stored in ROM. RM_OPT_SDM_INFO=FALSE SDM gives additional information about application board and processor to debug tools. RM_OPT_MEMORYMAP=FALSE This option determines whether a memory map of the board is built into the target and made available through the capabilities table RM_OPT_USE_INTERRUPTS=TRUE This option specifies whether RMTarget is built for interrupt-driven mode or polled mode. RM_FIFOSIZE=NA This option specifies the size, in words, of the data logging FIFO buffer. CHAIN_VECTORS=FALSE
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
253
Volume 1
UM10120
This option allows RMTarget to support vector chaining through HAL (ARM HW abstraction API).
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
254
UM10120
Chapter 24: Supplementary information
24.1Abbreviations
Table 226: Abbreviations Acronym ADC BOD CPU DAC DCC FIFO GPIO NA PLL POR PWM RAM SRAM UART VIC VPB Description Analog-to-Digital Converter Brown-Out Detection Central Processing Unit Digital-to-Analog Converter Debug Communications Channel First In, First Out General Purpose Input/Output Not Applicable Phase-Locked Loop Power-On Reset Pulse Width Modulator Random Access Memory Static Random Access Memory Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter Vector Interrupt Controller VLSI Peripheral Bus
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
255
Volume 1
UM10120
products, and makes no representations or warranties that these products are free from patent, copyright, or mask work right infringement, unless otherwise specified. Application information Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. Philips Semiconductors make no representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification.
24.2Disclaimers
Life support These products are not designed for use in life support appliances, devices, or systems where malfunction of these products can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury. Philips Semiconductors customers using or selling these products for use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Philips Semiconductors for any damages resulting from such application. Right to make changes Philips Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes in the products - including circuits, standard cells, and/or software - described or contained herein in order to improve design and/or performance. When the product is in full production (status Production), relevant changes will be communicated via a Customer Product/Process Change Notification (CPCN). Philips Semiconductors assumes no responsibility or liability for the use of any of these products, conveys no licence or title under any patent, copyright, or mask work right to these
24.3Trademarks
Notice All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners. I2C-bus wordmark and logo are trademarks of Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
256
Volume 1
UM10120
24.4 Tables
Table 1: Table 2: Table 3: Table 4: Table 5: Table 6: LPC2131/2132/2134/2136/2138 device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ARM exception vector locations . . . . . . . . . . . .12 LPC2131/2/4/6/8 memory mapping modes . . .12 Pin summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Summary of system control registers . . . . . . . .17 Recommended values for CX1/X2 in oscillation mode (crystal and external components parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 External interrupt registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 External Interrupt Flag register (EXTINT - address 0xE01F C140) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Interrupt Wakeup register (INTWAKE - address 0xE01F C144) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 External Interrupt Mode register (EXTMODE address 0xE01F C148) bit description . . . . . . .23 External Interrupt Polarity register (EXTPOLAR address 0xE01F C14C) bit description. . . . . . .23 Memory Mapping control register (MEMMAP address 0xE01F C040) bit description . . . . . . .26 PLL registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 PLL Control register (PLLCON - address 0xE01F C080) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 PLL Configuration register (PLLCFG - address 0xE01F C084) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 PLL Status register (PLLSTAT - address 0xE01F C088) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 PLL Control bit combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 PLL Feed register (PLLFEED - address 0xE01F C08C) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Elemens determining PLLs frequency . . . . . . .31 PLL Divider values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 PLL Multiplier values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Power control registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Power Control register (PCON - address 0xE01F COCO) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Power Control for Peripherals register (PCONP address 0xE01F C0C4) bit description. . . . . . .35 Reset Source identificator Register (RSIR address 0xE01F C180) bit description . . . . . . .37 VPB divider register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 VPB Divider register (VPBDIV - address 0xE01F C100) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 MAM Responses to program accesses of various types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 MAM responses to data and DMA accesses of various types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Summary of MAM registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Table 31: MAM Control Register (MAMCR - address 0xE01F C000) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Table 32: MAM Timing register (MAMTIM - address 0xE01F C004) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Table 33: VIC register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Table 34: Software Interrupt register (VICSoftInt - address 0xFFFF F018) bit allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Table 35: Software Interrupt register (VICSoftInt - address 0xFFFF F018) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Table 36: Software Interrupt Clear register (VICSoftIntClear - address 0xFFFF F01C) bit allocation . . . . . . 51 Table 37: Software Interrupt Clear register (VICSoftIntClear - address 0xFFFF F01C) bit description . . . . . 51 Table 38: Raw Interrupt status register (VICRawIntr address 0xFFFF F008) bit allocation . . . . . . . 52 Table 39: Raw Interrupt status register (VICRawIntr address 0xFFFF F008) bit description . . . . . . . 52 Table 40: Interrupt Enable register (VICIntEnable - address 0xFFFF F010) bit allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Table 41: Interrupt Enable register (VICIntEnable - address 0xFFFF F010) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Table 42: Software Interrupt Clear register (VICIntEnClear address 0xFFFF F014) bit allocation . . . . . . . 53 Table 43: Software Interrupt Clear register (VICIntEnClear address 0xFFFF F014) bit description . . . . . . . 53 Table 44: Interrupt Select register (VICIntSelect - address 0xFFFF F00C) bit allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Table 45: Interrupt Select register (VICIntSelect - address 0xFFFF F00C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Table 46: IRQ Status register (VICIRQStatus - address 0xFFFF F000) bit allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Table 47: IRQ Status register (VICIRQStatus - address 0xFFFF F000) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Table 48: FIQ Status register (VICFIQStatus - address 0xFFFF F004) bit allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Table 49: FIQ Status register (VICFIQStatus - address 0xFFFF F004) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Table 50: Vector Control registers 0-15 (VICvectCntl0-15 0xFFFF F200-23C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . 55 Table 51: Vector Address registers (VICVectAddr0-15 addresses 0xFFFF F100-13C) bit description . 56 Table 52: Default Vector Address register (VICDefVectAddr - address 0xFFFF F034) bit description. . . . . . 56 Table 53: Vector Address register (VICVectAddr - address 0xFFFF F030) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Table 54: Protection Enable register (VICProtection address 0xFFFF F020) bit description . . . . . . . 56 Table 55: Connection of interrupt sources to the Vectored
Table 7: Table 8: Table 9: Table 10: Table 11: Table 12: Table 13: Table 14: Table 15: Table 16: Table 17: Table 18: Table 19: Table 20: Table 21: Table 22: Table 23: Table 24: Table 25: Table 26: Table 27: Table 28: Table 29: Table 30:
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
257
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 82: UART0 FIFO Control Register (U0FCR - address 0xE000 C008) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Table 83: UART0 Line Control Register (U0LCR - address 0xE000 C00C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Table 84: UART0 Line Status Register (U0LSR - address 0xE000 C014, read only) bit description . . . . . 91 Table 85: UART0 Scratch pad register (U0SCR - address 0xE000 C01C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Table 86: UART0 Transmit Enable Register (U0TER address 0xE000 C030) bit description . . . . . . . 93 Table 87: UART1 pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Table 88: UART1 register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Table 89: UART1 Receiver Buffer Register (U1RBR address 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Read Only) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Table 90: UART1 Transmitter Holding Register (U1THR address 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Write Only) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Table 91: UART1 Divisor Latch LSB register (U1DLL address 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 1) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Table 92: UART1 Divisor Latch MSB register (U1DLM address 0xE001 0004, when DLAB = 1) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Table 93: Some baud-rates available when using 20 MHz peripheral clock (PCLK = 20 MHz). . . . . . . . . . 99 Table 94: UART1 Interrupt Enable Register (U1IER address 0xE001 0004, when DLAB = 0) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Table 95: UART1 Interrupt Identification Register (U1IIR address 0xE001 0008, read only) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Table 96: UART1 interrupt handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Table 97: UART1 FIFO Control Register ( U1FCR - address 0xE001 0008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Table 98: UART1 Line Control Register (U1LCR - address 0xE001 000C) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Table 99: UART1 Modem Control Register (U1MCR address 0xE001 0010), LPC2134/6/8 only bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Table 100:UART1 Line Status Register (U1LSR - address 0xE001 0014, read only) bit description. . . . . 104 Table 101:UART1 Modem Status Register (U1MSR address 0xE001 0018), LPC2134/6/8 only bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Table 102:UART1 Scratch pad register (U1SCR - address 0xE001 0014) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Table 103:UART1 Transmit Enable Register (U1TER address 0xE001 0030) bit description . . . . . . 107 Table 104:I2C Pin Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Table 105:I2C0CONSET and I2C1CONSET used to
Interrupt Controller (VIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Table 56: Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Table 57: Pin connect block register map. . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Table 58: Pin function Select register 0 (PINSEL0 - address 0xE002 C000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Table 59: Pin function Select register 1 (PINSEL1 - address 0xE002 C004) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Table 60: Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2 0xE002 C014) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Table 61: Pin function select register bits . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Table 62: GPIO pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Table 63: GPIO register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Table 64: GPIO Pin Value register 0 (IO0PIN - address 0xE002 8000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Table 65: GPIO Pin Value register 1 (IO1PIN - address 0xE002 8010) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Table 66: GPIO Output Set register 0 (IO0SET - address 0xE002 8004 bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Table 67: GPIO Output Set register 1 (IO1SET - address 0xE002 8014) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Table 68: GPIO Output Clear register 0 (IO0CLR - address 0xE002 800C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Table 69: GPIO Output Clear register 1 (IO1CLR - address 0xE002 801C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Table 70: GPIO Direction Register 0 (IO0DIR - address 0xE002 8008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Table 71: GPIO Direction Register 1 (IO1DIR - address 0xE002 8018) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Table 72: UART0 pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Table 73: UART0 register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Table 74: UART0 Receiver Buffer Register (U0RBR address 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Read Only) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Table 75: UART0 Transmit Holding Register (U0THR address 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Write Only) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Table 76: UART0 Divisor Latch LSB register (U0DLL address 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 1) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Table 77: UART0 Divisor Latch MSB register (U0DLM address 0xE000 C004, when DLAB = 1) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Table 78: Some baud-rates available when using 20 MHz peripheral clock (PCLK=20 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . .87 Table 79: UART0 Interrupt Enable Register (U0IER address 0xE000 C004, when DLAB = 0) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Table 80: UART0 Interrupt Identification Register (UOIIR address 0xE000 C008, read only) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Table 81: UART0 interrupt handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
258
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 130:SPI Data Register (S0SPDR - address 0xE002 0008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Table 131:SPI Clock Counter Register (S0SPCCR - address 0xE002 000C) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Table 132:SPI Interrupt register (S0SPINT - address 0xE002 001C) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Table 133:SSP pin descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Table 134:SSP register map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Table 135:SSP Control Register 0 (SSPCR0 - address 0xE006 8000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Table 136:SSP Control Register 1 (SSPCR1 - address 0xE006 8004) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Table 137:SSP Data Register (SSPDR - address 0xE006 8008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Table 138:SSP Status Register (SSPDR - address 0xE006 800C) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Table 139:SSP Clock Prescale Register (SSPCPSR address 0xE006 8010) bit description . . . . . . 167 Table 140:SSP Interrupt Mask Set/Clear register (SSPIMSC - address 0xE006 8014) bit description . . . . . 168 Table 141:SSP Raw Interrupt Status register (SSPRIS address 0xE006 8018) bit description . . . . . . 168 Table 142:SSP Masked Interrupt Status register (SSPMIS -address 0xE006 801C) bit description . . . . . 169 Table 143:SSP interrupt Clear Register (SSPICR - address 0xE006 8020) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Table 144:Timer/Counter pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Table 145:TIMER/COUNTER0 and TIMER/COUNTER1 register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Table 146:Interrupt Register (IR, TIMER0: T0IR - address 0xE000 4000 and TIMER1: T1IR - address 0xE000 8000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Table 147:Timer Control Register (TCR, TIMER0: T0TCR address 0xE000 4004 and TIMER1: T1TCR address 0xE000 8004) bit description . . . . . . 174 Table 148:Count Control Register (CTCR, TIMER0: T0CTCR - address 0xE000 4070 and TIMER1: T1TCR - address 0xE000 8070) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Table 149:Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR address 0xE000 4014 and TIMER1: T1MCR address 0xE000 8014) bit description . . . . . . 176 Table 150:Capture Control Register (CCR, TIMER0: T0CCR - address 0xE000 4028 and TIMER1: T1CCR address 0xE000 8028) bit description . . . . . . 177 Table 151:External Match Register (EMR, TIMER0: T0EMR - address 0xE000 403C and TIMER1: T1EMR address0xE000 803C) bit description . . . . . . 178 Table 152:External match control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Table 153:Set and reset inputs for PWM Flip-Flops . . . . 184 Table 154:Pin summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
configure Master mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Table 106:I2C0CONSET and I2C1CONSET used to configure Slave mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Table 107:I2C register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Table 108:I2C Control Set register (I2CONSET: I2C0, I2C0CONSET - address 0xE001 C000 and I2C1, I2C1CONSET - address 0xE005 C000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Table 109:I2C Control Set register (I2CONCLR: I2C0, I2C0CONCLR - address 0xE001 C018 and I2C1, I2C1CONCLR - address 0xE005 C018) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Table 110:I2C Status register (I2STAT: I2C0, I2C0STAT address 0xE001 C004 and I2C1, I2C1STAT address 0xE005 C004) bit description . . . . . .121 Table 111:I2C Data register ( I2DAT: I2C0, I2C0DAT address 0xE001 C008 and I2C1, I2C1DAT address 0xE005 C008) bit description . . . . . .121 Table 112:I2C Slave Address register (I2ADR: I2C0, I2C0ADR - address 0xE001 C00C and I2C1, I2C1ADR - address 0xE005 C00C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Table 113:I2C SCL High Duty Cycle register (I2SCLH: I2C0, I2C0SCLH - address 0xE001 C010 and I2C1, I2C1SCLH - address 0xE005 C010) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Table 114:I2C SCL Low Duty Cycle register (I2SCLL: I2C0, I2C0SCLL - address 0xE001 C014 and I2C1, I2C1SCLL - address 0xE005 C014) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Table 115:Example I2C clock rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Table 116:Abbreviations used to describe an I2C operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Table 117:I2CONSET used to initialize Master Transmitter mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Table 118:I2C0ADR and I2C1ADR usage in Slave Receiver mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Table 119:I2C0CONSET and I2C1CONSET used to initialize Slave Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Table 120:Master Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Table 121:Master Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Table 122:Slave Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Table 123:Slave Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Table 124:Miscellaneous States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Table 125:SPI data to clock phase relationship. . . . . . . .148 Table 126:SPI pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Table 127:SPI register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Table 128:SPI Control Register (S0SPCR - address 0xE002 0000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Table 129:SPI Status Register (S0SPSR - address 0xE002 0004) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
259
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 184:Prescaler cases where the Integer Counter reload value is incremented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Table 185:Recommended values for the RTC external 32 kHz oscillator CX1/X2 components . . . . . . . 211 Table 186:Watchdog register map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Table 187:Watchdog operating modes selection . . . . . . 213 Table 188:Watchdog Mode register (WDMOD - address 0xE000 0000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Table 189:Watchdog Timer Constatnt register (WDTC address 0xE000 0004) bit description . . . . . . 214 Table 190:Watchdog Feed register (WDFEED - address 0xE000 0008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Table 191:Watchdog Timer Value register (WDTV - address 0xE000 000C) bit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Table 192:Flash sectors in LPC2131, LPC2132, LPC2134, LPC2136 and LPC2138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Table 193:ISP command summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Table 194:ISP Unlock command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Table 195:ISP Set Baud Rate command . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Table 196:Correlation between possible ISP baudrates and external crystal frequency (in MHz) . . . . . . . . 224 Table 197:ISP Echo command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Table 198:ISP Write to RAM command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Table 199:ISP Read memory command. . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Table 200:ISP Prepare sector(s) for write operation command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Table 201:ISP Copy command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Table 202:ISP Go command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Table 203:ISP Erase sector command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Table 204:ISP Blank check sector command . . . . . . . . . 228 Table 205:ISP Read Part Identification number command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Table 206:LPC213x Part Identification numbers . . . . . . 228 Table 207:ISP Read Boot code version number command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Table 208:ISP Compare command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Table 209:ISP Return codes Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Table 210:IAP Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Table 211:IAP Prepare sector(s) for write operation command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Table 212:IAP Copy RAM to Flash command . . . . . . . . 233 Table 213:IAP Erase sector(s) command . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Table 214:IAP Blank check sector(s) command . . . . . . . 234 Table 215:IAP Read Part Identification command . . . . . 234 Table 216:IAP Read Boot code version number command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Table 217:IAP Compare command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Table 218:Reinvoke ISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Table 219:IAP Status codes Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Table 220:EmbeddedICE pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Table 221:EmbeddedICE logic registers . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Table 155:Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) register map .186 Table 156:PWM Interrupt Register (PWMIR - address 0xE001 4000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Table 157:PWM Timer Control Register (PWMTCR address 0xE001 4004) bit description . . . . . .188 Table 158:Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR address 0xE000 4014 and TIMER1: T1MCR address 0xE000 8014) bit description . . . . . .189 Table 159:PWM Control Register (PWMPCR - address 0xE001 404C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Table 160:PWM Latch Enable Register (PWMLER - address 0xE001 4050) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Table 161:ADC pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Table 162:ADC registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Table 163:A/D Control Register (AD0CR - address 0xE003 4000 and AD1CR - address 0xE006 0000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Table 164:A/D Data Register (AD0DR - address 0xE003 4004 and AD1DR - address 0xE006 0004) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Table 165:A/D Global Start Register (ADGSR - address 0xE003 4008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Table 166:DAC pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Table 167:DAC Register (DACR - address 0xE006 C000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Table 168:Real Time Clock (RTC) register map . . . . . . .201 Table 169:Miscellaneous registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Table 170:Interrupt Location Register (ILR - address 0xE002 4000) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Table 171:Clock Tick Counter Register (CTCR - address 0xE002 4004) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Table 172:Clock Control Register (CCR - address 0xE002 4008) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Table 173:Counter Increment Interrupt Register (CIIR address 0xE002 400C) bit description . . . . . .204 Table 174:Alarm Mask Register (AMR - address 0xE002 4010) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Table 175:Consolidated Time register 0 (CTIME0 - address 0xE002 4014) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Table 176:Consolidated Time register 1 (CTIME1 - address 0xE002 4018) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Table 177:Consolidated Time register 2 (CTIME2 - address 0xE002 401C) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Table 178:Time counter relationships and values . . . . . .206 Table 179:Time counter registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Table 180:Alarm registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Table 181:Reference clock divider registers . . . . . . . . . .208 Table 182:Prescaler Integer register (PREINT - address 0xE002 4080) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Table 183:Prescaler Integer register (PREFRAC - address 0xE002 4084) bit description . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
260
Volume 1
UM10120
Table 222:ETM configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Table 223:ETM pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Table 224:ETM registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Table 225:RealMonitor stack requirement. . . . . . . . . . . .247 Table 226:Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
261
Volume 1
UM10120
24.5 Figures
Fig 1. Fig 2. Fig 3. Fig 4. Fig 5. Fig 6. LPC2131/2/4/6/8 block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 System memory map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Peripheral memory map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 AHB peripheral map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 VPB peripheral map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Map of lower memory is showing re-mapped and re-mappable areas (LPC2138 with 512 kB Flash) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Oscillator modes and models: a) slave mode of operation, b) oscillation mode of operation, c) external crystal model used for CX1/X2 evaluation18 FOSC selection algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 External interrupt logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 PLL block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Reset block diagram including the wakeup timer .37 VPB divider connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Simplified block diagram of the Memory Accelerator Module (MAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Block diagram of the Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 LPC2131 64-pin package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 LPC2132 64-pin package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 LPC2134/6/8 64-pin package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 LPC2131/2/4/6/8 UART0 block diagram . . . . . . .94 LPC2131/2/4/6/8 UART1 block diagram . . . . . .108 I2C-bus Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Format in the Master Transmitter mode . . . . . . .111 Format of Master Receive mode . . . . . . . . . . . .112 A Master Receiver switches to Master Transmitter after sending Repeated START . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Format of Slave Receiver mode. . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Format of Slave Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . .113 I2C serial interface block diagram . . . . . . . . . . .115 Arbitration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Serial clock synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Format and States in the Master Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Format and States in the Master Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Format and States in the Slave Receiver mode.128 Format and States in the Slave Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Simultaneous repeated START conditions from two masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Forced access to a busy I2C-bus . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Recovering from a bus obstruction caused by a low level on SDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 SPI data transfer format (CPHA = 0 and CPHA = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Fig 37. SPI block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Fig 38. Texas Instruments synchronous serial frame format: a) single and b) continuous/back-to-back two frames transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Fig 39. SPI frame format with CPOL=0 and CPHA=0 (a) single and b) continuous transfer) . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Fig 40. SPI frame format with CPOL=0 and CPHA=1. . 160 Fig 41. SPI frame format with CPOL = 1 and CPHA = 0 (a) single and b) continuous transfer) . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Fig 42. SPI frame format with CPOL = 1 and CPHA = 1162 Fig 43. Microwire frame format (single transfer) . . . . . . 163 Fig 44. Microwire frame format (continuos transfers) . . 164 Fig 45. Microwire frame format (continuos transfers) . . 164 Fig 46. A timer cycle in which PR=2, MRx=6, and both interrupt and reset on match are enabled . . . . . 179 Fig 47. A timer cycle in which PR=2, MRx=6, and both interrupt and stop on match are enabled . . . . . 179 Fig 48. Timer block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Fig 49. PWM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Fig 50. Sample PWM waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Fig 51. RTC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Fig 52. RTC prescaler block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Fig 53. RTC 32kHz crystal oscillator circuit. . . . . . . . . . 211 Fig 54. Watchdog block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Fig 55. Map of lower memory after reset . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Fig 56. Boot process flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Fig 57. IAP Parameter passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Fig 58. EmbeddedICE debug environment block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Fig 59. ETM debug environment block diagram . . . . . . 243 Fig 60. RealMonitor components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Fig 61. RealMonitor as a state machine . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Fig 62. Exception handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Fig 7.
Fig 8. Fig 9. Fig 10. Fig 11. Fig 12. Fig 13. Fig 14. Fig 15. Fig 16. Fig 17. Fig 18. Fig 19. Fig 20. Fig 21. Fig 22. Fig 23. Fig 24. Fig 25. Fig 26. Fig 27. Fig 28. Fig 29. Fig 30. Fig 31. Fig 32. Fig 33. Fig 34. Fig 35. Fig 36.
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
262
Volume 1
UM10120
24.6 Contents
Chapter 1: General information
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architectural overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 4 4 5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 ARM7TDMI-S processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-chip Flash memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . On-chip Static RAM (SRAM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6 6 7
Chapter 2: LPC2131/2/4/6/8 Memory Addressing

2.1 2.2 Memory maps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 LPC2131/2132/2134/2136/2138 memory re-mapping and boot block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3 Memory map concepts and operating modes 12 Memory re-mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Prefetch abort and data abort exceptions . . 15

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 Summary of system control block functions 16 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Crystal oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 External interrupt inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 External Interrupt Flag register (EXTINT 0xE01F C140) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Interrupt Wakeup register (INTWAKE 0xE01F C144) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 External Interrupt Mode register (EXTMODE 0xE01F C148) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 External Interrupt Polarity register (EXTPOLAR 0xE01F C14C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Multiple external interrupt pins . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Memory mapping control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Memory Mapping control register (MEMMAP 0xE01F C040) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Memory mapping control usage notes . . . . . . 26 Phase Locked Loop (PLL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 PLL Control register (PLLCON - 0xE01F C080) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 PLL Configuration register (PLLCFG 0xE01F C084) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.7.4 3.7.5 3.7.6 3.7.7 3.7.8 3.7.9 3.7.10 3.7.11 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.9 3.9.1 3.10 3.10.1 3.10.2 3.11 3.12 3.13 PLL Status register (PLLSTAT - 0xE01F C088). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 PLL Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 PLL Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 PLL Feed register (PLLFEED - 0xE01F C08C) 30 PLL and Power-down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 PLL frequency calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Procedure for detrmining PLL settings. . . . . . 32 PLL example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Power control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Power Control register (PCON - 0xE01F COCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Power Control for Peripherals register (PCONP 0xE01F COC4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Power control usage notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Reset Source Identification Register (RSIR 0xE01F C180) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 VPB divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 VPBDIV register (VPBDIV - 0xE01F C100) . . 38 Wakeup timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Brown-out detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Code security vs debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Chapter 4: Memory Acceleration Module (MAM)

4.1 4.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 4.3 4.3.1 MAM blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Flash memory bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
263
Volume 1
UM10120
44 44 44 45 45 4.7 4.8 4.9 MAM Control Register (MAMCR - 0xE01F C000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 MAM Timing register (MAMTIM - 0xE01F C004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 MAM usage notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.3.2 4.3.3 4.4 4.5 4.6
Instruction latches and data latches . . . . . . . . Flash programming Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAM operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 5: Vectored Interrupt Controller (VIC)

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 5.4.9 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 VIC registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Software Interrupt register (VICSoftInt 0xFFFF F018). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Software Interrupt Clear register (VICSoftIntClear - 0xFFFF F01C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Raw Interrupt status register (VICRawIntr 0xFFFF F008). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Interrupt Enable register (VICIntEnable 0xFFFF F010). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Interrupt Enable Clear register (VICIntEnClear 0xFFFF F014). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Interrupt Select register (VICIntSelect 0xFFFF F00C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 IRQ Status register (VICIRQStatus 0xFFFF F000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 FIQ Status register (VICFIQStatus 0xFFFF F004). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Vector Control registers 0-15 (VICvectCntl0-15 0xFFFF F200-23C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 5.4.10 Vector Address registers 0-15 (VICVectAddr0-15 0xFFFF F100-13C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 5.4.11 Default Vector Address register (VICDefVectAddr - 0xFFFF F034) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 5.4.12 Vector Address register (VICVectAddr 0xFFFF F030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 5.4.13 Protection Enable register (VICProtection 0xFFFF F020) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 5.5 Interrupt sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 5.6 Spurious interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 5.6.1 Details and case studies on spurious interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 5.6.2 Workaround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 5.6.3 Solution 1: test for an IRQ received during a write to disable IRQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 5.6.4 Solution 2: disable IRQs and FIQs using separate writes to the CPSR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 5.6.5 Solution 3: re-enable FIQs at the beginning of the IRQ handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 5.7 VIC usage notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chapter 6: Pin configuration

6.1 LPC2131/2132/2134/2136/2138 pinout . . . . . . 64 6.2 Pin description for LPC2131/2/4/6/8 . . . . . . . 66

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.4.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Function Select Register 0 (PINSEL0 0xE002 C000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 73 73 73 74 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 Pin function Select register 1 (PINSEL1 0xE002 C004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Pin function Select register 2 (PINSEL2 0xE002 C014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Pin function select register values . . . . . . . . . 78
Chapter 8: General Purpose Input/Output ports (GPIO)

8.1 8.2 8.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 8.4 8.4.1 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 GPIO Pin Value register 0 and 1 (IO0PIN 0xE002 8000 and IO1PIN - 0xE002 8010) . . 80
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
264
Volume 1
UM10120
8.5 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 GPIO usage notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Example 1: sequential accesses to IOSET and IOCLR affecting the same GPIO pin/bit . . . . . 82 Example 2: immediate output of 0s and 1s on a GPIO port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Writing to IOSET/IOCLR .vs. IOPIN. . . . . . . . 83
8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4
GPIO Output Set register 0 and 1 (IO0SET 0xE002 8004 and IO1SET - 0xE002 8014) . . 81 GPIO Output Clear register 0 and 1 (IO0CLR 0xE002 800C and IO1CLR - 0xE002 801C). . 81 GPIO Direction Register 0 and 1 (IO0DIR 0xE002 8008 and IO1DIR - 0xE002 8018) . . . 81

9.1 9.2 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 UART0 Receiver Buffer Register (U0RBR 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Read Only). . 86 UART0 Transmit Holding Register (U0THR 0xE000 C000, when DLAB = 0, Write Only). . 86 UART0 Divisor Latch Registers 0 and 1 (U0DLL 0xE000 C000 and U0DLM - 0xE000 C004, when DLAB = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 UART0 Baud-rate calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 UART0 Interrupt Enable Register (U0IER 0xE000 C004, when DLAB = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . 87 9.3.6 UART0 Interrupt Identification Register (U0IIR 0xE000 C008, Read Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 9.3.7 UART0 FIFO Control Register (U0FCR 0xE000 C008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 9.3.8 UART0 Line Control Register (U0LCR 0xE000 C00C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 9.3.9 UART0 Line Status Register (U0LSR 0xE000 C014, Read Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 9.3.10 UART0 Scratch pad register (U0SCR 0xE000 C01C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 9.3.11 UART0 Transmit Enable Register (U0TER 0xE000 C030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 9.4 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
9.3.4 9.3.5

10.1 10.2 10.3 10.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 UART1 Receiver Buffer Register (U1RBR 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Read Only) . . 98 10.3.2 UART1 Transmitter Holding Register (U1THR 0xE001 0000, when DLAB = 0 Write Only) . . 98 10.3.3 UART1 Divisor Latch Registers 0 and 1 (U1DLL 0xE001 0000 and U1DLM - 0xE001 0004, when DLAB = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 10.3.4 UART1 Baud-rate calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 10.3.5 UART1 Interrupt Enable Register (U1IER 0xE001 0004, when DLAB = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . 99 10.3.6 UART1 Interrupt Identification Register (U1IIR 0xE001 0008, Read Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 10.3.7 10.3.8 10.3.9 10.3.10 10.3.11 10.3.12 10.3.13 10.4 UART1 FIFO Control Register (U1FCR 0xE001 0008). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UART1 Line Control Register (U1LCR 0xE001 000C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UART1 Modem Control Register (U1MCR 0xE001 0010), LPC2134/6/8 only . . . . . . . . UART1 Line Status Register (U1LSR 0xE001 0014, Read Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UART1 Modem Status Register (U1MSR 0xE001 0018), LPC2134/6/8 only . . . . . . . . UART1 Scratch pad register (U1SCR 0xE001 001C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UART1 Transmit Enable Register (U1TER 0xE001 0030). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 103 104 104 106 106 106 107
Chapter 11: I2C interfaces I2C0 and I2C1

11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.5.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I2C operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 109 109 110 110 110 11.5.2 Master Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.3 Slave Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.4 Slave Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 I2C Implementation and operation. . . . . . . . 11.6.1 Input filters and output stages . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.2 Address Register, I2ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6.3 Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 112 113 114 114 116 116
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
265
Volume 1
UM10120
11.8.12 11.8.13 11.8.14 11.8.15 11.8.16 11.8.17 11.8.18 11.9 11.9.1 11.9.2 11.9.3 11.9.4 11.9.5 11.9.6 11.9.7 11.9.8 11.9.9 11.9.10 11.9.11 11.9.12 11.9.13 11.9.14 11.9.15 11.9.16 11.9.17 11.9.18 11.9.19 11.9.20 11.9.21 11.9.22 11.9.23 11.9.24 11.9.25 11.9.26 11.9.27 11.9.28 11.9.29 11.9.30 11.9.31 11.9.32 11.9.33 11.9.34 11.9.35 11.9.36 I2C-bus obstructed by a low level on SCL or SDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I2C State service routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I2C interrupt service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The State service routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adapting State services to an application . . Software example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialization routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Master Transmit function . . . . . . . . . . . Start Master Receive function . . . . . . . . . . . I2C interrupt routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non mode specific States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Transmitter States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Receive States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slave Receiver States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0x98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0xA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slave Transmitter States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0xA8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0xB0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0xB8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0xC0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . State : 0xC8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.6.4 11.6.5 11.6.6 11.6.7 11.6.8 11.6.9 11.7 11.7.1
11.7.2
11.7.3
11.7.4
11.7.5
11.7.6
11.7.7
11.7.8 11.8 11.8.1 11.8.2 11.8.3 11.8.4 11.8.5 11.8.6 11.8.7 11.8.8 11.8.9 11.8.10 11.8.11
Shift register, I2DAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Arbitration and synchronization logic . . . . . . 116 Serial clock generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Timing and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Control register, I2CONSET and I2CONCLR 117 Status decoder and Status register . . . . . . . 118 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 I2C Control Set register (I2CONSET: I2C0, I2C0CONSET - 0xE001 C000 and I2C1, I2C1CONSET - 0xE005 C000) . . . . . . . . . . . 119 I2C Control Clear register (I2CONCLR: I2C0, I2C0CONCLR - 0xE001 C018 and I2C1, I2C1CONCLR - 0xE005 C018). . . . . . . . . . . 120 I2C Status register (I2STAT: I2C0, I2C0STAT 0xE001 C004 and I2C1, I2C1STAT 0xE005 C004). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 I2C Data register (I2DAT: I2C0, I2C0DAT 0xE001 C008 and I2C1, I2C1DAT - 0xE005 C008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 I2C Slave Address register (I2ADR: I2C0, I2C0ADR - 0xE001 C00C and I2C1, I2C1ADR address 0xE005 C00C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 I2C SCL High duty cycle register (I2SCLH: I2C0, I2C0SCLH - 0xE001 C010 and I2C1, I2C1SCLH - 0xE0015 C010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 I2C SCL Low duty cycle register (I2SCLL: I2C0 I2C0SCLL: 0xE001 C014; I2C1 - I2C1SCLL: 0xE0015 C014). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Selecting the appropriate I2C data rate and duty cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Details of I2C operating modes. . . . . . . . . . . 123 Master Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Master Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Slave Receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Slave Transmitter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Miscellaneous States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 I2STAT = 0xF8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 I2STAT = 0x00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Some special cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Simultaneous repeated START conditions from two masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Data transfer after loss of arbitration . . . . . . 136 Forced access to the I2C-bus . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
137 137 138 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 140 140 140 140 140 140 141 141 141 141 141 142 142 142 142 142 143 143 143 143 143 144 144 144 144 145 145 145 145 145 145 146 146 146
Chapter 12: SPI Interface (SPI0)

12.1 12.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 12.2.1 12.2.2 SPI overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 SPI data transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
266
Volume 1
UM10120
149 149 150 150 150 150 151 151 151 151 12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 12.4.4 12.4.5 12.5 SPI Control Register (S0SPCR - 0xE002 0000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPI Status Register (S0SPSR - 0xE002 0004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPI Data Register (S0SPDR - 0xE002 0008) SPI Clock Counter Register (S0SPCCR 0xE002 000C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPI Interrupt register (S0SPINT - 0xE002 001C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.3 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.4 Master operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.5 Slave operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.6 Exception conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.7 Read Overrun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.8 Write Collision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.9 Mode Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2.10 Slave Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152 153 154 154 154 155
Chapter 13: SSP Controller (SPI1)

13.1 13.2 13.3 13.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Bus description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Texas Instruments Synchronous Serial (SSI) frame format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 13.3.2 SPI frame format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 13.3.3 Clock Polarity (CPOL) and Clock Phase (CPHA) control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 13.3.4 SPI format with CPOL=0,CPHA=0 . . . . . . . . 159 13.3.5 SPI format with CPOL=0,CPHA=1 . . . . . . . . 160 13.3.6 SPI format with CPOL = 1,CPHA = 0 . . . . . . 161 13.3.7 SPI format with CPOL = 1,CPHA = 1 . . . . . . 162 13.3.8 Semiconductor Microwire frame format . . . . 162 13.3.9 Setup and hold time requirements on CS with respect to SK in Microwire mode . . . . . . . . . 164 13.4 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 13.4.1 13.4.2 13.4.3 13.4.4 13.4.5 13.4.6 13.4.7 13.4.8 13.4.9 SSP Control Register 0 (SSPCR0 - 0xE006 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 SSP Control Register 1 (SSPCR1 - 0xE006 8004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 SSP Data Register (SSPDR - 0xE006 8008) 167 SSP Status Register (SSPSR - 0xE006 800C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 SSP Clock Prescale Register (SSPCPSR 0xE006 8010). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 SSP Interrupt Mask Set/Clear register (SSPIMSC - 0xE006 8014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 SSP Raw Interrupt Status register (SSPRIS 0xE006 8018). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 SSP Masked Interrupt register (SSPMIS 0xE006 801C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 SSP Interrupt Clear Register (SSPICR 0xE006 8020). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Chapter 14: Timer/Counter TIMER0 and TIMER1

14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.5.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Interrupt Register (IR, TIMER0: T0IR 0xE000 4000 and TIMER1: T1IR - 0xE000 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Timer Control Register (TCR, TIMER0: T0TCR 0xE000 4004 and TIMER1: T1TCR 0xE000 8004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Count Control Register (CTCR, TIMER0: T0CTCR - 0xE000 4070 and TIMER1: T1TCR 0xE000 8070) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Timer Counter (TC, TIMER0: T0TC 0xE000 4008 and TIMER1: T1TC - 0xE000 8008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 14.5.5 Prescale Register (PR, TIMER0: T0PR 0xE000 400C and TIMER1: T1PR - 0xE000 800C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Prescale Counter Register (PC, TIMER0: T0PC 0xE000 4010 and TIMER1: T1PC - 0xE000 8010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Match Registers (MR0 - MR3) . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Match Control Register (MCR, TIMER0: T0MCR 0xE000 4014 and TIMER1: T1MCR 0xE000 8014). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Capture Registers (CR0 - CR3) . . . . . . . . . . 177 Capture Control Register (CCR, TIMER0: T0CCR - 0xE000 4028 and TIMER1: T1CCR 0xE000 8028). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 External Match Register (EMR, TIMER0: T0EMR - 0xE000 403C; and TIMER1: T1EMR 0xE000 803C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
14.5.6
14.5.7 14.5.8
14.5.2
14.5.9 14.5.10
14.5.3
14.5.11
14.5.4
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
267
Volume 1
UM10120
14.7 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
14.6
Example timer operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Chapter 15: Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)

15.1 15.2 15.2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rules for single edge controlled PWM outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.2 Rules for double edge controlled PWM outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.1 PWM Interrupt Register (PWMIR - 0xE001 4000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4.2 PWM Timer Control Register (PWMTCR 0xE001 4004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 181 184 185 185 185 187 187 15.4.3 15.4.4 15.4.5 15.4.6 15.4.7 15.4.8 15.4.9 PWM Timer Counter (PWMTC - 0xE001 4008). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWM Prescale Register (PWMPR 0xE001 400C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWM Prescale Counter register (PWMPC 0xE001 4010). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWM Match Registers (PWMMR0 - PWMMR6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWM Match Control Register (PWMMCR 0xE001 4014). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWM Control Register (PWMPCR 0xE001 404C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWM Latch Enable Register (PWMLER 0xE001 4050). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 188 188 189 189 190 191
Chapter 16: Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)

16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.4.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 A/D Control Register (AD0CR - 0xE003 4000 and AD1CR - 0xE006 0000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 16.4.2 16.4.3 16.5 16.5.1 16.5.2 16.5.3 A/D Data Register (AD0DR - 0xE003 4004 and AD1DR - 0xE006 0004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 A/D Global Start Register (ADGSR 0xE003 4008). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Hardware-triggered conversion . . . . . . . . . . 197 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Accuracy vs. digital receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Chapter 17: Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC)

17.1 17.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 17.3 17.4 DAC Register (DACR - 0xE006 C000). . . . . . 198 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Chapter 18: Real Time Clock

18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.4.1 18.4.2 18.4.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 RTC interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Miscellaneous register group . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Interrupt Location Register (ILR - 0xE002 4000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 18.4.4 Clock Tick Counter Register (CTCR 0xE002 4004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 18.4.5 Clock Control Register (CCR - 0xE002 4008) 203 18.4.6 Counter Increment Interrupt Register (CIIR 0xE002 400C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 18.4.7 18.4.8 18.4.9 18.4.10 18.4.11 18.4.12 18.4.13 18.4.14 18.5 18.6 Alarm Mask Register (AMR - 0xE002 4010) Consolidated time registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consolidated Time register 0 (CTIME0 0xE002 4014). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consolidated Time register 1 (CTIME1 0xE002 4018). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consolidated Time register 2 (CTIME2 0xE002 401C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time counter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leap year calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm register group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTC usage notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference clock divider (prescaler). . . . . . . 204 204 204 205 205 205 206 206 207 207
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
268
Volume 1
UM10120
18.6.3 Example of prescaler usage . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 18.6.4 Prescaler operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 18.7 RTC external 32 kHz oscillator component selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
18.6.1 18.6.2
Prescaler Integer register (PREINT 0xE002 4080) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Prescaler Fraction register (PREFRAC 0xE002 4084) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Chapter 19: Watchdog Timer

19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.4.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watchdog Mode register (WDMOD 0xE000 0000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 212 212 213 213 19.4.2 Watchdog Timer Constant register (WDTC 0xE000 0004). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.3 Watchdog Feed register (WDFEED 0xE000 0008). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.4 Watchdog Timer Value register (WDTV 0xE000 000C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.5 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 214 214 214
Chapter 20: Flash Memory System and Programming

20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.4.1 20.4.2 20.4.3 20.4.4 20.4.5 20.4.6 20.4.7 20.4.8 20.4.9 20.4.10 20.4.11 20.4.12 20.4.13 20.4.14 20.5 20.6 20.7 20.8 20.8.1 20.8.2 20.8.3 20.8.4 Flash Boot Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory map after any reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . Criterion for valid user code . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISP command format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISP response format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISP data format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISP flow control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISP command sbort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts during ISP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts during IAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM used by ISP command handler . . . . . . RAM used by IAP command handler . . . . . . RAM used by RealMonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boot process flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash content protection mechanism . . . . . Code Read Protection (CRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . ISP commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlock <unlock code> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Baud Rate <baud rate> <stop bit> . . . . . Echo <setting> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Write to RAM <start address> <number of bytes> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 216 216 216 216 217 218 218 218 218 218 219 219 219 219 219 219 220 220 221 222 222 223 223 224 224 20.8.5 20.8.6 20.8.7 20.8.8 20.8.9 20.8.10 20.8.11 20.8.12 20.8.13 20.8.14 20.9 20.9.1 20.9.2 20.9.3 20.9.4 20.9.5 20.9.6 20.9.7 20.9.8 20.9.9 20.10 Read memory <address> <no. of bytes>. . . 225 Prepare sector(s) for write operation <start sector number> <end sector number> . . . . . . . . . . 225 Copy RAM to Flash <Flash address> <RAM address> <no of bytes> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Go <address> <mode> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Erase sector(s) <start sector number> <end sector number> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Blank check sector(s) <sector number> <end sector number> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Read Part Identification number . . . . . . . . . 228 Read Boot code version number . . . . . . . . . 228 Compare <address1> <address2> <no of bytes> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 ISP Return codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 IAP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Prepare sector(s) for write operation . . . . . . 232 Copy RAM to Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Erase sector(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Blank check sector(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Read Part Identification number . . . . . . . . . 234 Read Boot code version number . . . . . . . . . 234 Compare <address1> <address2> <no of bytes> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Reinvoke ISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 IAP Status codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 JTAG Flash programming interface. . . . . . . 236
Chapter 21: EmbeddedICE logic

21.1 21.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 21.3 21.4 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
continued >>
User manual
Rev. 01 24 June 2005
269
Volume 1
UM10120
21.7 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
21.5 21.6
Reset state of multiplexed pins . . . . . . . . . . 238 Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Chapter 22: Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM)

22.1 22.2 22.3 22.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETM configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 240 240 240 22.4 22.5 22.6 22.7 Pin description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset state of multiplexed pins . . . . . . . . . . Register description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 241 242 243

23.1 23.2 23.3 23.3.1 23.3.2 23.3.3 23.3.4 23.4 23.4.1 23.4.2 23.4.3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RealMonitor components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RMHost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RMTarget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How RealMonitor works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to enable Realmonitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding stacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IRQ mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Undef mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 244 244 245 245 245 246 247 247 247 247 23.4.4 SVC mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4.5 Prefetch Abort mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4.6 Data Abort mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4.7 User/System mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4.8 FIQ mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4.9 Handling exceptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4.10 RealMonitor exception handling. . . . . . . . . . 23.4.11 RMTarget initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4.12 Code example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.5 RealMonitor build options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 248 248 248 248 248 248 249 249 252

24.1 24.2 24.3 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Disclaimers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2005

All rights are reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the prior written consent of the copyright owner. The information presented in this document does not form part of any quotation or contract, is believed to be accurate and reliable and may be changed without notice. No liability will be accepted by the publisher for any consequence of its use. Publication thereof does not convey nor imply any license under patent- or other industrial or intellectual property rights. Date of release: 24 June 2005
Published in The Netherlands

ARM7 Prirucnik (LPC2138)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ARM7 Prirucnik (LPC2138)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ARM7 Prirucnik (LPC2138)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UM10120

Volume 1: LPC213x User Manual

Revision history Rev 01 Date 20050624 Description Initial version

Rev. 01 24 June 2005

In-System/In-Application Programming (ISP/IAP) via on-chip boot-loader software.

One (LPC2131/2) or two (LPC2134/6/8) 8 channel 10-bit A/D converters provide(s) a

Vectored interrupt controller with configurable priorities and vector addresses.

Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2005. All rights reserved.

Rev. 01 24 June 2005

On-chip integrated oscillator operates with external crystal in range of 1 MHz to

1.4 Device information

LPC2131 LPC2132 LPC2134 LPC2136 LPC2138

Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2005. All rights reserved.

Rev. 01 24 June 2005

1.5 Architectural overview

1.6 ARM7TDMI-S processor

Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2005. All rights reserved.

Rev. 01 24 June 2005

1.7 On-chip Flash memory system

1.8 On-chip Static RAM (SRAM)

Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2005. All rights reserved.

Rev. 01 24 June 2005

1.9 Block diagram

EMULATION TRACE MODULE

PLL system clock

SYSTEM FUNCTIONS VECTORED INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

AMBA AHB (Advanced High-performance Bus)

INTERNAL SRAM CONTROLLER

INTERNAL FLASH CONTROLLER

AHB DECODER AHB TO VPB BRIDGE VPB DIVIDER

32/64/128/ 256/512 kB FLASH

CAPTURE/ COMPARE TIMER 0/TIMER 1

DSR1(1),CTS1(1), RTS1(1), DTR1(1) DCD1(1),RI1(1)

PWM0 SYSTEM CONTROL

Fig 1. LPC2131/2/4/6/8 block diagram

Rev. 01 24 June 2005

2.1 Memory maps

4.0 GB AHB PERIPHERALS 3.75 GB VPB PERIPHERALS 3.5 GB

0xFFFF FFFF 0xF000 0000 0xE000 0000

RESERVED ADDRESS SPACE

Fig 2. System memory map

Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2005. All rights reserved.

Rev. 01 24 June 2005

4.0 GB AHB PERIPHERALS 4.0 GB - 2 MB

0xFFFF FFFF 0xFFE0 0000 0xFFDF FFFF

0xF000 0000 0xEFFF FFFF

3.5 GB + 2 MB VPB PERIPHERALS 3.5 GB

0xE020 0000 0xE01F FFFF 0xE000 0000

Rev. 01 24 June 2005

VECTORED INTERRUPT CONTROLLER

0xFFFF F000 (4G - 4K)

Fig 4. AHB peripheral map

Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2005. All rights reserved.

Rev. 01 24 June 2005

0xE01F FFFF 0xE01F C000

Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2005. All rights reserved.

Rev. 01 24 June 2005

2.2 LPC2131/2132/2134/2136/2138 memory re-mapping and boot block

Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2005. All rights reserved.